MAN-00031-Scrorpio VLX Repair Manual Rev1

SCORPIO Vlx
REPAIR MANUAL
Revision 1
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
CONFIDENTIAL
• ONLY FOR INTERNAL CIRCULATION WITHIN RELEASED BY :
M&M AUTHORISED DEALERS & SERVICE CENTRES
• PASSING ON TO THRID PARTY IS NOT PERMITTED
• ALWAYS CHECK FOR THE LATEST VERSION
TECHNICAL PUBLICATION CELL
MAHINDRA & MAHINDRA LTD
Rev 1 – NOVEMBER 2007
The reproduction, translation, transmission, in part of whole of the present document, are prohibited without the prior written consent of Mahindra & Mahindra Ltd. © 2007 Mahindra & Mahindra Ltd
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Table of Contents
M Hawk 2.2. L
Air Intake System
Cooling system
Fuel system
Emission control system
Clutch
NGT 530R
Propeller shaft
Rear axle
Front suspension
Rear suspension
HVAC
Brakes
ABS Brakes
Steering
Immobilizer
Audio
Cruise control
Rain & Light sensing
Reverse Parking assistance
Smart Power window.
Tyre pressure monitoring system
Wheels
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
M-Hawk 2.2 L Engine
Contents
Description
Trouble Shooting
Care of the System
In Car Repairs
Working principle of various sub systems of the Engine
Dismantling & overhauling of the Engine.
Working Principle, Dismantling & Overhauling of the Turbocharger
Specifications & Wear Data
Lubricants
Sealant Application Pattern & Recommended Sealant
Tightening Torques
Tightening Sequence
List of the MST
All copyrights reserved by
Mahindra & Mahindra Ltd Scorpio VLX Engine M-Hawk

Confidential- For Internal Circulation Only Nov. 07
Page 1 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Description
The 2.2-liter Turbocharged and intercooled common rail direct injected

diesel engine with a bore 85 and stroke of 96 mm develop 120 HP at 4000
RPM and a torque of 29.5 Kg-m at 1800-2800 RPM.
A variable geometry turbocharger controls the boost to 2.2 bar. The

compressed air is cooled by the charge intercooler which is mounted
upstream of the turbocharger. The cooled air enters the inlet manifold’s
plenum and it enters the Aluminium cylinder head through the inlet valves
having an angle.
The piston features re-entrant type combustion chamber and having

ferrous ring insert in the Top ring groove. A 3-ring pack is used. The top
ring is asymmetrical barrel face and with CKS coating and keystone shape.
The 2nd ring is taper faced. The 3rd is Conformable Oil Ring.
The forged connecting rod is connected to induction-hardened crankshaft.

The small end of the connecting rod is trapezoidal shaped to reduce the
mass as well as to ensure higher loading. The crankshaft is induction
hardened with the filets hardened & ground. The flywheel has a shrunk fit
ring gear and also a ball bearing to act as pilot for the gearbox input
shaft. The front end is having a rubber moulded dampener pulley
The high pressure pump & camshaft are chain driven. There are two
overhead camshafts (Inlet and exhaust). The valves are actuated through
HFF & RLA (hydraulic tappets). There are four valves per cylinder. This
ensures that the charge fill as well as the purging is optimum.

Page 2 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Trouble Shooting
Refer to the Service diagnosis chart. Additional tests & diagnostic

procedures may be necessary for specific engine complaints that can not
be isolated using only the diagnostic chart.
Information concerning the additional checks is provided within the

following diagnostic.
Cylinder compression pressure Test
The results of the cylinder compression test can be utilized to diagnose

several engine malfunctions.
Before carrying out the compression test ensure that the battery is in
good working condition. Otherwise the indicated pressures may not be
valid for diagnostic purpose.
Remove all the injectors.

Fit the dummy injector (MST Tool) and connect it with the compression
gauge.
Disconnect the engine RPM sensor or phase sensor connector so that
the engine does not start.
Crank the engine.
Note the compression value should be 30 bars.
Repeat the procedure for the other cylinder.
Refer to the Specification for the value.
Engine cylinder Head Gasket Failure Diagnosis
A leaking engine cylinder head gasket usually results in loss of power, loss
of coolant and engine misfiring, overheating and poor fuel economy.
An engine cylinder head gasket leak can be:

A. Between adjacent cylinders
Or
B. Between a cylinder and adjacent water jacket.
Cylinder head gasket failure between cylinders is indicated by


Page 3 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Loss of power and /or engine misfiring.
Cylinder head gasket leaking between a cylinder and coolant passage

results in coolant foaming or overheating and loss of coolant indicate
leakage in engine water jackets.
Cylinder to Cylinder Leakage Test
Check the cylinder compression pressure as already explained. Leakage

between cylinders will be result in drop of compression pressure by nearly
50 to 70% in the affected cylinders.
Cylinder to Water jacket Leakage Test
• Remove the radiator cap.

• Warm up the engine and allow it to warm up until the engine
thermostat opens.
• If large combustion /combustion pressure leak exist, bubbles will be
visible in coolant.
• If bubbles are not visible, install a radiator pressure tester and
pressurize the cooling circuit. If a cylinder is leaking combustion
pressure into the water jackets then the tester’s needle will pulsate
with every combustion stroke of the cylinder.
Symptom Causes Remedial action

Engine will not start 1. Air intake 9 Replace the element.
& emit black smoke obstructed 9 Check for free operation
of Turbocharger.
2. Defective 9 Replace
injectors
3. Lack of 9 Check compression
compression. pressure.- if low check
for valve seat ,rings &
liner wear
4. Cylinder head 9 Replace the cylinder

gasket failure head gasket.
5. Engine timing- 9 Check timing chain.

Page 4 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Valve
6. CR system 9 Refer diagnostic manual.
Noisy engine & black 1. Faulty injectors. 9 Replace injectors

smoke.
2. Loose main 9 Tighten the main
bearings bearings.
3. Broken parts 9 Inspect and replace the

broken parts.
4. EGR valve stuck 9 Check the EGR valve &

open replace if required
mechanically
Engine does not give 1. Air intake 9 Replace air cleaner
full power. restricted. element if required.
2. Clogged fuel 9 Replace filter.

filter.
injectors.
4. Air leaks in 9 Plug the leaks, replace

pressure line hose or clip if required.
after
turbocharger(
Turbo to
intercooler,
intercooler &
intercooler to
intake manifold)
5. Fuel return pipe 9 Locate the kink/block in

to tank blocked. return pipe and rectify.
6. Valve leak 9 Check the compression,

relap if required.
7. Turbocharger 9 Get the Turbocharger

Page 5 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
damaged. repaired at authorized
TEL dealer.
8. Gas leaks
between exhaust 9 Replace gaskets.
manifold &
cylinder head.
9. leaking exhaust 9 Tighten the TC mounting

system. bolts. Replace gasket if
required.
10. Exhaust gas 9 Correct the leak

leak between
turbo & manifold.
11. Gas leak 9 Change the gasket or the

between EGR hose.
pipe joints
12. EGR pipe leak. 9 Replace the pipe.
13. Fuels supply 9 Remove the restriction.

line kink creating
restriction.
14. Compression 9 Check compression.

leak.
15. Jammed piston 9 Replace piston rings.

rings
16. Viscous fan 9 Check the VFD as

continuously outlined in cooling.
engaged. Replace if required.
17. Vacuum leak 9 Check the vacuum leak


Page 6 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
to the VGT and rectify. Please note
actuator causing that the VGT operation is
the delayed VGT sensitive to vacuum leak
operation
Check CR system Refer the diagnostic manual

Noisy engine & high 1. Cylinder head 9 Replace the cylinder
smoke ( White/ gasket defective. head gasket.
Grey) 2. Worn out or 9 Lap the valve seats or
damaged valve regrind.
seats.
3. Leaking injector 9 Tighten the injector
holder holder.
Black smoke. 1. Air intake 9 Check for hoses, replace

restricted. air cleaner element.
2. Defective 9 Check injectors.

injectors
3. Air leaks. 9 Check for leaks between

Turbocharger to
intercooler, intercooler
& intercooler to inlet
manifold.
4. EGR valve stuck 9 Check the EGR valve
open
5. Restricted 9 Remove restriction or
exhaust system. replace parts.
6. Gas leak between 9 Replace manifold gasket
exhaust manifold or parts.
& cylinder head.
7. Worn out rings, 9 Overhaul engine.
liners & valves.
8. Improper vacuum 9 Check & correct

connection for
EGR valve
Excessive oil 1. Cracked vacuum 9 Check the vacuum line

Page 7 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
consumption line hoses. from the alternator to
the EGR valve - check for
leaks, crack. And vacuum
line to the VGT actuator
Replace cracked hoses.
2. Clogged air filter 9 Replace element.

element.
3. Restriction in air 9 Locate & remove

intake to restriction.
compressor duct.
4. Restrictions in 9 Remove the restriction in

turbocharger oil the drainpipe.
drain line.
5. Restriction in 9 Check the crankcase

crankcase ventilation & rectify.
breather.
6. Damaged oil 9 Replace the oil separator

separator
7. Turbocharger 9 Change oil, filter, service

damaged. the Turbocharger & use
recommended oils &
drain intervals. Follow
the recommended
procedure while shutting
down.
9 Repair Turbocharger.
8. Worn out rings, 9 Overhaul engine.

liners, and
valves.
9. External oil leaks 9 Stop the external oil

leakages.

Page 8 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
10. Leakages 9 Change the vacuum

through inlet hoses.
manifold 9 Change the manifold
mounting face gasket or replace the
allowing dust manifold.
entry.
11. Bend/kink in 9 Remove the bend or
any of the oil kinks.
return
pipe’s/vacuum
hoses.
12. Defective 9 Replace the vacuum

vacuum pump. pump.
Blue smoke. 1. Clogged air filter 9 Replace element.

element.
2. Restriction in air 9 Locate & remove

intake to restriction.
compressor duct.
3. Air leak between 9 Locate the leaks,

the Turbocharger change hose or clamp if
to intake required.
manifold.
4. Excess oil. 9 Correct the oil level.
5. Wear in valve 9 Check the valve stem

seal. seals, replace if
required.
6. Wear in piston 9 Check the compression

rings & liner. pressure, replace rings &
liners.
7. TC oil seal leaks 9 Check the Turbocharger
if defective get it

Page 9 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
attended.
White smoke. 1. Improper timing 9 Check sprockets & chain

for wear. Rectify
2. Defective 9 Replace the cylinder

cylinder head head gasket.
gasket.
3. Restriction in fuel 9 Remove the restrictions.

supply
4.
Starter will not work 1. Electrical 9 Refer the electrical
or only cranks complaints. section.
slightly
2. Check water 9 If water level reduced
level. drastically then check
for hydrostatic lock.
3. Hydrostatic lock
9 Remove the water in the
cylinder and find the
cause for water entry.
Starter will not 1. Weak battery. 9 Check the battery
crank the engine. specific gravity.
2. Corroded or loose 9 Clean & tighten battery
battery connections.
connection
3. Faulty starter. 9 Repair starter.
4. Improper 9 Rectify earthing.

earthing.
Noisy valves 1. Thin or diluted 9 Change oil.

oil.
2. Low oil pressure. 9 Check the oil level.
3. Worn HLA 9 Replace the HLA.
4. Worn valve 9 Replace the valve
guides. guides.

Page 10 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
5. Excessive runout 9 Grind valve seats and
of valves seats valves.
6. Oil thickening 9 Replace oil & find the
reasons of thickening,
rectify.
7. Aeration in oil 9 Follow the de-aeration
procedure.
Oil pressure drop 1. Low oil level. 9 Check engine oil level.
2. Defective oil 9 Install new sensor.

pressure sensor.
3. Clogged oil filter. 9 Replace filter.
4. Clogged oil cooler 9 Clean the oil cooler.
5. Clogged oil 9 Clean the strainer.

strainer.
6. Pressure relief 9 Clean the valve & bore

valve in oil filter and assemble.
bracket stuck.
7. Oil leaks- internal 9 Check the gasket

between the block &
front cover or any of the
MOG plugs
8. Worn parts in oil 9 Replace the worn parts

pump. or pump.
9. Excessive bearing 9 Check bearing

clearances clearances.
10. Thin or diluted 9 Change oil to correct

oil. viscosity.
11. Excessive 9 Remove the valve,


Page 11 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
bearing inspect, clean & refit.
clearance.
12. Oil pump relief 9 Remove sump, inspect

valve stuck. the parts & replace.
13. Oil pump 9 Check for sealant at the

suction tube face of the suction pipe.
loose, bent or
cracked.
14. Sealant
blocking the
suction 9 Install new pump.
15. Oil pump

cover warped or
cracked
Oil leaks 1. Worn oil seals 9 Replace seals.
2. Misaligned or 9 Replace gasket.

deteriorated
gaskets.
3. Loose fastener, 9 Tighten fastener

broken or porous 9 Repair or replace.
metal parts
Care of the System --
The performance of the engine is dependent on ensuring that the

following maintenance is carried out as per the schedule without fail.
Accessory Belt : The belt system employs an auto tensioner. Hence no

tension adjustment is required. The belt for the HVAC is having a manual
tensioner. This needs to be checked at every 10,000 Kms & readjusted if

Page 12 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
required. The manual tensioner bearing needs to be replaced at every
80,000 Km
Air cleaner: The element should be replaced at every 40,000 Kms or when
red indicator band shows. For the detailed procedure, refer to the Air
Intake System.
Oil:. The oil should conform to CH4 grade and with a viscosity Index of
15W40. It should be kept in mind that in the turbocharger engine the oil
has to have do an additional load of lubricating and cooling the
Turbocharger shaft If any oil of lower specification is used it can break
down under the high thermal load at the turbine end of the shaft
especially during the hot shutdown.
This oil grade also ensures that the oil consumption is within the desire
limits. Use Maximile Supreme Grade of oils. The Oil change intervals are
first at 5000 Kms. & then subsequently every 15000 Kms.
Cooling system: Ensure that no leakages are present. For details of the
coolant and ratio refer the Cooling System.
Turbocharger: The engine is having a Variable Geometry Turbocharger.

This turbocharger helps in maintaining a good power curve at low speeds
also.
EGR: The following additional check points have to followed during

scheduled maintenance.
• Check for any exhaust gas leakage through sealing faces, EGR pipe.
Formation of any black soot indicates leakage.
• Check the vacuum hoses for any leaks, cracks.
• Retighten all nuts and bolts as per the recommend torque.
As this engine is equipped with HLA with RFF (Hydraulic tappets); Tappet
setting is not required.

Page 13 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
In Car Repairs –
The in car repairs which can be carried out are:
Accessory belt removal & Refitment
VFD Assembly with Fan Blade removal
High Pressure pump Removal
Oil filter changing
Turbocharger removal & Refitment
Cylinder head gasket Replacement
Accessory belt Remove & Refit –
Using the special tool, rotate the auto tensioner in the direction shown
in the figure. Lock the auto tensioner in that position using a pin.
Remove the auto tensioner mounting bolts & remove the belt tensioner.
Note – Check the auto tensioner free arm position. Ensure that end of
travel is not reached.

Page 14 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Fan Blade & Viscous Fan Drive Removal & Assembly –
Caution: Do not remove the

accessory belt before removing the
nut.
Loosen the fan nut.
Note that the threads are

anticlockwise threads. Hence to
loosen then the direction of
rotation has to be clockwise when
viewed from front.
Do not tamper or service the

center portion of the fan.

Page 15 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Remove the radiator shroud &

remove the fan.
The fan blade assembly and the VFD

assembly can be removed together.
High Pressure Pump Removal & Refitment –

To replace the high pressure pump; it is advisable to remove the engine
out from vehicle.
Follow the steps explained in the chapter Removal of the Engine.

Page 16 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Oil filter removal & refitting --
Remove the oil filter using the MST

---
After removal, ensure that the

central stud is fully tight.
It can work out loose while

removal of the filter.
If it has worked loose then tighten

it to torque of 25-30 Nm ( 18-22
Lbft)
While fitting the new oil filter. Apply oil on the “O” rings.
Tighten by hand only.

Page 17 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Turbocharger removal & Refitment –
Remove the air intake hose to turbocharger & the outlet hose from turbo
charger to Intercooler.
Caution - Please cover the opening of the turbocharger to avoid
accidentally dropping any foreign object.
Do not apply oil to the hoses while fitment.
Remove the exhaust pipe from the

turbocharger.
Note - It is recommended to
apply rust cleaning spray (WD 40)
in the nuts before attempting to
remove otherwise, the stud is
tend to break.

Page 18 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Remove the oil feed pipe and the
oil return pipe to turbo.
Loosen & remove the turbo

charger support bracket.
Remove the turbocharger

mounting fasteners from exhaust
manifold.
Cylinder Head Gasket Removal & Refitment –
Disconnect the battery cables &

remove the battery.

Page 19 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Remove the NVH cover.
Remove the Intercooler hoses & the

intercooler.

Page 20 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Loosen & Remove the radiator drain cock. Collect the coolant -if the
coolant is clean; then it can be reused.
Remove the hose fastened on the Front cover.
Loosen & remove the water collector pipe from the head.

Page 21 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Remove the electrical connections of:
Sensors (HFM, Cam Phase Sensor, Boost Pressure Sensor)

Water temperature sensor & Oil Pressure Switch
Connection to Injectors, Modulator etc.
Alternator connections
Remove the air cleaner assembly.

Remove the hose connection from the Turbocharger end TC to
intercooler.

Page 22 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Remove the exhaust pipe at the

Turbocharger outlet elbow.
Remove the vacuum hose from the

vacuum pump in alternator to
booster.
Remove both the oil separators.

(Labyrinth & Cyclone)
Remove the EGR pipe mounting clips & in the sequence as shown in
figure.

Page 23 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Using the special tool, rotate the auto tensioner in the direction shown in
the figure. Lock the auto tensioner in that position using a pin.
Remove the belt.
Remove the lubrication oil lines
connected to the alternator vacuum
pump from vacuum pump end.

Page 24 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Loosen & remove the oil filter.
Loosen & Remove the alternator

mounting bolt & the alternator
brace.
Remove the alternator.
Loosen & remove Air Intake pipe.

Page 25 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Loosen & remove the oil filler neck.
Remove the dip stick & remove the

dip stick clamp bolt & the dip stick
guide.

Page 26 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Loosen & remove the Intercooler
bracket mounting bolts & remove
both the intercooler brackets.
Remove the leak off pipes from the

injector.

Page 27 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Remove High Pressure pipe from
HPP to common rail.
Loosen & remove the high pressure

pipes from common rail & injector.
It is advisable to loosen the high

pressure pipes from Common Rail
end first.
Loosen & remove the injector

holding clamps & remove the
injector.

Page 28 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Loosen & remove the intake
manifold mounting bolts.
Caution – Care must be taken while

removing the Inlet Manifold
Mounting bolt near the EMPROP.
It is advisable to use an open ended
spanner to loosen the particular
bolt.
Loosen & remove the Oil supply

lines to turbocharger.
Note – It is recommended to remove

the lock clip of the Oil Return Line
at the cylinder block end first &
then the oil supply line inlet to the
turbocharger.
Loosen the Turbocharger Mounting

bolt from the support bracket & the
support bracket mounting bolts
from the block.
Loosen & remove the Turbocharger
mounting bolts from exhaust
manifold.

Page 29 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Loosen the tensioner pulley nut.
Loosen the lock nut of the AC belt

tension setting bolt. Loosen &
remove the AC belt tension setting
bolt.
Remove the AC belt.
Loosen & remove the damper pulley

bolt & the damper pulley.
Care must be taken while handling
the damper pulley.
Loosen & remove the front cover

bolts. Remove the front cover.
Caution – To remove the front

cover; 3 Nos. bolts should be
removed from the front side of the
oil sump.

Page 30 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Loosen the cam sprocket bolt.
• Loosen & remove the

secondary (Upper) tensioner.
• Remove the chain guides by
removing the ‘e’clips.

Page 31 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Loosen & remove cam to cam chain

guide.
Remove the bolt & remove the cam

sprocket.
Remove the bolt & remove the

other cam sprocket.
Loosen & remove the cam cover

bolts.
Remove the cam cover.
Caution – If the cam phase is not

dismantled from cam cover; care
must be taken while handling the
cam cover.

Page 32 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Lift & remove both the cam shafts.
Lift out the HLA & RFA assembly.

Place the HLA & RFA in straight
upward position in a clean tray.
Caution – Ensure that the HLA &

RFA are kept in straight upward
direction in the head assembly if
not removed.
Loosen & remove the water outlet

pipe.
Loosen & remove the head bolts.
Note – It is advisable to follow the

tightening sequence for loosening
the bolts.
Remove the head assembly.

Page 33 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Remove the Head Gasket.
Working principle of the various subsystems of the Engine –
The various subsystems are:
Turbocharger: Please refer to the Air Intake System section.
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
Crankcase ventilation
Oil circulation
Working Principle of Exhaust Gas Recirculation -

Page 34 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
During acceleration and in higher loads the combustion chamber

temperatures increase. The high combustion temperatures increase the
NOx generation. The higher percentage of NOx generated in the
combustion chamber come out through the tail pipe in the atmosphere.
To reduce the amount of NOx coming through the tail pipe the EGR
system adds exhaust gases into the fresh air that is going into the
combustion chamber. Since the exhaust gas is already burnt hence when
mixed with fresh air acts an inert gas. Thus when the exhaust gas mixed
with fresh air enters the combustion chamber, it performs a dual role.
The first role it does is that it reduces the amount of oxygen available for
combustion. The second role that it acts is as a heat absorbent/heat sink.
The net effect is that it reduces the combustion temperatures. This
results in lower amount of NOx being generated.
To control the amount/percentage of exhaust gases to be circulated back

to the combustion chamber an ECU is used. The ECU monitors the coolant
temperature, altitude, engine speed, and accelerator pedal position and
the air flow. Based on the above parameters the ECU operates a switch
that in turn controls the amount of vacuum going to the EGR valve. The
amount of vacuum applied controls the lift of the EGR valve.
EGR Valve
Remove the EGR valve and check it valve-sticking, deposition of carbon

etc. If excess carbon deposits and sticky valve noticed then it should be
cleaned with a suitable solvent, so that the correct valve seat is ensured.
After cleaning the valve blow air from the bottom side of the valve and
check for any leakages.
EGR Pipe
Remove the EGR pipe and check for gas leakage, damages etc. Clean the
gasket seating area from any carbon deposits, burrs etc. Spray WD 40 rust
cleaning spray on the nut.

Page 35 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
To check the pipe for any leakages, close one end of flange and from
other end blow air at 2 bars. Dip the pipe in water and observe if any
leakage is observed. If any leaks are observed then the pipe has to be
replaced. Do not attempt to weld/ seal the leakage joint
Vacuum Modulator Valve
Does not require any maintenance. However please check and confirm
that that the line from the modulator to air cleaner is clean and the hole
at the air cleaner hose end is not choked.
Working principle of Crankcase Ventilation System –
The ventilation system is closed ventilation type.
Certain amount of oil will be carried from the oil separator to the Air inlet
hose, which is normal. However if it is excessive please look for all the
causes mentioned in the high blow bye.
Oil circulation system –

Page 36 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
An external G rotor pump sucks the oil through the strainer. The oil pump
is driven by the rotor, which is mounted, on the crankshaft. The oil pump
is mounted in the front cover.
The oil goes to the oil filter. The oil cooler is located in between the oil
pump and the oil filter. The oil cooler is provided with a bypass throttle.
After cooling the oil goes through the oil filter and is delivered to the
main oil gallery.
Oil is supplied to the main bearing ,con rod bearing, thrust bearing and
the piston cooling jets. In the front of the block the oil is given to the
secondary chain, chain tensioner, the vaccum pump and the turbocharger.
The oil supply to the secondary chain tensioner, the camshaft bearing and
the HLLA is after a orifice
Dismantling & overhauling of the Engine –
Comprise of 5 steps:
Removal of the engine
Dismantling
Inspection
Assembly
Testing

Page 37 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Removal of the engine from the vehicle –
Disconnect the battery cables &

remove the battery.
Remove the Intercooler hoses & the

intercooler.
Remove the bonnet.
Remove the radiator drain cock.

Collect the coolant -if the coolant is

Page 38 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
clean it so that it can be reused.
Remove the electrical connections of:
All sensors (HFM, Cam Phase Sensor, Crankshaft Speed Sensor, Boost
Pressure Sensor etc.)
Water temperature sensor & Oil Pressure Switch etc.
Connection to Injectors, Modulator etc.
Alternator & Starter connections

Page 39 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Remove the air cleaner assembly.

Remove the hose connection from the Turbocharger end TC to
intercooler.
Remove the exhaust pipe at the

Turbocharger outlet elbow.
Remove the starter motor.

Page 40 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Remove the fuel lines from filter to
High Pressure Pump & return to fuel
tank.
• Remove hoses connecting the water pump to radiator.

• Remove the hose connected from the water pump to heater and
also the heater return line.
• Remove the fan shroud.
• Remove the radiator.
Remove the power steering
connection hoses from the power
steering pump.
Remove the pipes connecting from
AC compressor suction and discharge
lines.
Remove the vacuum hose from the
vacuum pump in alternator to
booster.

Page 41 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Drain the oil from the sump.
Attach lifting device.
Remove the front insulators

mounting bolts.
Remove the gearbox mounting bolts.
Pull out and lift the engine from the

engine compartment.

Page 42 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Dismantling --
Mount the engine on the Engine stand.
Remove both the oil separators.

(Labyrinth & Cyclone)
Remove the EGR pipe mounting clips & in the sequence as shown in
figure.

Page 43 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Using the special tool, rotate the auto tensioner in the direction shown
in the figure. Lock the auto tensioner in that position using a pin.
Remove the lubrication oil lines

connected to the alternator
vacuum pump from vacuum pump
end.
Loosen & Remove the alternator

mounting bolt & the alternator
brace.
Remove the alternator.

Page 44 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Loosen & remove the power

steering pump mounting bolts.
Remove the power steering pump.
Loosen & remove the water pump

mounting bolts & remove the water
pump.
Loosen & remove Air Intake pipe.

Page 45 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Loosen & remove the oil filler neck.
Loosen & remove the oil filter.

Page 46 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Remove the dip stick & remove the

dip stick clamp bolt & the dip stick
guide.
Disconnect the coolant pipe clips connected to the oil cooler.

Loosen & remove the Oil Filter Body mounting bolts & remove the Oil
Filter Body.

Page 47 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Loosen & remove the Intercooler

bracket mounting bolts & remove
both the intercooler brackets.
Loosen & remove the Cam phase

sensor.

Page 48 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Remove the leak off pipes from the

injector.
Remove High Pressure pipe from

HPP to common rail.

Page 49 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Loosen & remove the high pressure

pipes from common rail & injector.
It is advisable to loosen the high

pressure pipes from Common Rail
end first.
Remove the common rail assembly.
Loosen & remove the injector

holding clamps & remove the
injector.
Loosen & remove the intake

manifold mounting bolts.
Caution – Care must be taken while

removing the Inlet Manifold
Mounting bolt near the EMPROP.
It is advisable to use an open ended
spanner to loosen the particular
bolt.

Page 50 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Remove the oil supply line to the
alternator from the cylinder block.
Remove the power steering pump

bracket from the cylinder block.
Loosen & remove the Oil supply

lines to turbocharger.
Note – It is recommended to
remove the lock clip of the Oil
Return Line at the cylinder block
end first & then the oil supply line
inlet to the turbocharger.

Page 51 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Loosen the Turbocharger Mounting bolt from the support bracket & the
support bracket mounting bolts from the block.
Loosen & remove the Turbocharger mounting bolts from exhaust
manifold.

Loosen the lock nut of the AC belt tension setting bolt. Loosen &

Page 52 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
remove the AC belt tension setting bolt.
Remove the AC belt.
Loosen & remove the AC compressor mounting bolts & remove the
compressor.
Loosen & remove the AC compressor mounting bracket bolts & remove
the mounting bracket.
Remove the flexible pipe clip &

remove the pipe from water inlet
pipe to oil cooler.
Remove 2 Nos. clamping bolts &
remove the metal pipe from
cylinder block.
Loosen & remove the water inlet
pipe with metal pipe from the
cylinder block.

the damper pulley.
Loosen & remove the front cover

bolts. Remove the front cover.

Page 53 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Caution – To remove the front

cover; 3 Nos. bolts should be
removed from the front side of the
oil sump.
Lock the flywheel using the MST.
Note - Do not remove the MST from

flywheel.
Loosen the cam sprocket bolt.

Page 54 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Loosen the HPP sprocket nut.
Loosen & remove the flywheel

bolts.
Remove the MST.

Page 55 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
• Loosen & remove the secondary (Upper) tensioner.

• Remove the chain guides by removing the ‘e’clips.
• Press & lock the primary (Lower) tensioner. Loosen & remove the
mounting bolts & the tensioner.
Remove the bolt & remove the cam

sprocket.
Remove the bolt & remove the

other cam sprocket.
Loosen & remove the cam cover

bolts & remove the cam cover.
Lift & remove both the cam shafts.
Lift out the HLA & RFA assembly.

Page 56 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Loosen & remove the head bolts.
Note – It is advisable to follow the tightening sequence for loosening the

bolts.
Remove the head assembly.
Remove the Head Gasket.
Remove the head gasket.
Loosen the HPP mounting bolts.
Caution - Do not remove the

mounting bolts.

Page 57 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Remove HPP sprocket using the MST
Remove the timing chain.
Remove the HPP mounting bolts &

remove the HPP.
Remove the timing chain & remove

the crank sprocket.
Loosen & remove the Crankshaft

Speed Sensor.
Invert the engine.

Loosen & remove the Oil Sump
bolts.

Page 58 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Loosen & remove the Bed Plate

bolts & the Bed Plate.
Loosen & remove the rear seal

retainer & remove the rear seal.
Loosen & remove the connecting

rod cap bolts & caps.
Lift out the crank shaft assembly

with toner ring.

Page 59 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Loosen & remove oil jet bolts &
remove the oil jets.
Tap & remove the pistons with

connecting rods.

Page 60 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Loosen & remove the main oil gallery & auxiliary oil gallery plugs.
Caution - While fitting the Oil Gallery Plugs; Loctite is applied. So while
removing care must be taken to use proper sockets so that the head will
not get damaged.
Remove the circlip & tap the
gudgeon pin out.
Remove the piston rings.
Dismantling of the Head Assembly

Loosen & remove the Engine Lifting
hooks.

Page 61 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Remove the Valve Spring locks.

Remove the Retainer Valve Springs
– Upper , remove the Valve Springs
& the Valve Springs Retainer -
Bottom.
Remove Inlet & Exhaust Valves.

Note – If the valves are to be used
again ;mark the valves according to
the respective cylinder.
Separate the Water outlet pipe &

the nipple.
Remove the valve seals.
Remove the Valve guides & valve

seats using appropriate tools &
method.
Remove the Oil Gallery Plugs.
Inspection:
All the components should be inspected for wear. Any components, which
are beyond the wear limits, have to be replaced.
Over & above the wear limits: The following points also need to be
ensured.
Piston: Check for scuffing/scoring on the skirt. A hard thick layer of

carbon lacquer on top land is acceptable. (If the thick layer is present on
the piston check that the liner does not have scuffing)

Page 62 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
However scuffing of the top land and skirt giving indication of
overheating which is not acceptable.
Parent Bore : Any scoring on the parent bore is not acceptable.
Crankshaft: Check for scoring on the main as well as connecting rod

journal. If scoring is nominal and will not the increase the oil clearance
then the crankshaft can be used in, as it is condition.
However if it is unacceptable then the journal has to be ground up to

service limits only.
Any deep groove in the rear end oil seal seating area is unacceptable. It
will result in oil leaks.
Valve: If valve tip is worn out/ ridged then not acceptable
Main bearing and connecting rod bearing — If the scoring is nominal and
oil clearance is not affected, then it can be reused. However if flaking
/peeling of the bimetal in any particular zone only is present then use
new shell. Look for foreign particle embedded, deep scratches.
Dampener pulley rubber bonding – inspect for any gap between the
rubber ring and the outer/inner ring, Cracks on ring. Any deep groove in
the front oil seal seating area is unacceptable. It will lead to leakages.
If any deterioration of rubber or gap noticed between the ring and the
rubber replace the dampener pulley.
It is suggested that the dampener pulley be replaced at every 3,00,000

Kms.
Caution:
While measuring the inner diameter of the connecting rod big end and
main journal please take the measurements after torque tightening
only. For measurement purpose the torque should be Nm. Do not
reuse this bolt

Page 63 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
If line honing of the crankshaft’s journal in the block is done to rectify
any ovality. Then please ensure that the material from block half is not
removed. In absence of taking this precaution the piston will move up.
It will change the compression, influencing the performance. In the
worst case the valves can hit the piston.
Assembly –
The assembly sequence is the reverse of the dismantling procedure.

To obtain a good life of the rebuilt unit absolute cleanliness of the parts is
taken as a prerequisite and also the fact that all the parts have been
inspected.
The additional points which are mentioned are necessary to give you the
engine life same as the original engine.
Bolts: The following bolts are recommend to be replace every time they
are opened-if the Maximum length exceeds the specification. However the
connecting rod bolt has to be changed every time without exception.
The bolts have to be tightened by base torque then 2 stage angular

torque. The angular torque’s ensures that the bolts are torque tightened
up to yield point. And the 2 stage ensures that the clamping load for each
bolt is within a very close tolerance.
Cylinder head bolts - 10 no --Maximum length mm

Main Bearing Bolts - 10 no Maximum length mm
Connecting rod bolt s- 8 no Replace every time
Flywheel bolts - 6no Maximum length mm
Cylinder block – Top face -- Ensure that the tapping for the cylinder head
bolt as well as the crankshaft’s main journal is fine. Ensure that no water
or oil after cleaning is in the bolt holes (esp. the cylinder heads.). If found
please remove them, if necessary using cotton cloth (not cotton waste).
If the oil /water is not removed then it is possible that while tightening
the bolt. It may not allow complete tightening of the bolts and one will
get a false reading.

Page 64 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Cylinder head gasket –
It is a multi layer steel gasket type. Do not use any oil or shellac on the
cylinder head gasket or on the block face or the cylinder head face. The
gasket has to be fitted dry.
The gasket can be assembled any face up or down. However it is

suggested that the face with the numbers should be facing up.
Piston & Rings –
While fitting the piston rings ensure that the rings end gap are staggered
in 120°.
The first ring end gap should not be on the thrust axis but the minor axis
i.e. on the gudgeon pin axis. Please note that the first ring is keystone
shaped hence the top mark has to face up. The 2nd ring is taper faced. The
face, which should be on the top, has to be facing up. The 3rd ring is the
conformable type oil ring. It can be assembled either way.
While assembling the piston on to the liner- apply clean oil liberally on
the liner surface.
Bearing shells –
Caution - The bearing shells are marked with Red & Yellow paint mark
according to the clearances. The bearing shells need a selective
assembly for optimum performance of the engine.
While dismantling when the shells are removed from the Cylinder Block
as well as the Bed Plate; please note the colour & while assembly the
bearing shells marked with same colours are to be fitted at the
respective position.
Before fitting the bearing shell ensure that the parent bore of the
block/connecting rod are clean.
Wipe with a clean cloth the back end of shells before assembling on to the
block or connecting rod.
Ensure that the bearing shells are located properly in the notches.
Oil seals –

Page 65 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Ensure that
9 All the oil seals are fitted using the dolly MST.
9 Always ensure that the lip is coated with grease before fitment.
9 Apply engine oil on the outside diameter of seal. The receiving bore
should be free of burrs, dent.
Assembly Tips –
Whenever the HLA & RFF

assembly is removed from the
head or stored or while
handling ; should be kept in
straight direction.
Before assembling the HLA &

RFF back fill oil using a syringe
through the hole shown in the
sketch.

Page 66 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
While tightening the cam sprockets (Exhaust & Inlet); use the special tool
as shown to avoid the rotation of cam sprocket.
The Exhaust Camshaft can be identified easily because of the trigger

wheel for the Camshaft sensor.
Also please note that while assembly the machined portion on both the

Page 67 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
camshafts should be in vertical direction as shown in the sketch.
Stefa Plug
This tool has to be inserted in the stefa plug hole & then cam cover to be
assembled & torque tightened.
After torqueing the locator is to be removed & then mount the stefa plug.
Note - This practice has to be followed in service because this avoids oil
leakage in stefa plug joint.

Page 68 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Timing Procedure –
1. Rotate the engine in such a way that the crank shaft key comes at
12’o clock position (Facing towards the camshafts) as shown in fig.

Page 69 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
2. Fit the camshaft locking tool & the crankshaft locking pin as shown
in the sketch above.
3. Assemble the crankshaft sprocket, HPP sprocket & the primary

chain. Hand tighten the sprocket bolts.
4. Assemble the primary chain guide & Primary Chain Tensioner.
5. Assemble the floating chain guide.
6. Release the primary chain tensioner.
7. Tighten the bolt of HPP Sprocket to the specified torque.
8. Assemble the Inlet & Exhaust camshaft sprockets, Cam to Cam chain
guide & Secondary chain. Do not tighten the Camshaft sprocket
bolts.

Page 70 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
9. Assemble the Secondary Chain Guide & Secondary Chain Tensioner.
Release the Primary Chain Tensioner by rotating the bolt.
10. Turn & hold the Exhaust Cam Camshaft Sprocket against the
tightening direction with the help of the tool as shown in figure
above & tighten the bolt of Exhaust Camshaft Sprocket to the
specified torque.
11. Tighten the bolt of Intake Camshaft Sprocket to the specified

torque.
• Remove the tool for locking the Camshaft.

• Assemble the Front Cover & assemble the bolts. Tighten the
front cover bolts to the specified torque & following the
specified sequence.
• Assemble the flywheel. Torque tighten the Flywheel Bolts
following the specified sequence. Lock the flywheel using the
flywheel locking tool.
• Remove the Crankshaft Locking Pin from the Block.
• Fit the Damper Pulley & tighten the bolt to the specified
torque.
• Remove the Flywheel Locking Tool.
Cylinder head
While assembling the cam cover, first fit the dolly and then assemble the
cam cover, after that fit the end seals. Then only tighten the cam cover
as per the sequence given in the Sequence section. If the dolly is not used
then the probability of oil leak through the seals is high. The risk is that
the oil leak from the seals facing the fire wall is difficult to observe
during normal inspection. While inspection from bottom the oil leak may
be confused with transmission leak.
Oil separator
Please ensure sealant application in between the oil seprator and the
cylinder head in the seating areas only
Testing –

Page 71 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
After the engine is reassembled in the engine stand; it is recommended

that:
The engine is assembled back to the vehicle. All the connections are
made.
9 Start the engine

9 Run at idle for 5 minute. Observe for leaks.
9 Drive the vehicle at 50% of the maximum speed in each gear for about
10 to 30 Km each (Aprox.)
9 Hand over the vehicle to customer to drive with speed limitation for
2000 Kms.
9 After 5000 Kms. Readjust the fan belt and tappet clearance. Change
the engine oil.
DO NOT RUN THE ENGINE WITHOUT LOAD FOR HOURS FOR BEDDING IN.
THIS PROCESS ONLY HARMS THE ENGINE.
RUNNING THE ENGINE WITHOUT LOAD CAUSE RING FLUTTERING AND

DAMAGE TO RINGS AS WELL AS LINERS.
RUNNING THE ENGINE AT IDLE FOR PROLONGED TIME HAS SERIOUS

CONSEQUENCES ON MAJOR ENGINE COMPONENTS

Page 72 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Lubricants
Mahindra Maximile Supreme Or any other engine oil conforming to API

grade CH4 or above and a viscosity Index of 15W 40.
Rust cleaning solution (For the Turbocharger mounting nuts & Injector
removal):
Brand Name: WD-40---

Manufacturer- WD-40 COMPANY
MARKETEDBY— Hardcastle & Waud Manufacturing Co. Ltd.
Brabourne Stadium,
87, Veer Nariman Road
MUMBAI-20.

Page 73 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Specifications & Wear Data – M Hawk 2.2 L BS III
Figure Description Value

Bore 85 mm
Stroke 96 mm
Power- Max 120 HP @ 4000 RPM
Torque-Max 29.5 Kg-m @1800-2800
Firing Order 1-3-4-2
Direction of rotation Clockwise from fan side
Compression Ratio 18.5
Compression Standard Service Limit

Pressure bar
Piston Re-entrant Bowl
Piston Pin Full floating. Surface

hardened & ground. Offset
by 0.3 mm

Page 74 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Oil grade & Quantity API grade CH4
Viscosity Index 15W40
6 litres
Maximile Supreme

Inlet valve
OPENS 10 deg BTDC
CLOSES 10 deg ABDC
Exhaust Valve
OPENS 18 deg BBDC
CLOSES 15 deg ATDC
Oil filter bypass 1.0 bar

opening pressure
Oil pressure at
Idle ( 60∼80°C) 1.4 bar@90 deg C @ low
Max speed( 60∼80°C) idle
Piston ring end gaps Limits ( mm)
1st ring 0.25/0.4 0.6

2nd ring 0.24/0.5 0.4
3rd ring 0.4/0.6 0.8
Gudgeon pin O.D φ 0.005
31(-0.006)
Connecting rod – Wear limit

Small end bush I.D φ 0.010 microns
in assembled
condition
Piston ring thickness Service Limit
1st ring 2.097 +10/-031 (0.050)
2nd ring 2.00 -5/-30 (0.020)
3rd ring 2.500 /-30 (0.020)
-5
Big end bore ( W/O 0.005 microns

shell) Ø 54.018 – 54.006

Page 75 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Big end bore ( With 51 +16/+54 (0.010) microns
shell )
Connecting rod bend 0.050 mm
or twist
Figure Description Wear Limits Value

Connecting rod end Standard Service Limit
play 0.1 to 0.3
Crankshaft end play Standard Service Limit
0.1 to 0.3
Camshaft end play Standard Service Limit

0.1 to 0.2
Crankcase top Standard Service Limit

surface distortion
Cylinder head Standard Service Limit

bottom face
distortion
Height of cylinder Standard Service Limit
head from top to
bottom face
Camshaft Service Limit
Bearing pin dia First 32.000 -5/-66
24.000 -40/-53
Cam bore Service Limit

+25
First 32.000
24.000 +21
Roller Finger 0.005

Follower- Roller
bearing

Page 76 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Valve spring Standard Service Limit
Free Length 47.16
Squareness
Installed
Load/Installed length
Valve seat angle

Valve stem O.D Service limit
Inlet +8
5.980 /-8 0.020
Exhaust 5.960 +8/-8 0.020
Valve guide bore ID Service limit
Inlet 5.4 ±0.1 0.030

Exhaust 0.030
Thickness of the Standard Service Limit

valve head
Chain
Crank Sprocket 20Teeth

Idler Sprocket 28Teeth
HPP Sprocket 30 for Primary Drive & 21
for Secondary drive Teeth

Page 77 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Crankshaft pin Standard Service Limit
∅ OD -4
51 /-19 0.005
Roundness/Ovality 0.005mm / 0.008 mm
Cylindricity/Taper
Crankshaft journal Standard Service Limit

∅ OD 62 /-15
0
0.005
Roundness/Ovality 0.005mm / 0.008mm
Cylindricity/Taper
Main bearing bore dia Service Limit

with shell 62 +43
0.025
Wall thickness –main Service Limit

bearing shell 1.986 / 2.000 0.020
Main Bearing oil Standard Service Limit

clearance
Undersize of the c/s Dimensions of the crankpin.

crank pin ∅ OD
0.25mm US
0.50 mm US
0.75 mm US
Crankshaft journal Standard Service Limit
∅ OD
Roundness/ Ovality
Cylindricity/ Taper
Undersize of the c/s Dimensions of the journal

journal pin ∅ OD
0.25mm US
0.50 mm US
0.75 mm US

Page 78 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector

Crankshaft bend Standard Service Limit
! FILLETS ARE HARDENED. DO

NOT ATTEMPT TO
CAUTION STRAIGTEN
Crankshaft fillet Standard Service

radius Limits
Crankshaft Hardness
Minimum
Connecting rod Standard Service Limit

Bearing oil clearance
The Maximum length

of bolts after which
they can not be used
Cylinder head bolts

Main Bearing Bolts
Connecting rod
Flywheel bolts length
Thermostat
Starts opening at
Fully opens at
Lift
Water pump pulley 1.289
ratio

Page 79 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Flywheel
Width from Mounting
face to clutch face
Flywheel Standard Service Limit
Flatness 0.05
Runout 0.05

Page 80 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Sealant Application Pattern & Sealant Recommended –
Sealant between Cylinder Block & Bed Plate – Loctite 574

Page 81 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Sealant on Front Cover – Loctite 5900
Sealant between Head & Cam Cover – Loctite 574
Sealant between Cam Cover & Oil Separator – Loctite 5900

Page 82 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Sealant On Oil Sump – Loctite 5900
Water Pump ‘O’ Ring – Loctite 401

Page 83 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Tightening Torques --
Description Torque Value

Head Bolts
Bed Plate bolts
Main Bearing bolts
Connecting Rod caps
Flywheel 50 ± 5 Nm
65 Nm ± 50
Damper Pulley 150 ± 15 Nm
65 Nm ± 50
HPP Mounting Nut
Trigger wheel to Crank 10 Nm
Speed Sensor Mtg. bolt 10 ± 1 Nm

Oil Jets mtg. bolts 10 ± 1 Nm
HPP sprocket lock nut
HP pipe nut – Rail End 33 ± 2 Nm
HP pipe nut – Injector End 27 ± 2 Nm
Viscous Fan clutch nut 45 ± 5 Nm
Injector holding clamp nuts
Injector holding studs 25 ± 3 Nm
Common Rail Mounting Bolts 25 ± 3 Nm
HP pipe Pump to Rail – Pump End 20 Nm
HP pipe Pump to Rail – Rail End 33 Nm
Front cover Bolts
Water Pump Bolts
Water Outlet Pipe from Water 25 ± 3 Nm
Pump
Water Inlet pipe from Head to
Radiator
Alternator Bracket bolts 35 ± 3 Nm
Chain Guide Bolts 10 ± 1 Nm
Chain Tensioner (Primary) Bolts 25 ± 3 Nm
Chain Tensioner (Secondary) Bolts 25 ± 3 Nm
Cam to Cam Chain Guide 10 Nm
Cam Sprocket Bolts 90 ± 5 Nm
Oil Filler neck bolts

Page 84 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Dip Stick Guide 18 Nm
Oil Filter body 25 ± 3 Nm
Alternator oil supply line – Banjo 17.5 ± 2.5 Nm
End
Alternator oil supply line – Block 18 Nm
End
Power Steering Pump Mtg. Bolts 25 ± 3 Nm
Exhaust Manifold Mtg. Bolts 25 ± 3 Nm
Turbocharger Mtg. studs on 25 ± 3 Nm
exhaust manifold
Turbocharger Oil supply pipe – 17.5 ± 2.5 Nm
Banjo End
Turbocharger Oil supply pipe – 18
Block End
Turbocharger Oil drain Banjo Bolt 25 ± 3 Nm
EGR Mtg. nuts
AC compressor Mtg. Bracket Bolts 25 ± 3 Nm
AC compressor Mtg. Bolts 35 ± 3 Nm
Intercooler Mtg. Nuts 17.5 ± 2.5 Nm
Intercooler dampers 17.5 ± 2.5 Nm
AC belt tensioner
Automatic belt tensioner Mtg. nuts 25 ± 3 Nm
Bolts - Inlet Manifold

Page 85 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Torque Sequence –
Flywheel Bolts
Cam Cover Bolts
Engine
Engine
Front
Rear
Side
Side

Page 86 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Front Cover
Head Bolts
Engine
Engine
Front
Rear
Side
Side

Page 87 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Cylinder Block & Bed Plate Bolts
Engine
Engine
Front
Rear
Side
Side
Oil Separator Bolts

Page 88 of 92
Engine
Engine
Front
Rear
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Oil Sump
Engine
Engine
Rear
Front
Side
Side
Inlet Manifold
Engine
Front
Side

Page 89 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Exhaust Manifold

Page 90 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Special Tools --
Description / Part No. / Sketch Usage View

Flywheel Lock
MST 271
Lock Pin for Chain Tensioner

MST 273
Drift Flywheel Bearing

MST – 544

Page 91 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Wrench Oil Filter Remover
MST – 545
Cylinder Head Bolt Deep Socket

MST 588

Page 92 of 92
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Air Intake System- M-Hawk
Contents
Description
Trouble Shooting
Care of the System
In Car Repairs
Working Principle, Inspection & Fitment procedures of the

Turbocharger
Specifications
Tightening Torques
Mahindra & Mahindra Ltd Scorpio VLX Air Intake - VLX

Page 1 of 15
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Description
The air is sucked through a foam type air cleaner. The air enters the air
cleaner housing at the bottom and leaves at the top.
The air cleaner is made up of 5 different layers of foam. Each layer is

having different cleaning efficiency.
After filtration the air goes to the turbocharger.
The line diagram of the air intake circuit is given below –

Page 2 of 15
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
A HFM sensor is attached to the outlet of the air cleaner. The air to the
turbocharger passes through HFM. The HFM measures the air mass going
to the engine. The quantity of the air going is used to compute the
fuelling. The HFM also measures the air temperature
After the HFM and before turbocharger there is a service indicator. In

case of mechanical one, red band appears in choked condition.
The variable geometry turbocharger controls the boost. A boost

pressure sensor fitted on the outlet of the intercooler measures the
boost. The boost signal is given to the engine ECU. Based on the load,
engine speed, temperature, the ECU controls the boost by manipulating
the variable geometry TC. The compressed air is cooled by the charge
intercooler, which is mounted on the engine. The cooled air enters the
inlet manifolds.
Trouble Shooting –

Noisy engine & black 1. Faulty injectors. 9 Replace injectors
smoke.
2. Loose main 9 Tighten the main
bearings bearings.
3. Broken parts 9 Inspect and replace the


Page 3 of 15
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
broken parts.
4. EGR valve stuck 9 Check the EGR valve &

open replace if required
mechanically
Engine does not give 1. Air intake 9 Replace air cleaner
full power. restricted. element if required.
2. Clogged fuel 9 Replace filter.

filter.
injectors.

pressure line hose or clip if required.
after
turbocharger(
Turbo to
intercooler,
intercooler &
intercooler to
intake manifold)
5. Fuel return pipe 9 Locate the kink/block in

to tank blocked. return pipe and rectify.
6. Valve leak 9 Check the compression,

relap if required.
TEL dealer.
8. Gas leaks 9 Replace gaskets.
between exhaust
manifold &
cylinder head.
9. Restricted 9 Replace Turbocharger

exhaust system.
9 Tighten the TC mounting

Page 4 of 15
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
10. Exhaust gas bolts. Replace gasket if
leak between required.
turbo & manifold.
11. Gas leak 9 Correct the leak

between EGR
pipe joints
9 Change the gasket or the
12. EGR pipe leak. hose.
9 Replace the pipe.

13. Fuels supply 9 Remove the restriction.
line kink creating
restriction.
9 Check compression.
14. Compression
leak.
9 Replace piston rings.
15. Jammed piston
rings
9 Check the VFD as
16. Viscous fan outlined in cooling.
continuously Replace if required.
engaged.
9 Check the vacuum leak
17. Vaccum leak and rectify. Please note
to the VGT that the VGT operation is
actuator causing sensitive to vacuum leak
the delayed VGT
operation
Refer the diagnostic manual
Check CR system
smoke ( White/ gasket defective. head gasket.
Grey) 2. Worn out or 9 Lap the valve seats or
damaged valve regrind.
seats.

Page 5 of 15
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
3. Leaking injector 9 Tighten the injector
holder holder.
Black smoke. 1. Defective 9 Check injectors.

injectors

Turbocharger to
intercooler, intercooler
& intercooler to inlet
manifold.
3. EGR valve stuck 9 Check the EGR valve
open
4. Worn out rings,
liners & valves. 9 Overhaul engine.
5. Improper vacuum
connection for 9 Check & correct
EGR valve
Engine does not give 1. Air intake 9 Replace element
full power. restricted.
system after hose or clip if required.
turbocharger
3. Air leak in pipe – 9 Replace the hose or
manifold to FIP tighten
TEL dealer.
5. Vacuum leak 9 Change the pipe, check
from boost that the clip at the VGT
pressure end is present
controller to
boost pressure
actuator.
6. Leak in EGR pipe 9 Tighten the joint or

( will be replace the gasket
accompanied by
whistling)

Page 6 of 15
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
7. HFM sensor 9 The torque limitation

coated with oil due to smoke will
become active. Replace
the HFM and check.
Black smoke. 6. EGR valve stuck 9 Check & change.
Turbocharger & inlet
manifold
Remove restriction or
replace parts.
Whining noise 1. Indication of air 9 Tighten the clamps at
clearly audible after leak esp. in the intercooler inlet and
2000 RPM between: outlet.
Turbocharger to 9 Tighten the clamps at
inlet manifold. the Turbocharger inlet &
outlet.
9 Check the hoses for leak
2. leak in EGR pipe 9 Check & replace the pipe

to and from intercooler.
3. TC to exhaust 9 Check for the EGR pipe
pipe –stud fallen tightness.
off. 9 Replace the stud ( if the
vehicle is run for long
then check the VGT-
mechanism can be
damaged due to
fluctuations)
Care of the System –
The air cleaner element should be replaced every 40,000 km or If

service indicator red band is visible.
Do not clean the element and soak with engine oil- under any
circumstance.
Under extremely dusty conditions replace earlier than above.


Page 7 of 15
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
It should be noted that if the engine is run with clogged air cleaner,
then it will lead to seepage of oil from turbocharger into the air intake
system.
Ensure that the recommended engine oil only is used and the specified
drain intervals are maintained.
Check the oil separator system, in particular for any leak in vacuum
leak. As any vacuum leak will lead to a high-pressure build up and then
it will go through the intake system and give a signal of high blow by or
be confused with compressor oil leak.
Do not attempt to disturb length of the vacuum controlled actuator

rod.
In Car Repairs –
Air cleaner element Replacement
Turbocharger removal & Refitment
Replacing the filter element –

Page 8 of 15
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
1. Open the clean Hose clip & separate the hose.
2. Open the Air Cleaner Top Cover Bolts.
3. Remove the Air Filter Element along with grates & clean the bottom
bowl.
4. Separate the Top as well as bottom Grates & replace the Air Filter
Element; assemble the grates & put the assembly back in place.
Position the new element properly, taking care of lug projections.
5. Assemble the top cover & tighten the top cover bolts in diagonally
opposite order.
Assemble the Clean Hose on the Air Cleaner Outlet-Air Mass Sensor
Neck & tighten the Hose Clip.
The cleaning of the element is not recommended under any

circumstances.
Do not wring the foam.
Do not use if foam is cut, torn or foam layers are separated.

Page 9 of 15
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Turbocharger removal & Refitment –
Remove the air intake hose to turbocharger & the outlet hose from
turbo charger to Intercooler.
Caution - Please cover the opening to the turbocharger with cover to
avoid accidentally dropping any foreign object.

Page 10 of 15
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Remove the exhaust pipe from

the turbocharger.
Note - It is recommended to
apply rust cleaning spray (WD
40) in the nuts before
attempting to remove
otherwise, the stud will come
off.
Remove the oil feed pipe and the

oil return pipe to turbo.
Loosen & remove the turbo

charger support bracket.
Remove the turbocharger

mounting fasteners from exhaust
manifold.
Working Principle, Inspection & Fitment procedures of the

Turbocharger –
The Turbocharger is basically an axial inflow air compressor, which is

driven by an exhaust gas driven turbine.
The exhausts gases coming out of exhaust manifold impinge on the

turbine blade give the drive to turbine shaft. At the other end of the

Page 11 of 15
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
turbine shaft the compressor is assembled. The whole assembly is
supported on a floating bush. The bush gets an oil supply directly from
the engine and has oil film between the shaft and bearing as well as
the bush and the central housing.
The exhaust gases from the Turbine impinge on the turbine blade &
rotate the shaft. The compressor blades at the other end suck the air
from the air filter. After compression the temperature of the
compressed air increases thus reducing the air density. Hence if the air
is cooled and then the air density increases thus helping in getting
more power as well as improve emissions. The compressed air is sent to
the intercooler, which is mounted on the top of the engine. Hence the
incoming ram air through the scoop on the bonnet also cools the
compressed air and gives it to the intake manifold.
The turbocharger is matched to give an optimum boost for the desired

engine speed band. A vacuum controller controls the boost. Also the
boost pressure sensor mounted on the Intercooler Outlet pipe monitors
the boost.
As the name indicates the Variable Geometry Turbocharger provides

variable boost according to the needs.
This is achieved by changing the fins position using the vacuum

controller. The ECU constantly monitors the signals from the boost
pressure sensor & signals from the other sensors & accordingly controls
the vacuum going to the modulator which inturn controls the vacuum
controller.

Page 12 of 15
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
The above two pictures shows the fins fully closed & fully open. When
the fins are fully closed the boost is the highest & when they are fully
open the boost is at minimum.
Inspection
9 Inspect the suction side (i.e. up to the air cleaner) for oil traces.
In a close crank case ventilation system it is normal to have oil in
this area. These oil particles are carried from blow bye of the
engine, which gets condensed from gas to oil. Look for any undue
gumming of oil, hard carbon particles in this area. If such an
observation is present then all the causes for excess blow symptoms
have to be checked and eliminated.
9 Inspect the compressor and turbine blades for any damage caused by
foreign object. The inspection can be done through the compressor
housing inlet and turbine housings outlet.
9 Inspect the blades outer edge and observe if any rubbing marks are
noticed on the housing.
9 Rotate the shaft wheel assembly by hand and check for freeness,
and any binding.
9 Push the shaft to side and rotate to check for wheel rub. It should
turn smoothly.
9 Lift both end of shaft up and down at the same time and feel for
excessive journal bearing clearance. If clearance is normal then very
little shaft movement will be detected.
If all the above checks are satisfactory then the turbocharger can
be reused.
♦ If the turbocharger parts are damaged, wheel rubbing marks

present, shaft not rotating freely or binding or excessive journal
clearance then the Turbocharger should be serviced.
9 Do not attempt to service or overhaul the Turbocharger. It should be

done only at the authorized Turbo Energy Ltd service center. Any

Page 13 of 15
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
attempts to attend without the use of special tools or procedure can
damage to turbocharger or personnel!
Turbocharger Installation –
Do not mishandle, tumbled, dropped or keep any

ports open.
!
Check
The inlet connection & outlet exhaust connection to turbocharger for
foreign material, cracks, blockages, sand particles, loose nuts etc. This
check should be done more thoroughly if any damage has been noticed
in compressor or turbine blades as under normal operating conditions
the blades can damaged only if a foreign object hits them.
Check all the hoses and pipes from turbocharger outlet to intercooler
and intercooler to inlet manifold for crack, aging, leaks. Check the
hose clips for proper functioning. If in doubt – replace.
The oil supply pipe should be checked carbon deposits, crack,

distortions etc. Clean the supply pipe before fitting.
Do not attempt to change the orientation of turbocharger and ensure

the correct gaskets are used.
Do not reuse any of metallic gaskets even if they appear to be good. It

will lead to leakage & drop in the performance of the engine.
Installation –
Once a new turbocharger is being installed.
i. Fill fresh clean oil from the oil supplies port and after that give the
shaft few rotations.
ii. Fit the supply pipe.


Page 14 of 15
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
iii. Crank the engine till a steady stream of oil comes out through the
drainpipe. (CAUTION: Do not crank the engine for too long.
Excessive cranking will result in emptying of the pump cavity
causing the plunger to run dry.)
This will ensure that the oil supply line to Turbocharger is purged of
any air pocket.
After this fit the return line from turbocharger to sump, taking care to
avoid any kinks.
With engine running condition, check the air, exhaust and oil
connections for leaks.
Specifications –
Description Value
Turbocharger Model
Turbocharger specifications
Turbocharger supplier
Air velocity between the Air filter
compressor inlet
Air velocity between the compressor
outlet and the inlet manifold
Maximum static back pressure at
downstream of turbine
Oil pressure at upstream of
turbocharger
Tightening Torque’s –
Bolt location Torque in Nm ( Lbft)

Turbocharger Mounting stud/ nut
Inlet manifold
Air cleaner top cover bolts

Page 15 of 15
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Cooling System
Contents
Description
Trouble Shooting
Care of the system & Inspection
In Car repairs
Dismantling & Assembly of the Cooling System
Fan Belt-Routing & Analysis
Replacement intervals
Specifications & Coolant
Tightening Torques
Mahindra & Mahindra Ltd Scorpio VLX Cooling

Page 1 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Description
The cooling system is designed to cater to the following functions:
• Remove & dissipate excess heat from the combustion process.

• To maintain the optimum temperature for complete and uniform
combustion.
• To provide heating for the heater system.( In the models where the
Heater is provided)
The cooling system includes the following components/ sub system:
9 Radiator
9 Radiator Pressure cap
9 Coolant
9 Cooling fan ( Mechanical or Electrical)
9 Fan drive
9 Fan shroud, Thermostat
9 Water pump
9 Thermostat housing, cover thermostat, Recovery tank
9 Hoses & their clamps.
The layout of the cooling system is shown in the sketch, above.


Page 2 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
The schematic of the cooling circuit is given below –
Broadly speaking the water flows from the water pump to the cylinder
block and from the block to the cylinder head and then to the bottom of
thermostat. In case the thermostat is closed, water goes through the
bypass to water pump. Once the thermostat opens the water goes to the
radiator and after getting cooled the water is again fed to the water
pump.
Water pump & cover –
The coolant from the outlet elbow of the cross flow type radiator enters
the inlet of the water pump. The centrifugal water pump delivers the
water to the cylinder block.

Page 3 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Cylinder block & cylinder head –
The cylinder block feature a short water jacket to ensure optimum
cooling as well as a “ V” shaped drilled water jacket for the cylinder
bridge cooling.
The water flow from the water pump enters the cylinder block ,
tangentially at the 1st cylinder. The water supply to the oil cooler is
from the centre of the block at the LHS. There is adequate coolant
supply at the 4th cylinder also.
Radiator & No loss tank –
The radiator cap controls the system pressure to 0.9 bar. Once the
pressure exceeds 0.9 bar the cap lifts off the seat and the coolant is
allowed to escape into a no loss tank.
As the engine cools down the system pressure falls and vacuum is
formed .The vacuum valve in the radiator cap opens and allows the
water from the no loss tank to go back into the radiator. Thus the
system does not have any coolant loss during normal operation.
Water for HVAC –

The hot water the water pump is diverted to the heater unit, which is
located in the passenger compartment for the HVAC function.
The return from the heater is connected to the water collector pipe. It
should be noted that a water valve near the heater/climate box controls

Page 4 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
the amount of the water, which enters the heater unit. The occupants
determine the amount of the opening of the water valve. It will be full
quantity when it is set is maximum heater mode and vary till the coldest
mode where it will become nil as the valve will be fully closed
Before going into the specifics of the cooling system it is worthwhile to
find out under which driving conditions the complaint is present.
Some of the causes are:
Prolonged /excess idling

Very high ambient temperature
Slow traffic
Traffic jams
High speed
Steep Gradients
To avoid overheating under such conditions it will be worthwhile to:

Idle with the AC off. In case the temperature indicator needle is close to
the red band.
Increase the engine idling speed.

Noise Fan shroud
1. Fan contacting 9 Reposition the shroud
the shroud and inspect the engine
insulators.
Water pump
1. Loose water 9 Replace the water pump.
pump impeller.
2. Water pump 9 Replace water pump.
bearing worn/
failure.
3. Loose mounting 9 Tighten mounting bolt
of pump
Belts
1. Glazed/stretched 9 Replace serpentine belt
fan belt.

Page 5 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
2. Rough surface on 9 Replace pulley.
drive pulley.
3. Belt alignment 9 Check the belt alignment
& rectify.
Alternator/Water
pump
1. Alternator 9 Replace alternator

bearing failure bearing
Coolant loss- boil Coolant

over 1. Overfilled 9 Reduce the coolant
recovery tank. level.
2. Insufficient 9 Add the additive.
coolant additive
causing lower
boiling points.
3. Additive 9 Replace the coolant
deteriorated due
to aging/
contamination.
4. Low coolant 9 Add coolant
level.
Hot shut down
1. Quick shut downs 9 Allow the engine to run
after a long and at idle for some time
hot run. before stopping.
Leakages
1. Leaks due to 9 Find the area of leaks ,
loose hose replace hose or if
clamps. Loose necessary the clamp also
nuts, bolts drain 9 Pressure test the system
plugs, faulty hose to check for leaks and
or leaking then repair as necessary.
radiators.
Blockages
1. Casting flash in 9 The flash may be visible

Page 6 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
the block. by removing the cooling
2. Casting flash in system components or
the cylinder the core plugs. Repair or
head. replace.
3. Blocked radiator 9 Flush radiator.
causing under
filling of the
cooling system.
4. Air trapped in 9 Purge the system.
system.
5. Air in the system 9 Purge the system.
causing
occasional
burping.
6. Faulty expansion 9 Replace the cap/ pipe.
bottle cap or
pipe.
Coolant loss- boil Gas mixing
over 1. Cylinder head 9 Replace the cylinder
gasket failure. head gasket
Pressurization
1. Defective 9 Replace the cap.
radiator cap.
Belt
1. Slipping belts 9 Rectify
2. Belt failure 9 Replace belt
Water pump
1. Water pump shaft 9 Replace water pump
broken or
damaged
impeller.
Thermostat
1. Faulty 9 Replace Thermostat.
Thermostat.
Hoses.
1. Radiator hoses 9 Replace hoses.
collapsed

Page 7 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Fan
1. Cooling fan not 9 Check the functioning of
engaging. the VFD replace if
required.
Air flow
1. Air flow reduced 9 Clean the radiator fins.
to choked fins
2. Airflow reduced 9 Remove the obstruction.
due to
obstruction.
Vehicle
Brakes dragging. 9 Check the brake system.
High Temperature Improper indication

Indication 1. Faulty sensor 9 Replace the sensor.
2. Faulty gauge 9 Replace the gauge
Coolant entry into 1. Low cylinder 9 Replace the cylinder

Crankcase or head torque. head gasket, torque as
cylinder per procedure.
2. Faulty head 9 Replace the cylinder

gasket. head gasket
3. Blow hole in 9 Replace the affected

crankcase, head , part.
liner
Low Temperature 1. Thermostat stuck 9 Replace thermostat.
Gauge Indication- open
Under cooling 2. Faulty sensor. 9 Replace sensor.
3. Faulty gauge. 9 Replace gauge.
Coolant reserve 1. Coolant level low 9 Replenish coolant to
system inoperative FULL level.
2. Leak in system 9 Pressure test to isolate &
repair.
3. Overflow tube 9 Remove clogging
clogged or

Page 8 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
leaking.
4. Recovery bottle 9 Clean vent.
vent blocked.
5. Radiator cap 9 Change the cap.
defective.
No coolant flow 1. Restricted return 9 Remove restriction.
trough Heater inlet in water
Core pump.
2. Heater hoses 9 Remove restriction or
collapsed or replace hose.
restricted.
3. Restricted heater 9 Remove flash or
core. restriction.
4. Restricted outlet 9 Remove restriction.
in the thermostat
housing.
5. Heater valve 9 Repair controls.
controls not
functioning.
6. Heater valve 9 Repair or replace
stuck.
Unless there is loss of coolant the coolant additive added is adequate for
80,000 of the vehicle.
The recommended coolant additive is given in the Recommended

Coolant section.
Note: While replacing the coolant or if the coolant level has come down
due to any hose or water pump or radiator replacement/ leak.
The replacement schedule is given in replacement schedule.
Retensioning of the belt : First at 5000 Kms then every 10,000 Kms
intervals the belt tension to be checked.

Page 9 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Please refer the photograph below to identify if the automatic belt
tensioner is OK or needs to be replaced.

Page 10 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector

Page 11 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
In Car repairs –
Water Pump Belt Replacement
Fan Blade & the viscous fan drive removal & fitment
Water pump removal
Radiator removal
Water Pump belt Remove & Refit –

Page 12 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Remove the belt.
Loosen the lock nut of the AC belt tension setting bolt. Loosen & remove
the AC belt tension setting bolt.

Page 13 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Remove the AC & Water pump belt.
Replace the belt with a new one.
After Fitting the new belt ; check the belt tension with the Belt Tension
Gauge at the position shown in figure.
Belt Tension Value -- ---- Hz.
Fan Blade & viscous fan drive assembly removal –

Page 14 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Loosen the fan nut.

loosen ; the direction of rotation
has to be clockwise when viewed
from front.


remove the fan.
The fan blade assembly and the VFD

assembly can be removed together.
Water Pump removal –

Page 15 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Loosen the fan nut.

from front.


Page 16 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector

remove the fan.
Disconnect the coolant hose connected from radiator to water pump

inlet.

Page 17 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Remove the belt.
Loosen the lock nut of the AC belt tension setting bolt. Loosen & remove
the AC belt tension setting bolt.
Remove the AC belt.


Page 18 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Loosen & remove the water pump

mounting bolts & remove the water
pump.
Radiator Removal & Re-fitment –
Loosen the fan nut.

from front.


Page 19 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector

remove the fan.
Drain the coolant from the radiator.

Disconnect the coolant hoses connected to the radiator.
Loosen & remove the radiator top cover.
Loosen & remove the Radiator Mounting bolts & remove the radiator.
Note – Care must be taken while removing the condenser fastening bolts
to the radiator as the AC gas pipes are routed through the same area.

Page 20 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Dismantling & Assembly of the Cooling System
Water Pump
Viscous Fan Drive
CAUTION
Do not remove the radiator drain cock or the Engine coolant plate
drain with the engine in hot condition.
Always remove the pressure on the system by removing the radiator

cap before undertaking any work on the cooling system.
If the coolant is not contaminated then collect the coolant in a clean

container so that it can be reused. Replace coolant as per
recommendation
Water pump –
A centrifugal water pump is used to circulate the coolant through the

water jackets, cylinder head, hoses and radiator. The water pump is
belt driven by the engine main drive pulley. It ratio of pulley diameter
ensures that the water pump rotates 1.30 times the engine speed.
The water pump impeller is pressed onto the shaft. The shaft is
supported on two bearings that are integral to the shaft.
The water pump seal is located between the impeller and the housing.
The housing has a small hole to allow the seepage to escape. That also
acts as an indication point if the water pump seal fails.
Water pump removal & Refitment.

The water pump is not serviceable and has to be changed as an
assembly.

Page 21 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Viscous Fan Drive Operation –
The viscous drive unit for the engine-cooling fan provides a means for
controlling the speed of the fan relative to the temperature of the
engine. The viscous fan unit is a type of fluid coupling, which drives the
fan blade by means of silicone fluid
There are two main components of the viscous fan drive: input (drive
member), which consist of a threaded shaft passing through a bearing
into the clutch plate and secured to the water pump. The output
(driven) member comprises of the main body to which the fan is
attached, with the temperature sensing mechanism (bimetal coil) and
pump plates.

Page 22 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
The fan drive has to be engaged only periodically, between 5 to 10% of

the normal operating conditions because the rest of the time the vehicle
cools itself by ram air-cooling.
To engage and disengage the fan drive the bi metal coil senses the air
temperature behind the radiator. When a pre determined temperature
is reached, the coil opens a valve, which allows the fluid to enter the
drive area and due to centrifugal forces circulate to the annular drive
area

Page 23 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
There are two sets of annular grooves. , One in the drive clutch and the
other in the drive body, a specific clearance being provided between
two sets of grooves. When this clearance is filled with viscous fluid a
shearing action caused by the speed differential between the two drive
components, transmit the torque to the fan. The fluid is thrown to the
outside of the unit by the centrifugal force from where it is recirculated
to the reservoir via the pump plate adjacent to the drive member.
If the engine sped is increased the amount of slip will also increase to
limit the maximum fan speed.
When the air temperature from the radiator drops sufficiently, the bi
metal coil closes the valve and prevents fluid entering the drive area.
The fluid that is in the drive area will gradually pump out into the
reservoir and the fan will return to an idle condition
Checking the VFD –
This procedure will only give an indication that the fan is cutting in and
out, but will not be able to check the accuracy of the cut in
temperature.
Depending on the level of the test equipment there are several ways to
check the if the fan is working correctly.
Using a non-contact tachometer –
1. Run the engine at idle without any load for approximately 3 minutes,
for example at 2000 rpm, observer the fan drive speed. In the
disengaged mode the fan speed will be approximately 800 rpm. By
running for 3 minutes it will ensure that the fan drive has pumped out
the silicone fluid into the reservoir and that the fan drive will be in
the cut out ( idle)
2. Either
(a) Blank the radiator by using a sheet of cardboard, which has a 15-
cm hole, cut out of in line with the center of the fan drive. This
will allow a flow of air on the bimetal coil and the cardboard will
allow the radiator to heat up quickly.

Page 24 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Keep a check on the vehicle temperature gauge and let the water
temperature rise to about 105°C. this will ensure that the fan drive
will engage
(b) Using a commercial hot air blower, which will provide a hot air
flow of at least 75°C, direct the air on to the centers of the fan drive
through the radiator. Keep the hot air on for several minutes. This
will cut the fan drive in, and the fan speed will increase. It is
important that only a powerful blower is used so that the hot air
should reach the fan drive after going the radiator at the correct
temperature.
3. Once the fan drive has become engaged by either method (a) or (b).
Check the fan speed with the non-contact tachometer. At 2000 rpm
input speed the fan speed should be 1800 rpm.
Testing without a non-contact tachometer –
4. Use the same method explained in step 2, but this time listen to the
noise level generated by the fan. With the fan in the idle condition
the noise level should be very low, however when the fan speed
increases in the engaged mode there will be a significant roar from
the fan. This will clearly indicate if the fan drive is working.
If the fan drive fails to engage during these tests, there is something
wrong with the VFD (Viscous Fan Drive). The unit should be replaced.
While returning the failed unit (to Plant for vehicles under warranty)
take care to see that the unit is packed with the sensing coil facing
down and sent in the same way. If this is not observed then the silicone
fluid will flow down to bearing, damaging the bearing and also making it
impossible to do any investigation.
Belt Diagnosis –
When diagnosing serpentine accessory drive belt,

Small crack that run across the ribbed surface of the belt from rib
to rib are considered normal.
Cracks running along a rib are not normal

Page 25 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
The correct belt tension is required to ensure optimum performance of
the belt.
Do not apply any external means to reduce noise. Application of oil will
reduce the belt life.
A detailed drive belt analysis is given below –
Symptom Possible reasons Correction

Rib chunking (One 1. Foreign objects 9 Remove foreign objects
or more ribs has embedded in from pulley grooves.
separated from belt pulley groove Replace belt
body)- Chunking 2. Installation 9 Replace belt.
happens when damage.
several cracks in 3. Poor surface of 9 Clean pulley, replace if
one area of rib move grooves in pulley. required.
parallel to the cord
line.
Piling- happens 1. Lack of tension 9 Rectify
when the material is 2. Worn out pulleys
sheared off the 3. Excessive tension.
undercord and
builds up in the
groove.
Rib or belt wear. 1. Pulley or pulleys 9 Correct the alignment.

misaligned.
2. Abrasive 9 Clean pulleys- replace
environment if required.
3. Rusted pulleys 9 Change pulley.
4. Sharp or jagged
pulley groove tips. 9 Replace belt.
5. Poor surface finish.
Tooth shear 1. Seizure of driven 9 Replace belt.

part.
2. Misalignment. 9 Align pulleys
Tooth Wear 1. Worn out pulleys 9 Change pulleys

Page 26 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Longitudinal Belt 1. Belt has mis- 9 Replace belt.
cracking (Cracks tracked from
between two ribs.) pulley groove.
2. Pulley groove tip 9 Change pulley.
has worn out the
rubber to tensile
member.
Belt slips 1. Belt or pulley 9 Clean pulleys.
subjected to
substances that
reduce the belt
life ( oil, grease,
ethylene alcohol)
2. Driven components 9 Replace the failed
bearing failure. components.
3. Belt hardened and 9 Replace belt
glazed from heat
and excessive
slippage.
Groove jumping ( 1. Pulleys not within 9 Replace pulleys.
belt does not design tolerances.
maintain correct 2. Foreign objects in 9 Clean pulleys.
position on pulley) groove.
3. Pulley 9 Correct the alignment
misalignment,
4. Belt cord line is 9 Replace belt.
broken.
Belt broken 1. Tensile members 9 Correct the alignment

damaged during
installation.
2. Severe
misalignment.
3. Bracket pulley or 9 Replace the failed
bearing failure. component.
Noise 1. Belt slippage
Objectionable 2. Bearing noise 9 Replace the defective
squeak, squeal 3. Belt mis alignment bearing.
rumble heard or felt 4. Belt to pulley 9 Adjust alignment.
while drive belt is in mismatch. 9 Use the correct belt.

Page 27 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
operation 5. Driven component 9 Vary belt tension within
induced vibration specifications.
6. System resonant 9 Replace belt.
frequency induced
vibration.
Tensile failure 1. Tension sheeting 9 Correct rubbing
contacting condition.
stationary object.
2. Excessive heat 9 Replace belt.
causing woven
fabric to age.
3. Foreign body in 9 Replace pulley.
drive.
4. Belt crimped due
to improper
handling.
5. Tension sheathing
splice has
fractured.
Oil contamination 1. Oil leaks. 9 Correct the oil leak
condition.
Cord edge failure ( 2. Belt contacting 9 Remove the stationary

Tensile member stationary object. objects fouling.
exposed at edges of 3. Pulleys out of 9 Replace pulleys.
belt or separated tolerance.
from Belt body) 4. Insufficient
adhesion between 9 Replace pulley.
tensile member &
rubber matrix.

Page 28 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Rib chunking –
Piling –
Tooth Shear –

Page 29 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Tooth wear –
Tensile failure –
Oil contamination –
Cord Edge failure –

Page 30 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Replacement Interval
01. Accessory drive belt (Alternator and power steering) – Replace at

100,000 Kms.
02. Accessory drive belt and tensioner (A/C)– Replace at 100,000 Kms.
03. Replacement of auto tensioner. Replace at 100,000 Kms.
Specifications –
Description Value
Cooling system capacity –including 7.5 liters
recovery tank
Coolant GLYSANTIN G45-23
Ratio 30%
Coolant to be added after 2.79 liters
draining/flushing
Radiator pressure 0.9 bar
Viscous Fan Drive 75°C of air temperature at
- fan starts at ( For reference only) Sensor
Input speed – 3600 rpm
Viscous Fan Drive 35°C of air temperature at
- fan stops at ( For reference Only) Sensor
Input speed – 1300 rpm
Input speed of Fan pulley 1.30 x Engine speed.
No of fan blades 11
Fan blade size 400 mm
Fan Belt tension ( Gates) New installation –295 ± 5 Hz
Stabilized –295 Hz Min
Fan belt tension to be done if it falls 250 Hz± 5 Hz
below

Page 31 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Tightening Torques –
Location Torque in Nm
Viscous Fan clutch nut 45 ± 5 Nm (33 ± 4 lbf-ft)

Page 32 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Fuel System- VLX
Contents
Description
Trouble Shooting
Care of the System
In Car Repairs
Dismantling, Inspection & overhaul of the Fuel Injection Equipment
Specification
Tightening Torque’s
Mahindra & Mahindra Ltd Scorpio VLX Fuel system

Page 1 of 18
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Description
The fuel system can be divided into following subgroups.

Fuel filling.
Fuel supply from tank to High Pressure pump .
High Pressure Pump & injectors including the High pressure pipes.
Return line from High Pressure Pump to tank
The fuel is filled from the opening provided at rear left. The fuel cap is
ventilated and threaded type. The cap is locked in place when further
turning action result in clicking of the ratchet. the fuel tank lid is
electrically operated . The switch is fitted on the centre bezel .

Page 2 of 18
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
While filling the tank, the air entrapped inside is vented by the vent tube,
which is connected at the mouth of the inlet pipe. The venting is done from
the highest point in the fuel tank. The fuel tank has a capacity of 58 liters.
During operation the fuel pump due to the vacuum created by the internal
feed pump the fuel is sucked through the filter, to the high pressure pump.
The high pressure pump, pressurizes, & supplies the fuel to the common
rail . The fuel then comes to the injectors.
The fuel back leak from injectors and return from HPP comes through
return line.
The entire length of the fuel tank is protected at the bottom by a stone
guard.
For the detailed understanding of the Common rail system, please refer
the Common Rail System ( CR System) explained separately.

Engine will not 1. Clogged fuel filter/ 9 Change fuel filter
start & emit fuel lines 9 Check fuel supply line.
black smoke
2. Defective injectors 9 Refer diagnostic
manual
Noisy engine & 1. Injector coking. 9 Clean external coking
black smoke. 2. CR System 9 Refer the diagnostic
manual
Engine speed falls 1. Clogged fuel filter/ 9 Change fuel filter
off. fuel lines 9 Check fuel supply line.
2. 9 Refer diagnostic
manual.
Engine does not 1. Clogged fuel filter/ 9 Change fuel filter
give full power. fuel lines 9 Check fuel supply line.

Page 3 of 18
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
2. Defective 9 Replace filters.
injectors. 9 Locate the kink/block
3. in return pipe and
rectify.
9 Refer diagnostic
manual
Black smoke. 1. Defective injectors 9 Check injectors.

2. CR system 9 Refer diagnostic.
Engine will not 1. Weak battery 9 Check the battery

start 2. Corroded or loose specific gravity.
battery connection 9 Clean & tighten battery
3. Faulty starter. connections.
4. CR system 9 Repair starter.
9 Refer diagnostic
manual.
The fuel injection system depends on supply of clean diesel fuel for the
proper functioning of the fuel system.
To ensure that High Pressure Pump receives clean fuel all the times it is
advisable that the fuel filter is replaced at the specified intervals.
The fuel filter should be changed at every 20,000 Kms. If the operating
conditions are poor then reduce the change interval. The fuel filter is
equipped with water separator. If the water level indication comes on in
the instrument panel, then the water should be immediately drained.
The internal components of the High Pressure Pump depend on the

lubricating properties of diesel for lubricating them. Hence, if water is
present in the fuel then lubrication between the component break down
and there is seizure.

Page 4 of 18
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
In Car Repairs –
The In Car repairs which can be carried out are:
Removal & Replacement of the fuel filer
Draining the water from the fuel filters.
Removal & refitting injectors.
Removal & refitting the HPP
Removal of the fuel tank.
Removal & Replacement of the fuel filer —
1. Loosen the Fuel Filter Element.
2. Loosen ‘Water in Fuel Sensor’ at the bottom of the Fuel Filter element.

Page 5 of 18
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
3. Fit the ‘Water in Fuel Sensor’ taken out from old Fuel Filter Element on
the New Fuel Filter Element.
4. Fit the New Element fitted with sensor on the filter body, tighten
properly.
5. While changing the fuel filter, remove the fuel tank cap.
6. While bleeding loosen only the bleed screw. If the suction or oulet pipes
are opened then the copper washers need to be changed. If this
precaution is not taken then later the complaint or rail pressure
deviation ( P1193/P1192) can be reported.
Draining the water from the fuel filter –
1. Loosen Water in Fuel Sensor at the bottom of the Fuel Filter.


Page 6 of 18
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
2. Allow the Water accumulated in the filter to drain out.
3. Tighten the Water in Fuel Sensor properly.
Removal & refitting injector –
Loosen the high-pressure pipes from

both the common rail end &
injectors.
Avoid loosening only at one end as it
can cause strain in the pipes, while
removing the injectors
Remove the leak off pipe.
Remove the injector clamps.

Remove the injector.
While refitting, the injector use a

new washer between the injector &
cylinder head.(Thickness of washer
should be 3mm)
Avoid using two-injector washer.

Normally it tends to happen if the
older washer is not removed and has
got stuck to cylinder head.
It will change the injector tip height


Page 7 of 18
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
to change and affect combustion.
Removal & refitting the HPP –

To replace the high pressure pump; it is advisable to remove the engine out
from vehicle.
Remove the belt.

Page 8 of 18
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Remove High Pressure pipe from HPP
to common rail
Loosen the lock nut of the AC belt

tension setting bolt. Loosen &
remove the AC belt tension setting
bolt.
Remove the AC belt.

the damper pulley.

Page 9 of 18
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Loosen & remove the front
cover bolts. Remove the
front cover.
Caution – To remove the

front cover; 3 Nos. bolts
should be removed from
the front side of the oil
sump.
Loosen the cam sprocket

bolt.

Page 10 of 18
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
secondary (Upper)
tensioner.
• Remove the chain
guides by removing
the ‘e’clips.
Loosen & remove cam to

cam chain guide.
Remove the bolt & remove

the cam sprocket.
Remove the bolt & remove

the other cam sprocket.

Page 11 of 18
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Loosen the HPP sprocket
nut.

secondary (Upper)
tensioner.
• Remove the chain
guides by removing
the ‘e’clips.
• Press & lock the
primary (Lower)
tensioner. Loosen &
remove the mounting
bolts & the tensioner.

Page 12 of 18
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Timing Procedure
1. Rotate the engine in such a way that the crank shaft key comes at
12’o clock position (Facing towards the camshafts) as shown in fig.

Page 13 of 18
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
2. n the sketch above.
3. Assemble the crankshaft sprocket, HPP sprocket & the primary chain.
Hand tighten the sprocket bolts.
4. Assemble the primary chain guide & Primary Chain Tensioner.
5. Assemble the floating chain guide.
6. Release the primary chain tensioner.
7. Tighten the bolt of HPP Sprocket to the specified torque.
8. Assemble the Inlet & Exhaust camshaft sprockets, Cam to Cam chain
guide & Secondary chain. Do not tighten the Camshaft sprocket bolts.

Page 14 of 18
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
9. Assemble the Secondary Chain Guide & Secondary Chain Tensioner.
Release the Primary Chain Tensioner by rotating the bolt.
10. Turn & hold the Exhaust Cam Camshaft Sprocket against the
tightening direction with the help of the tool as shown in figure above
& tighten the bolt of Exhaust Camshaft Sprocket to the specified
torque.
11. Tighten the bolt of Intake Camshaft Sprocket to the specified torque.
• Remove the tool for locking the Camshaft.

• Assemble the Front Cover & assemble the bolts. Tighten the
front cover bolts to the specified torque & following the
specified sequence.
• Assemble the flywheel. Torque tighten the Flywheel Bolts
following the specified sequence. Lock the flywheel using the
flywheel locking tool.
• Remove the Crankshaft Locking Pin from the Block.
• Fit the Damper Pulley & tighten the bolt to the specified
torque.
• Remove the Flywheel Locking Tool.

Page 15 of 18
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Removal of the fuel tank –
• Disconnect the fuel tank supply hose and the vent hose.
• Disconnect the fuel supply and return hoses
• Disconnect the fuel gauges, tank unit electrical connection.
• Remove the skid plate.
• Remove the mounting 5 no bolts.
• Lower the fuel tank on to the transmission jack
• The assembly procedure is the reverse of the disassembly.
Fuel Tank Strainer Cleaning –
Remove the Fuel Tank from the vehicle.
1. Take out the ‘Fuel Strainer with main line assembly’ by removing the
fastening bolts.
2. Blow the compressed air gradually with low pressure as per the
direction indicated by the arrow in the illustration above.
Clean the fuel tank. Complete the Fuel Tank Assembly & refit it on the
vehicle.

Page 16 of 18
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Fuel Tank Strainer Replacement –
• Remove the Fuel Tank from the vehicle.
1. Take out the ‘Fuel Strainer with main line assembly’ by removing the
fastening bolts. Replace the ‘Fuel Strainer with main line assembly’.
• Clean the fuel tank. Complete the Fuel Tank Assembly & refit it
on the vehicle.
Dismantling, Inspection & overhaul of the High Pressure Pump –
The HPP is non - serviceable.
Specifications –
Bosch CRS 2.2
HPP Type: CP1H


Page 17 of 18
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
ECU: EDC 16C
Location Torque in Nm (lbf-ft)

High pressure pipe pump to Rail 20 ± 2 Nm ( 15±1 lbf-ft)
High pressure pipe to Rail 35 Nm (26 lbf-ft)
High Pressure Pipe to injector 27±2 Nm (20± 1 lbf-ft)
Injector holder clamping 25±3 Nm (18 ± 2 lbf-ft)

Rail mounting on intake 22.5±2.5 Nm ( 16.5 ± 2 lbf-ft)
manifold

Page 18 of 18
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Emission Control system
Contents
Description
Trouble Shooting
Care of the System
Checking the System
Mahindra & Mahindra Ltd Scorpio VLX Emission control – mHAWK

Confidential- For Internal Circulation Only Nov 07
Page 1 of 7
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Description
The 2.2.L engine meets the BS III emission norms.
Overall, two systems are used.
Exhaust Gas re circulation

Closed crankcase ventilation
Working Principle of the Exhaust Gas Recirculation –
During acceleration and in higher loads the engine generates high

combustion temperatures. The high combustion temperatures increase the
NOx generation. The higher percentage of NOx generated in the combustion
chamber come out through the tail pipe in the atmosphere.
To reduce the amount of NOx coming through the tail pipe the EGR system
adds exhaust gases into the fresh air that is going into the combustion
chamber. Since the exhaust, gas is already burnt hence when mixed with
fresh air acts an inert gas. The role it does is that it reduces the amount of
oxygen available for combustion. The net effect is that it reduces the peak
combustion temperatures. This results in lower amount of NOx being
generated.

Page 2 of 7
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
To control the amount/percentage of exhaust gases to be circulated back

to the combustion chamber the ECU, which is already controlling the
common rail functions, is used.
The ECU monitors the air flow, coolant temperature, attitude, engine
speed, and accelerator pedal position. Based on the above parameters the
ECU operates a switch that in turn controls the amount of vacuum going to
the EGR valve. The amount of vacuum applied controls the lift of the EGR
valve. The lift of the EGR valve is sensed.
Working principle of Crankcase Ventilation System –
Functional blcok diagram of the Crankcase ventialtion is given below –
The ventilation system is closed ventilation type.

The oil vapours from the rocker cover go to the labyrinth type oil separator,
which is mounted directly on top of the cam cover. The outlet from the
labyrinth is connected in series to a centrifugal type oil separator.
The collected oil is drained back to the sump. The gases enter the intake
system in between the air cleaner and the turbocharger.

Page 3 of 7
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Certain amount of oil will be carried from the oil separator to the Air inlet
hose, which is normal. However if it is excessive please look for all the
causes mentioned in the high blow bye.

Engine does not give 1. Gas leak between 9 Change the gasket or
full power. EGR pipe joints. the hose.
2. EGR pipe leak. 9 Change the pipe.
3. EGR valve 9 Check the EGR using
improper the blink codes.
functioning. Proceed appropriately.
9 Ensure vacuum
4. Vacuum hose connections at vacuum
crack, loose, fallen modulator, reservoir,
off and alternator.

smoke gasket defective. head gasket.
9 Lap the valve seats or
2. Worn out or regrind.
damaged valve
seats. 9 Tighten the injector
3. Leaking injector holder.
holder.
9 Confirm & check
4. Leakage at EGR -Gasket condition
Valve flange face, - Bolt torque.
exhaust manifold
and EGR pipe end.
Black smoke. 1. EGR valve stuck Check the EGR valve.
open
Excessive oil 1. Cracked vacuum 9 Check the vacuum line
consumption line hoses from the alternator to
the EGR valve (for
BSII)- check for leaks,
crack. Replace cracked

Page 4 of 7
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
2. Restriction in hoses.
crankcase 9 Locate & remove
breather. restriction.
3. Damaged oil 9 Check the crankcase
separator ventilation & rectify.
9 Replace the oil
4. Bend/kink in any separator
of the oil return 9 Change the vacuum
pipe’s/vacuum hoses.
hoses. 9 Remove the bend or
kinks.
Care of the System
To meet the emission norms it is essential that the Fuel system, Air intake
system & cooling system be maintained as per the schedule .For details
refer to the particular section
Generally it is not appreciated that if the engine is running below the

optimum temperature (happens when thermostat is removed then tailpipe
emissions in particular the particulate increases (up to 30%). Similarly a
wrong grade or poor quality of fuel increases the emissions. A blocked air
cleaner or restriction in intake system increases the emissions
Oil separator system –
Check the hose connection at every 10,000 Kms for cracks, aging and leaks.
EGR –
On vehicles fitted with EGR system the following additional points check
have to done during scheduled maintenance.
• Check for any exhaust gas leakage through sealing faces, EGR pipe.
Formation of any black soot indicates leakage.
• Check the vacuum hoses for any leaks, cracks.


Page 5 of 7
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
• Retighten all nuts and bolts as per the recommend torque.
♦ If the pipes are removed then it is essential that while fitting back new
gaskets is used.
EGR Valve –
Remove the EGR valve and check it valve-sticking, deposition of carbon etc.
If excess carbon deposits and sticky valve noticed then it should be cleaned
with a suitable solvent, so that the correct valve seat is ensured.
After cleaning the valve blow air from the bottom side of the valve and
check for any leakages.
To check for the functioning of the EGR valve apply vacuum on the vacuum
connection of the EGR valve.
EGR Pipe –
Remove the EGR pipe and check for gas leakage, damages etc. Clean the
gasket seating area from any carbon deposits, burrs etc. Spray WD 40 rust
cleaning spray on the nut.
To check the pipe for any leakages, close one end of flange and from other
end blow air at two bars. Dip the pipe in water and observe if any leakage
is observed. If any leaks are observed then the pipe has to be replaced. Do
not attempt to weld/ seal the leakage joint
EGR Actuator Controller ( modulator)–
The solenoid switch does not require any maintenance. For any damage
replace the component.
EGR ECU –
The EGR is controlled by the ECU controlling the Common rail.

Page 6 of 7
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
However, like any ECU care has to be taken that if any welding work is
being carried out on the vehicle then the battery terminals are removed.
Similarly, the practices of shorting the battery to check the battery have to
be avoided. (It can cause a spike.). The practice of changing battery with a
running engine is also not acceptable. Again, the resultant spike can
damage the controller beyond repairs
Checking the System

EGR System –
Any errors in the EGR system be registered as a DTC code.

“Smart Tester”
The DTC codes can be viewed by using the .

Page 7 of 7
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Clutch
Contents
Description
Trouble Shooting
In Car Repairs
Clutch Actuation Mechanism
Clutch overhaul
Inspection
Specification & Wear Limit
Tightening Torques
Lubricant
List of the MSTs
Mahindra & Mahindra Ltd Scorpio VLX Clutch

Confidential- For Internal Circulation Only Nov.07
Page 1 of 35
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Description
The clutch disc is a single, dry type with cushion springs in the hub.
The clutch disc’s friction material is riveted to the hub.
The clutch cover is a diaphragm type with one-piece construction. A

240-mm clutch disc is used.
In the engaged position (when the clutch pedal is not pressed), the
diaphragm spring of the clutch cover assembly holds the clutch
pressure plate against the clutch disc. This enables the engine torque
to be transmitted to the input shaft of the gearbox, without any slip /
loss.
The clutch is hydraulically actuated with self-adjusting features. The

complete actuation system comprises of a clutch master cylinder with
integral reservoir. The master cylinder is connected to the clutch
actuation or the slave cylinder by hydraulic pipe. The travel of the
push rod results in linear movement of the release bearing through a
release fork pivoted on a ball in the clutch housing.
The clutch release bearing pushes the diaphragm spring center

towards the flywheel. The diaphragm spring pivots at the fulcrum,
relieving the load on the clutch plate. Steel spring straps riveted to
the pressure plate cover pulls the pressure plate away from the clutch
disc. When the clamping load on the clutch plate is relieved it slides
on the splines of the input shaft away from the flywheel thus
disengaging the engine torque from the input shaft & enabling the
gears to be changed.
While topping up use the recommended fluid conforming to DOT 3

specifications only. Avoid mixing different brands.
The clutch fluid is hygroscopic fluids hence tend to collect humidity.

The humidity along with the brake fluid can cause acidic reaction &
seizure of the master & slave cylinders. The clutch fluid should be

Page 2 of 35
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
replaced every 40,000 km or one in a year, whichever is earlier. The
master & clutch cylinder seals to be replace every 50,000 Kms
Unless the cause of a clutch problem is extremely obvious, accurate

problem diagnosis will require a road test to confirm that the problem
exists. To find out the actual root cause of the problem the clutch will
have to be dismantled and the failed parts examined to determine the
cause.
During road test, drive the vehicle in normal operating speeds. Shift
the gears and observe the clutch action. If chatter, grab, slip or
improper release is experienced, remove & inspect the parts.
However if problem is noise or hard shift then the problem may not be
in clutch only but also the transmission or the driveline.
If the clutch slip is suspected then drive the vehicle in 1st or 2nd gear
at the top speed (corresponding to the gear). Keeping the accelerator
fully pressed, slowly apply the brake- with your left feet. If the
engine stalls then the clutch is not slipping.
Clutch Problem Causes –
Fluid contamination is the most frequent cause of clutch malfunction.

Oil, water on the clutch contact surface will cause faulty operation
viz. Slip, grab, and judder.
During inspection check if any parts in the clutch are coated with oil
or water splash from road.
Oil contamination indicates a leak at either rear main seal or

transmission-input shaft. The oil leaks from either of these areas will
normally coat the housing interior or clutch cover or flywheel. Heat
build up due to slippage between the clutch plate and the flywheel or
the pressure plate can result into the leaked oil literally getting
baked. Visually this will result in a glazed residue varying from amber
to black.

Page 3 of 35
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Roads splash contamination will mean that the dirt water is entering
the clutch housing either due to loose bolt or torn rubber boot.
Clutch misalignment –
The clutch component i.e. the clutch plate, flywheel and the pressure
plate have to be aligned with the crankshaft and the transmission
input shaft. Misalignment caused by runouts/ warpage will cause
clutch to grab judder as well as improper release (also manifesting as
hard gearshift).
Flywheel runout –
The flywheel runout needs to be checked whenever misalignment is

suspected. Flywheel runout should not exceed 0.10 mm.

Page 4 of 35
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
To measure the runout mount the base of the magnetic dial gauge on
the block. Locate the dial gauge’s needle on the outer surface of the
flywheel.
Some of the common reasons for excessive runout are –
9 Heat warpage.
9 Improper machining.
9 Incorrect bolt tightening
9 Foreign material on crankshaft flange or flywheel.
9 Improper seating on crankshaft.
Clutch cover & Disc runout –
A warped cover or diaphragm spring will result in clutch grab and / or

incomplete release of clutch plate.
If the clutch alignment tool is not used then the misalignment of the
clutch plate can cause distortion of the cover and also disc damage.
The cover can also get misaligned due to improper tightening of the
cover onto the flywheel. The only way to avoid is that the bolts must
be tightened alternatively (diagonal pattern) and evenly i.e. 2 to 3
thread a time only.
A noisy gearshift operation especially the 1st and 2nd gear can be due
to clutch not getting disengaged completely. To check it, jack up the
rear axle. Lift the axle till both the wheels are rotating freely.
Press the clutch pedal completely and start the engine, the wheels
should not be spinning. Now slowly release the pedal till it has moved
about 10 mm, the wheel should still not be spinning. If some spinning
is noticed then it indicates improper lift of the pressure plate. First
check the bleeding and the pedal travel then check for the pressure
plate lift.

Page 5 of 35
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Clutch Housing Misalignment –
The clutch housing has to be aligned with the engine so that the input
shaft is aligned with the crankshaft. Absence of this alignment results
in clutch noise, incomplete release of the clutch plate. It can
normally be judged by uneven wear of the finger and pilot bearing. In
severe case it can also damage the spline of the input shaft and clutch
hub’s well as the clutch splines
¾ Normally the clutch housing misalignment is a result of:

¾ Incorrect seating on the engine/transmission.
¾ Missing alignment dowel holes.
¾ Loose or missing mounting bolt.
¾ Mounting surfaces that are damaged/ not parallel.
To check the clutch housing misalignment bell housing runout will also
need to be checked.
Clutch slippage
Observation Causes Remedial action

Disc facing worn 1. Normal wear. 9 Replace clutch disc
out. 2. Clutch riding. 9 Replace clutch plate
3. Insufficient 9 Replace clutch plate
diaphragm spring & cover assembly.
clamp load.
4. Faulty release 9 Replace , and bleed/

mechanism.
5. Vehicle being driven 9 Customer to be
despite slipping informed.
clutch.
6. Bad driving practice
of allowing the 9 Customer to be
clutch to slip far too informed.
long.
Clutch disc facing Leak at :

contaminated 1. Crankshaft rear end 9 Replace seal & disc.

Page 6 of 35
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
with oil, grease oil seal Clean cover
or clutch fluid. assembly.
2. Leak through the
input shaft
9 Replace seal & disc.
Clean cover
3. Excess amount of assembly.
grease applied to
the input shaft 9 Apply less grease.
splines Replace clutch disc.
Clean cover
assembly.
Clutch is running Release bearing carrier 9 Replace bearing /
partially sticky. carrier.
disengaged.
Flywheel height 1. Improperly

incorrect. machined flywheel.
9 Replace flywheel.
2. Excess machining
done.
Wrong disc or Use the correct parts 9 Replace the parts
pressure plate after comparison.
used.
Clutch disc/ 1. Improper tightening 9 Replace the parts and
cover or or loosening tighten as per
diaphragm spring procedure. sequence.
warped.
2. Rough handling of
clutch plate or cover
assembly 9 Replace the parts,
ensure that the rough
handling is avoided
Flywheel side Flywheel surface 9 Reduce the scoring

clutch facing ,scored and having light and nicks by sand
surface – torn/ notch paper. Reduce if
nicked/ worn scoring deeper.
Clutch disc facing 1. Frequent operation 9 Roughen the flywheel

burnt. Excessive under high loads or face with sandpaper.
glazing of the hard acceleration Replace clutch plate

Page 7 of 35
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
flywheel & conditions & cover assembly.
pressure plate.
2. Frequent clutch
riding by the driver. 9 The driver has to be
alerted to avoid
repeat failure.
Clutch facing Improper storage- 9 Replace.
broken clutch plate dropped
prior to fitting.
Fouling marks on Improper fitment- 9 Rectify
the torsion assembled the wrong
damper. way around
Clutch grab/chatter

Clutch disc facing Leak at :
contaminated 1. Crankshaft rear end 9 Replace seal & disc.
with oil, grease oil seal Clean cover
or clutch fluid. 2. Leak through the assembly.
input shaft 9 Replace seal & disc.
3. Excess amount of Clean cover
grease applied to assembly.
the input shaft 9 Apply less grease.
splines Replace clutch disc.
Clean cover
assembly.
Clutch disc / 1. Incorrect or 9 Replace disc and

pressure plate substandard parts. cover with the
warped. 2. Improper tightening correct parts.
or loosening
Disc facing show procedure. 9 Replace the parts and
unusual wear tighten as per
3. Rough handling of sequence.
clutch plate or cover
assembly
9 Replace the parts,

ensure that the rough

Page 8 of 35
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
handling is avoided.
Partial 1. Clutch pressure 9 Replace clutch cover

engagements of plate position & clutch plate.
clutch disc (One setting incorrect or
side worn – modified
opposite side 2. Clutch cover, spring 9 Replace clutch cover
glazed and lightly or release fingers & clutch plate.
worn.) bent or distorted
due to rough
handling or improper
assembly.
3. Clutch disc damaged
or distorted. 9 Replace clutch plate.
4. Clutch
misalignment.
9 Check alignment and
runout of flywheel
disc or cover.
9 Replace the clutch

plate & cover
assembly (if required.
Correct the
alignment)
No fault found Problem related to 9 Further diagnosis

with clutch suspension or driveline required. Check
components. components. engine & transmission
mounting insulators.
U Joint, tyres, body
attaching parts.
Clutch master Piston/ bore damaged 9 Overhaul the master
cylinder or slave or corroded & slave cylinder.

Page 9 of 35
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
cylinder piston
jammed/
scuffing.
Tangential strap 1. Incorrect driving 9 Advise the customer
connecting the practice of the consequences.
pressure plate to 9 Mostly due to tow
the diaphragm starting in 1st or 2nd
cover broken. gear
Or
9 Incorrect gear
selection
Improper clutch release

Clutch disc New disc not checked 9 Check the new disc’s
warped. before installation runout & replace it.
Clutch plate is 1. Clutch disc hub 9 Replace the clutch

binding on the splines damaged plate.
input shaft’s during installation.
splines.
2. Input shaft splines
rough or damaged.
9 Replace input shaft
3. Corrosion or rust is severely damaged.
formation on splines
of disc and input
shaft. 9 Replace the clutch
plate. Replace the
input shaft if the
scaling can not be
removed.
Clutch disc- Vacuum may form in 9 Drill 1/16 inch
facing sticks to pockets over rivet head. diameter hole
flywheel. Occurs as clutch cools through rivets and
down after use. scuff sand the clutch
disc facing .
Clutch will not 1. Low fluid in the clutch 9 Top off the fluid and

Page 10 of 35
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
disengage master cylinder. check for leaks.
properly.
2. Air in the hydraulic
system 9 Bleed & refill the
system.
3. Clutch cover loose.
9 Tighten the bolts.
4. Wrong clutch disc.
5. Clutch cover 9 Replace disc.

diaphragm spring bent
/ warped during 9 Replace the cover
transmission assembly.
installation.
6. Clutch disc fitted

backwards.
9 Fit the clutch plate

correctly the hub
should be facing the
pressure plate side &
the flywheel side
mark towards the
flywheel
Bush worn out / Vibration / misalignment 9 Fit new bearings &

damaged check for
Clutch misalignment misalignments.
Hard gear shift

Brake fluid less 1. Leaks 9 Replace fluid.
and or 2. Reservoir strainer 9 Stop leaks and avoid
contaminated missing contamination.
Excessive clutch Wrong adjustment or Adjust
pedal free plays. lock nut loosening
Clutch plate 1. Warpage due to Replace

Page 11 of 35
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
warpage handling or assembly.
2. Warpage due to
misalignment.
In Car Repairs –
Adjustment of clutch pedal height
Clutch bleeding.
Adjustment of clutch pedal height –
Loosen the lock nut of master

cylinder’s push rod fork.

Page 12 of 35
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Slide backs the dust cover.
Rotate the master cylinder push

rod till desired height of pedal is
achieved.
Tighten the lock nut of push rod

fork.
Screw in pedal stopper bolt

completely.
Press pedal fully till the pedal

bottoms on the floor.
Now screw out the pedal stopper

bolt till it touches the pedal lever,
release pedal.
Screw out the bolt further by one
turn. Tighten the locknut.
Recheck pedal height.
Bleeding the clutch –
Remove the dust cap of the

bleeder screw.

Page 13 of 35
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
If the bleeding operation is done
without connecting a tube and in
the open air then the chance of
! air remaining trapped is high.
Connect bleeding tube, to

bleeding screw on slave cylinder.
Ensure that the other end of the

tube is fully immersed in the
bottle having clean clutch /brake
fluid.
Fill the Reservoir clutch master

cylinder up to the top level with
recommended clutch fluid.
Operate clutch pedal 3 or 4 times

slowly to the full stroke.
Holding the clutch in depressed

condition loosen the bleeding
screw on slave cylinder by ½ to ¾
turn and allow all the air escape
in to the container bottle.
Repeat the exercise till no air
bubbles appears in the bottle.
During this operation ensure fluid

level in reservoir.
Tighten the bleed screw properly.

Remove bleeding tube and place
the dust cap on bleed screw.
Check the fluid level in container
and need be top up to the ‘max’
level.

Page 14 of 35
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Note: It is suggested that after bleeding, the vehicle should be

driven for 10 to 15 kms. Then in warm conditions the bleeding should
be done once again
Clutch Actuation Mechanism –
The clutch actuation is hydraulic actuation. The clutch pedal actuates

a master cylinder. The hydraulic fluid is transmitted to the slave
cylinder through a flexible pipe.
The clutch actuation mechanism does not have a fork and the pivot
ball. The hydraulic concentric bearing is a unique design and
incorporates the slave cylinder and the release bearing. The bearing is
permanently attached to the slave cylinder piston. The hydraulic lines
are permanently attached to the bearing assembly. The hydraulic line
near the slave cylinder is fitted with a quick disconnect coupling.

Page 15 of 35
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
• Master cylinder overhaul
• Slave cylinder and Concentric bearing Overhaul
Master cylinder overhaul –
Remove the outlet pipe

connection.
Remove the clevis pin lock & the

clevis pin.
Remove the clutch push rod fork

& the clutch pedal.

Page 16 of 35
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Remove the master cylinder from

the firewall.
1. Pull back the dust cover.
2. Remove circlip.

Page 17 of 35
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
3. Remove the push rod assembly with retainer washer.
4. Remove the piston assembly by gently tapping the Clutch Master

cylinder body on a wooden block.
Using a screwdriver, lift the leaf

spring retainer. Remove spring
assembly from plunger.
Take care, while lifting the spring

otherwise the spring and the stem
! will fall off.
Compress spring to free valve stem

from eccentrically positioned hole
in the end face of spring retainer.
This will separate spring retainer
from valve stem.
Remove spring, valve spacer and

spring washer from the valve stem.
(While assembling hold the spacer
between fingers such that the
valve stems hangs down vertically.
Pull down the stem downwards as
far as possible. Observe if the
valve stem has moved freely
upwards. If movement is not free
replace valve spacer.)
Remove the valve seal from the


Page 18 of 35
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
valve stem.
The bore and the plunger should
be checked for scoring, scuffing
uneven wear marks, corrosion and
excessive clearance between
plunger & body
Check the condition of dust cover
for cut, deterioration if damaged
replace.
The assembly procedure is the
reverse of the dismantling
procedure.
While fitting the plunger lubricate
it with brake fluid.
Slave cylinder overhaul –

The concentric bearing and the slave cylinder are serviced as an
assembly only. It can not be overhauled. The release-bearing portion
of the assembly is permanently attached to the piston.
The only time the concentric bearing should

be replaced is when it is either leaking or
obviously damaged. The bearing should not
! be changed just because the clutch disc or
the pressure plate assembly is being
replaced. Replace the bearing assembly only
when it has failed.
Replacing the Clutch Slave Cylinder –
To replace the Concentric Clutch Slave Cylinder ; the transmission

needs to be removed.
For the removal of transmission please refer to ‘Clutch Overhaul’
section in this manual.

Page 19 of 35
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Dismantling -
1. Loosen & remove the 3 Nos. mounting bolts of the Concentric
Slave cylinder.
Note – The mounting bolts are ‘Torx’ type. Care should be taken
to use the proper tools to avoid any damage to the mounting
bolts head.
2. Separate the Bleeder – CSC & Concentric Slave Cylinder by

removing the Quick Release Coupling.
Assembly –
1. While fitting the new Concentric Slave Cylinder also separate

the Bleeder – CSC & the Slave Cylinder.
2. Fit the Slave Cylinder in the Transmission & tighten the

mounting bolts. Now connect the Bleeder – CSC to Slave
Cylinder.

Page 20 of 35
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
3. Fit the transmission back on the vehicle.
4. Connect the hydraulic pipe from CMC to CSC.
5. Bleed the System.
Note – While assembling , hand tighten the mounting bolts opposite to

each other & torque tighten to the specified torque.
Failing to which can lead to adverse effect on release bearing life.
Clutch overhaul –
Block the front wheels, so that

the vehicle does not move
forward.
Disconnect the negative cable of

the battery.
Remove the electrical connections

to the starter motor .
Remove the starter motor by
removing the mounting bolts.
Remove the Rear (Differential)

End Propeller Shaft bolts – 4 Nos.

Page 21 of 35
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Carefully pull the Propeller Shaft

out from the transmission.
Note – After the propeller shaft

yoke is pulled, a bit of oil is
expected to come out as the yoke
itself is the guide for the oil seal.
Disconnect the speed sensor

connection.
Remove the electrical connection for the reverse lamp switch.
Support the engine suitably at

rear end.
Remove the gearshift lever
grommet.

Page 22 of 35
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Remove the gear shift lever upper
half.
Support the gearbox using a

suitable stand.
Remove the gearbox mounting
insulators.
Remove the clutch housing
fastening screws to the engine.
Remove the hydraulic pipe
connecting the Clutch Master
Cylinder to Clutch Slave Cylinder.
Collect the Hydraulic Fluid. Do not
allow the fluid to fall on painted
surface.
Move the gearbox away from the

engine.

Page 23 of 35
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
If the cover assembly may be reused then loosen the cover bolts
evenly and in tightening sequence to relive the spring tension
equally.
The bolts should be loosened few threads at a time – so that the
warping is avoided.
If the cover assembly is not going to be reused then this precaution is
not essential.
If the pilot bearing has to be
removed then the flywheel has to
be removed and then the bearing
removed using the MST no 543.
(To install the bearing MST no 544
has to be used.)
During assembly use the MST 546
to align the clutch plate while the
cover is being tightened.
The assembly sequence is the reverse of the dismantling (except
the precautions mentioned.)
Inspection:
All the components should be inspected for wear. Any components,

which are beyond the wear limits, have to be replaced.
Over & above the wear limits: The following points also need to be
ensured.
Flywheel runout --

Page 24 of 35
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
The flywheel runout needs to be checked whenever misalignment is
suspected. Flywheel runout should not exceed 0.10 mm
To measure the runout; mount the base of the magnetic dial gauge on
the block. Locate the dial gauge’s needle on the outer surface of the
flywheel.
Some of the common reasons for excessive runout are:

9 Heat warpage.
9 Improper machining.
9 Incorrect bolt tightening
9 Foreign material on crankshaft flange or flywheel.
9 Improper seating on crankshaft.
If the flywheel has been removed for resurfacing or replacing the pilot
bearing then while fitting it back ensure that:
¾ No dirt and grease present on the mounting face (it can cause
cocking & run out)
¾ The flywheel bolts have been replaced.
¾ Torque tightened as per sequence and also the angular tightening

as per the specification is done.
Absence of any of these requirements may result in bolt loosening

causing flywheel runout.
Clutch cover & Disc runout --
Check the clutch disc runout before fitting. It should be within the
specifications. If it is more than the specification- use a different
clutch plate.
A warped cover or diaphragm spring will result in clutch grab and / or

incomplete release of clutch plate.
If the clutch alignment tool is not used then the misalignment of the
clutch plate can cause distortion of the cover and also disc damage.

Page 25 of 35
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
The cover can also get misaligned due to improper tightening of the
cover onto the flywheel. The only way to avoid is that the bolts must
be tightened alternatively (diagonal pattern) and evenly i.e. 2 to 3
thread a time only.
Clutch Housing Misalignment –
The clutch housing has to be aligned with the engine so that the input
shaft is aligned with the crankshaft. Absence of this alignment results
in clutch noise, incomplete release of the clutch plate. It can
normally be judged by uneven wear of the finger and pilot bearing. In
severe case it can also damage the spline of the input shaft and clutch
hub’s well as the clutch splines
¾ Normally the clutch housing misalignment is a result of:

¾ Incorrect seating on the engine/transmission.
¾ Missing alignment dowel holes.
¾ Loose or missing mounting bolt.
¾ Mounting surfaces that are damaged/ not parallel.
Before fitting the clutch housing ensure that no dirt, debris or foreign
parts are trapped between the mating surface of the transmission &
the clutch housing.
Flywheel --
If the flywheel is found to be having minor scoring then it can be

resurfaced. However the maximum allowed cut is 0.076 mm. If scoring
is deeper than 0.0076 than the flywheel has to be changed. (Excessive
material removal will cause the flywheel to either crack/ warpage
after installation/ drop in clamping load and will affect the proper
clutch release as the travel of release bearing gets affected.)
If the flywheel has been removed for resurfacing or replacing the pilot
bearing then while fitting it back ensure that:
¾ No dirt and grease present on the mounting face (it can cause
cocking & run out)
¾ The flywheel bolts have been replaced.


Page 26 of 35
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
¾ Torque tightened as per sequence and also the angular tightening

as per the specification is done.
Absence of any of these requirements may result in bolt loosening

causing flywheel runouts.
Starter ring replacement: Unless the provision of properly heating &

fitting is available. It is not recommended to replace the starter ring.
It is worthwhile to replace the ring along with the flywheel.
Caution: If the starter ring is only going to be replaced

then :-
• Do not use a gas flame to cut. It can

cause local overheating of flywheel.
! • The ring gear has to be heated in a oven

to get
uniform expansion. (Nearly 191°C)
• Do not use flame to heat the ring – it can

cause
annealing of the ring teeth and premature
failure.

Page 27 of 35
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Specifications & Wear Limits –

Clutch control type- Hydraulic- self adjusting
Pressure plate Diaphragm
Clutch Disc 240±1

Outer Dia (mm) 160± 1
Inner Dia ( mm)
Disc Thickness ( mm) 8.8 mm ( free)
Clutch disc run out 0.8 mm Max
Minimum thickness 0.4 mm

from outer face to
rivet head.

Page 28 of 35
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Clutch pedal Suspended Type
Clutch pedal Ratio
7.4
Clutch Pedal Height

above carpet
thickness of 10 mm.
Normal 172 mm
Under full 165 mm.
depression.
Clutch pedal free 5 to 6 mm

play ( including push
rod play at pedal
top)
Master Cylinder 19.05 mm

Bore diameter

Page 29 of 35
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Slave Cylinder mm
Inner diameter
Clearance between
The piston & the 0.13 mm
bore
( Both cylinders)
Flywheel Standard Service

Limit
Flatness ≤ 0.05 0.1
Runout ≤ 0.05 0.1
Flywheel 35±0.13
Width from Mounting
face to clutch face
Clutch release point 25 mm from Bottom

from pedal full position
stroke end position
Pressure plate finger 47.6 ± 1.0 mm

height ( mm)

Page 30 of 35
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Diaphragm spring tip 0.8 mm ( finger to finger)

non alignment.( Max)
Diaphragm spring Max depth 0.5 mm

finger wear Max width 5 mm

Page 31 of 35
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Location Torque Nm ( Lbft)

Pressure plate bolts 32.5 ± 2.5 Nm (24 ± 2 Lb-ft)
Clutch pedal position Switch
25 Nm (18 Lb-ft)
lock nut
Clutch master cylinder nut 25 Nm (18 Lb-ft)
Clutch slave cylinder bolts 45 Nm (33 Lb-ft)
Flywheel Bolts 90 Nm + 60° ( 66 Lbft + 60°)
Clutch pedal pivot bolt and
27.5 ± 2.5 Nm ( 20 ± 2 Lb-ft)
nut

Page 32 of 35
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
List of the MST –
Description / Part No. / Usage View

Sketch
Master clutch plate
assembly- diesel ( aligner)
MST 546

Page 33 of 35
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Extractor Flywheel bearing
MST 543
Drift Flywheel bearing

MST 544
Lubricant –
Specification: DOT 3
Hindustan Petroleum: HP Super Duty Brake Fluid
Castrol: Girling Brake Fluid
Indian Oil: Servo Brake fluid Super HD

Page 34 of 35
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector

Page 35 of 35
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
NGT 530R -2 WD
Contents
Description
Care of the transmission
Service Diagnosis
In vehicle adjustment & repair
Dismantling
Cleaning & Inspection
Tightening Torque
Special Tools
Specifications
Mahindra & Mahindra Ltd Scorpio VLX NGT 530R

Page 1 of 22
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Description --
It is a 5-speed gearbox. The 1st & 2nd gear is having double cone type
synchronizer while the 3rd,4th & 5th are having strut type synchronization.
The reverse gear is sliding mesh.
The gear selection is by a direct shift lever operating a 3-rail system. The
accidental operation of two gears is avoided by an interlocking
mechanism. To avoid vibrations passing on to the shift lever; the shift
lever is two-piece with rubber isolation provided on to the top half.
The gearbox housing is 3 piece aluminium with an intermediate plate. A

skid plate protects the bottom of the gearbox. The Gearbox is mounted
directly on the flywheel through the integral clutch housing and supported
at rear on the cross member.
Care of the transmission --
The lubricant level should be checked every 10000 Kms. with the vehicle
unladen and on level ground. The lubricant level should be at the lower
edge of the filler plug. Use lubricant meeting oils specification of GL 4 &
viscosity 80W90.The brand names have been specified in the Operators
Manual.
The lubricant should be changed at 5000 Kms, then at 40000 Kms and
after that every 40000 Kms.

Page 2 of 22
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Service Diagnosis –
A low transmission lubricant level is generally the result of a leak,

inadequate lubricant fill, or an incorrect lubricant level check.
Leaks can occur at the mating surface of the gear case, intermediate
plate and adapter or extension housing or from the front/rear seals. A
suspected leak could also be result of an overfill condition.
Leaks at the rear of the extension or adapter housing will be from the
housing oil seal. Leaks at component mating surface will probably be the
result of inadequate sealer, gaps in sealer, incorrect bolt tightening, or
the use of a non-recommended sealer.
A leak at the front of the transmission will be from either the front
bearing retainer or retainer seal. Lubricant may be seen dripping from the
clutch housing after extended operation. If the leak is severe, it may also
contaminate the clutch disc causing slip, grab and chatter.
A correct lubricant level check can be made only when the vehicle is
level, use a two post or a four post hoist to ensure this. Also allow the
lubricant to settle for a minute or so before checking. These
recommendations will ensure that an accurate check and avoid an under
fill or overfill conditions.
Hard Shifting
Hard shifting is usually caused by low lubricant level, improper or

contaminated lubricants, component damage, and incorrect clutch
adjustment or by a damaged clutch pressure plate or disc.
Substantial lubricant leak can result in gear, shift rail, synchro and bearing
damage. If a leak goes undetected for an extended period the first
indications of a problem are usually hard shifting and noise.

Page 3 of 22
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Incorrect or contaminated lubricants can also contribute to hard shifting.
The consequence of using non-recommended lubricants is noise, excessive
wear, internal bind and hard shifting.
Improper clutch release is one of the most frequent causes of hard

shifting. Incorrect adjustment of a worn damaged pressure plate or disc
can cause incorrect release. If the clutch problem is advanced then it can
result in gear clash during shifts. Incomplete travel of the clutch pedal
due to restrictions at the end of stroke (upturned carpet, extra carpet or
cover or bend clutch linkage can also cause improper clutch release and
hard shift.)
Worn or damaged synchro rings can cause gear clash when shifting any
forward gear. In some new or rebuilt transmissions, new synchro rings may
tend to stick slightly causing hard or noisy shifts. In most conditions this
will decline as the rings wear in.
Transmission noise
Most manual transmissions make some noise during normal operation.

Rotating gears can generate slight whine that may only be audible at
extreme speeds.
Severe obviously audible transmission noise is generally the result of a

lubricant problem. Insufficient, improper or contaminated lubricant can
promote rapid wear of gears, synchros, shift rail, forks and bearing’s. The
overheating caused by a lubricant problem can also lead to gear breakage.

Page 4 of 22
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Summarizing the common faults and their cause:
Problem Possible CausesCorrection

Gear Whine Low oil level Top up oil.
Worn teeth gears
Replace gears
Worn bearings Replace bearings.
Knocking or Chipped gear teeth
Replace gears.
ticking Foreign matter inside
Remove the foreign
transmission. matter and locate how
Defective bearings.
the foreign matter
came inside e.g.
missing breather and
rectify that also to
avoid recurrence.
Replace the bearings.
Jumping out of Defective detent springs. Replace the detent
gear Worn out grooves in shift springs.
rail. Replace the shift rails.
Shaft misalignment. Replace the gears
Worn dog teeth in gear Replace the fork/ pads
Worn out fork/ fork pads Replace the body
Worn out synchronizer
body.
Unable to Clutch defective Rectify the clutch/
select gear clutch withdrawal
Worn out selector mechanism
mechanism Rectify the gear
selector mechanism
Hard gear Clutch defective Rectify the clutch/
shifting clutch withdrawal
mechanism
Improper or contaminated Replace the lubricant
lubricants with the specified
lubricant.

Page 5 of 22
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Replacement of output shaft seal –
Remove the propeller shaft from the

Rear (Differential) end & carefully
pull the propeller shaft out from the
transmission.
Tap the dust cover out with the help

of a mallet.
Remove the oil seal using a blunt
edge screw driver or any other
suitable tool.
Note - Care must be taken not to
damage the housing while removing
the oil seal.
Fit the new oil seal.
Caution - The lip of the oil seal &

the aluminium housing should be
protected against any damge.
Removal of the transmission from Vehicle –
Remove the top lever.
Remove the Rear (Differential) End

Propeller Shaft bolts – 4 Nos.
Carefully pull the Propeller Shaft out

from the transmission.
Note – After the propeller shaft yoke

is pulled, a bit of oil is expected to

Page 6 of 22
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
come out as the yoke itself is the
guide for the oil seal.
Drain the transmission oil.

Loosen & remove the starter motor.
Remove the hydraulic pipe
connecting the Clutch Master
Cylinder to Clutch Slave Cylinder.
Loosen & remove the Clutch Housing
fastening bolts.
Disconnect the speed sensor
connection.
Disconnect the reverse lamp switch
connections.
Loosen the cross member bolts.
Remove the transmission.
Note: Unless otherwise specified the assembly procedure / guidelines
is the reverse of the disassembly procedure
Dismantling :

Page 7 of 22
2
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
1. Remove the lock clip & remove the grommet.
2. Remove biasing cover plate bolts & springs. – 4 nos. (Check Point A)
3. Remove Lever retention bolts – 3 nos.
4. Put the selector mechanism in neutral & remove lever assembly
along with nylon bush.
5. Remove the Speedo adaptor.

6. Loosen & remove the bolts fastening the Front housing –
Intermediate plate & the Rear housing.
7. Remove the rear housing by tapping with the help of a mallet.
12
11
9

Confidential- For Internal Circulation Only 10 Nov 07
Page 8 of 22
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
8. Remove the circlip in front of the 5th driven gear.
9. Remove the bearing inner race, shim, bevel gear on the 5th – Reverse
sub shaft.
10. Remove 5th driving gear, synchro brass ring & the needle bearing.
11. Remove the roller bearing on the main shaft using MST---.
12. Remove the 5th driven gear using MST ---.
15
13
14
13. Loosen & remove the detents, ball & spring from the front housing.
14. Loosen & remove the reverse switch.
15. Pull out the gear train from the front housing with intermediate
plate.

Page 9 of 22
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
16. Separate the Main drive gear from the main shaft.
23
22
20
21 18
17. Loosen & remove the detent, ball & spring from the intermediate
plate.
18. Remove the 5th – reverse rail fork & remove the 5th – reverse rail &
fork assembly, idler gear, reverse sub shaft & synchro hub
assembly.
19. Separate the Counter shaft from the intermediate plate.
20. Remove the 3rd – 4th shift rail split pin & remove 3rd – 4th shift
rail & selector fork & plunger.
21. Remove 1st – 2nd shift rail split pin & remove the shift rail &
fork.
22. Loosen & remove the nut in front of the reverse driven gear &
remove the reverse driven gear from the main shaft.
23. Separate the intermediate plate from the main shaft.

Page 10 of 22
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
24. Remove the main shaft pilot (small bearing towards clutch
housing side) bearing.
25. Remove the circlip & Belleville washer.
26. Remove the 3rd – 4th synchro hub assembly, synchro brass ring &
the 3rd gear. Separate the 3rd gear needle bearing.
27. Remove the taper roller bearing from the other end. Separate
the 1st gear shim, 1st gear needle bearing, double cone synchro
assembly, 2nd gear & the 2nd gear needle bearing.
Dismantling of Double Cone Synchro Assembly –
The Double cone synchro which is used in this transmission assembly is

serviced as a unit. If dismantled the assembly procedure is as below –
Gear
Inner Ring
Intermediate
Ring Outer Ring
Sleeve
Hub
Strut

Page 11 of 22
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Place hub on the plain surface and install sleeve on to the hub as shown
in the picture. Please ensure big groove comes exactly in center of the
hub slot.
Place 3 nos. struts at each slot of the hub. Push struts against sleeve and
slid in the grove.
Note : Be careful, struts should not jump out of ring, causes injury.

Page 12 of 22
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Place outer ring on the hub by engaging ring’s projections in to hub

pockets.
Hub
Groove Outer Ring
Tangs
Place intermediate ring as shown in the picture, three tangs should face
the grooves on the hub.
Hub
Groove
Marking
on the
Inner Outer Ring
Ring Tangs
Place inner ring by engaging tangs with the pocket of outer ring.
For reference : marking on the inner ring should come exactly in center
of groove on the hub.

Page 13 of 22
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Please ensure that inner ring is
seated properly in the Pocket of
outer ring. Intermediate ring and
inner ring should be almost at
one level.
Place 1st gear by engaging

intermediate ring’s tang with the
three cuts on the dog plate of
gear.
Please ensure other synchronizer
assembly remains in the same
position.
Invert the above whole assembly

and put on to the Gear box shaft.
Put outer ring, intermediate ring,

inner ring and 2nd gear as
described above on the other
side.

Page 14 of 22
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Check Points –
A)
Remove the speedometer drive.
Caution: Failure to do may

result in damage to bearing/
housing.
B)
Please note the fitment of the

balls & the interlock pins.
It is recommended that while

assembly lightly smear the pin &
balls with grease.
This will avoid the ball or the pin

falling down while assembly.
Springs towards 1st / 2nd gear

position is softer than 5th /
reverse position.
Cleaning & Inspection –
Clean the transmission parts in solvent.

Dry the housing gear mechanisms & shafts with compressed air.
Do not use the compressed air to clean / dry the bearings. It can cause
damage to raceways and rollers.

Page 15 of 22
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Description Torque Nm
Plug - Shift Rail Poppet Spring 12.5 ± 2.5 Nm (9 ± 2 lbf – ft )
Bolt / Nut – Clutch Hsg. To Main Hsg. 30 ± 5 Nm (22 ± 4 lbf – ft )
Flange Bolt – Front, Intermediate & 35 ± 5 Nm (26 ± 4 lbf – ft )
Rear Hsg.
Drain plug 27.5 ± 2.5 Nm (20 ±2 lbf – ft )
Filler plug 27.5 ± 2.5 Nm (20 ± 2 lbf – ft )
Reverse light switch 27.5 ± 2.5 Nm (20 ± 2 lbf – ft )
Bolt - Idler Shaft 43 ± 7 Nm ( 32 ± 3 lbf – ft )
Bolt - Bearing Retainer Plate 31 ± 4 Nm ( 23 ± 3 lbf – ft )
Lever Retension Bolt 24 ± 4 Nm ( 18 ± 3 lbf – ft )
Speedometer Sleeve 35 ± 5 Nm (26 ± 5 lbf – ft )

Page 16 of 22
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Special Tools --
Description/ Part No./ Sketch Usage View

Dolly to press outer race of Counter
Shaft Brg. in Intermediate Plate
0703AD2720H007
Dolly to press outer race of MD Gear

Brg. in Ft. Hsg.
070 AD2720H008
Dolly for pressing oil seal in Rear

Hsg.
0703AD2720H002

Page 17 of 22
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Dolly for pressing Outer Race of
Countershaft Bearing
0703AD2720H005
Dolly fir pressing Outer Race of

Output shaft Bearing in
Intermediate Plate
0703AD2720H006

Page 18 of 22
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Specifications –

Type Mechanical
Description NGT 530 R
Gears 5 Forward and one reverse
gear
Gear shift Direct shift with rubberized
lever
Gears Helical- toothed
1 3 5 Gear Engagement Double Cone type

synchronizer on 1st – 2nd ,
Block ring 3rd-4th pin type
on 5th gear.
2 4 R
Gear Ratio
1st 3.778
2nd 2.087
3rd 1.379
4th 0.789
5th 3.524
Reverse
Oil grade/ quantity 80 W90; GL 4
Oil Capacity: 2.3 litres.
Counter shaft One ball bearing & one

bearing Cylindrical roller.

Page 19 of 22
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector

Input Torque 20 MKg
capacity
Weight 68 Kg
Kg
Play Limit (mm) Service

limit(mm)
1st 0.175 0.375
2nd 0.175 0.375
3rd 0.175 0.375
4th 0.175 0.375
5th 0.18 0.3
Fork to groove 0.1to 0.4
clearances/

Page 20 of 22
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Sealants –
Sr. Location Sealant / Thread Locks Applicability

No.
NGT 530 R – 2 WD
1 Ft. Hsg. & Loctite 574
Intermediate √
Plate
2 Intermediate Loctite 574 √
Plate & Rear Hsg.
3 Clutch Hsg. & Frt. Loctite 574 √
Hsg.
4 Output shaft Loctite – 24185 √
Locknut Optional – ANR 138
Optional – Loctite 242
5 Breather Loctite 648 √
6 Pivot & Rear Hsg. Rhodorseal √
Optional – CAF -33
Pidiseal – 3P

Page 21 of 22
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
7 Poppet Plug M12 X Loctite 574 √
1.25
8 Speedo Sleeve & Pedilite 171 √
Rear Hsg.
9 Drain Plug Threads
Pedilite 171 √
10 Filler Plug Threads Pedilite 171 √
11 Reverse light Pedilite 171 √
switch Threads Optional – Loctite 577

Page 22 of 22
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Propeller shaft
Contents
Description
Trouble shooting
In car repairs
Care of the system
Repairs
Specifications & Wear Limits
Tightening Torques
Mahindra & Mahindra Ltd Scorpio VLX Propeller Shaft

Page 1 of 9
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Description
The function of the propeller shaft is to transmit power from one point
to another. The shaft is designed to transmit torque from transmission /
transfer case to the axle.
The propeller shaft has to operate through constantly changing length

while transmitting torque. The axle rides suspended by spring in floating
motion. The propeller shaft must be able to change the transmission
angle when going through the various road surfaces. This is done
through Universal joints which permit the propeller shaft top operates
at different angles. The slip joint or the yokes allow the contraction or
expansion of the propeller shaft thus allowing the length to change.
The Propeller shaft used on Scorpio VLX is single type with one
companion flange & the yoke with slip joint enters in the transmission.
The sealing at the transmission end is achieved using an oil seal. When
the propeller shaft is removed from the transmission end some amount
of transmission oil is expected to come out. This is normal.
The view of the propeller shaft is shown below –

Page 2 of 9
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Trouble shooting –
Tyres that are out of round or wheels that are out of balance cause a
low frequency vibration.
Brake drums that are unbalanced cause a harsh low frequency vibration.
Driveline vibrations can also result from loose or damaged engine
mountings.
Propeller shaft vibrations will keep on increasing as the vehicle speed

increase. The propeller shaft does not cause a vibration that is present
only in a narrow speed range.
Drive condition Possible cause Correction

Propeller shaft 1. Undercoating or Clean exterior of shaft &
other foreign on the wash with solvent.
shaft.
2. Worn out yoke/slip Replace the joint/yoke.
joint.
3. Excessive runout. Check runout- replace
shaft.
4. Incorrect drive line Correct angularity.
angularity.
5. Worn UJ bearings. Replace the UJ.
6. Propeller shaft Replace the propeller
damaged or bent. shaft.
7. Excessive runout or Reindex the propeller
unbalanced shaft by 180°, test and
condition. correct as required.
8. Excessive pinion Reindex the propeller
shaft runout. shaft by 180°, test and
correct as required
Universal Joint UJ worn out Replace the UJ

Noise

Page 3 of 9
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
In car repairs –
Unbalance
Runout
Unbalance –
If the propeller shaft unbalance is suspected then it can be verified by

the following procedure.
Removing & rendering the propeller shaft by 180° may eliminate

some vibrations.
Clean all the foreign material from

propeller shaft and the universal
joint.
Inspect the propeller shaft for missing
balance weight, broken welds and
bent areas.
If the propeller shaft is bent then it
must be replaced.
Ensure that the propeller shaft is not
worn, are properly installed and are
correctly aligned with the propeller
shaft
Check the companion flange mounting
bolts.
Raise the vehicle.
Remove the wheel & tyres.
Install the wheel nuts to lock the
brake drum.

Page 4 of 9
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Mark & number the shaft 6 inches
from pinion end at four positions 90°
apart.
Run and accelerate the engine until

vibration occurs. Note the intensity &
1 2 the speed at which the vibration
occurs.
Install a screw clamp at position “1”
Start the engine and recheck for

1 2 vibrations. If there is little or no
change in vibrations then move the
clamp or of the other 3 positions.
If there is no difference in vibration at the other position then the
vibration is not due to the propeller shaft imbalance.
If the vibration decreases, install a

second clamp and repeat the test.

Page 5 of 9
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
If the clamps cause an additional

imbalance, separate the clamp (¼ inch
above & below the mark.). Repeat the
vibration test.
Increase the distance between the

clamps until the vibration is at the
lowest level.
At this position bend the slack end of

the clamp so that it does not loosen.
Install the wheel & tyres. Lower the
vehicle.
If the amount of the vibration remains unacceptable then repeat the

exercise at the Gearbox end.

Page 6 of 9
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Runout
Remove dirt, rust, paint &

undercoating from the propeller shaft
surface.
The dial indicator must be installed

perpendicular to the shaft surface.
Measure the runout at the center and

at the ends – away from the weld.
Replace the propeller shaft if the runout is beyond the specified

limit.
Care of the system --
Caution:
Before undercoating a vehicle with any underbody protection; the
propeller shaft and the UJ’s should be covered. This will prevent the
undercoating from causing an unbalanced condition and vibration.
Use the exact replacement hardware for attaching the propeller shafts.
The specified torques must always be applied when tightening the
mounting bolts.

Page 7 of 9
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Repairs --
Lift the vehicle
Put aligning marks on the flange,

UJ and propeller shaft before
removal.
Do not use a punch to mark

impression.
Remove the mounting bolts at the

pinion end
It is important to protect the

machined, external surface of the
yoke from damage after propeller
shaft removal. Any damage in the
machined surface will lead to
damage of the seal and cause a
leak.
Remove the circlips holding the UJ

in place.

Page 8 of 9
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Applying the socket wrench on the

outside of the propeller shaft
flange, force out one end of UJ
using a vice as shown. (One end 32
mm socket to receive other end
21-mm socket to push.)
While assembling- insert both ends

then hold & press fit them with
special tool.
Specifications & Wear Limits –
Description 2WD 4WD
Length (Joint to Joint)

x O.D x thickness in
mm
Rear
Front ( Diesel)
Rear ( GB –c/brg)-Split
propeller
Runout Diesel
Tightening Torque –
Location Torque Nm (lbf-ft)

Companion Flange nuts at 60.5 ±5.5 Nm (45 ± 4 lbf-ft)
Axle end

Page 9 of 9
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Rear Axle
Contents
Description
Trouble Shooting
Care of the axle
In Vehicle Adjustment & Repair
Rear axle Overhaul
Specification
Tightening Torques
Special Tools
Lubricants
Mahindra & Mahindra Ltd Scorpio VLX Rear Axle

Page 1 of 30
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Description
The rear axle is of the hypoid, semi-floating type using shim adjustment
to obtain bearing pre-loads. The differential case with Crown wheel and
the drive pinion are mounted in opposed taper roller bearing in one-
piece rear axle carrier.
The rear axle pinion receives its power from the engine through the
Transmission and driveshaft. The drive pinion rotates the differential
case through the engagement with the crown wheel, which is bolted, to
the differential case flange. Inside the differential cages are four
differential pinions mounted on the differential pinion shaft which is
splined to the housing. These gears are engaged with the side gears, to
which the axle shafts are splined. Therefore as the differential housing
turns, it rotates the axle shaft and the rear wheel. When it is necessary
for one wheel to rotate faster than the other is, the faster turning gear
causes the pinion to roll on slower turning gear to allow differential
action between the two axle shafts.
The axle shafts are held in the housing by the bearings and the retainers
at the housing outer end. Axle shaft endplay is pre set and not
adjustable. The hub bearings are prepackaged for life.
L All operations other than the removal of the axle shafts and the
replacement of the wheel bearing oil seal should be carried out
with the axle removed from the vehicle.
Certain rear axle and driveline trouble symptoms are also common to
the engine, transmission, tyres and other parts of the Vehicle. For this
reason be sure that the cause of the trouble is in the rear axle before
adjusting, repairing or replacing any of the axle parts.

Page 2 of 30
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Rear Axle Noise Diagnosis –
Basic characteristics in a rear axle are more difficult to diagnose and

repair than mechanical failures. Slight axle noise heard only at certain
speed or under particular conditions must be considered normal. Axle
noise tend to peak or be more pronounced at particular speeds and the
noise is in now way a sign of the trouble in the vehicle.
Where noise is present in objectionable form (Loud and/ or at all

speeds) the first effort should be to isolate the noise.
Isolation of noise in any one unit requires care and experience and an
attempt to eliminate a slight noise may baffle even the most
experienced mechanic/ technician.
Axle noise fall into two basic categories: gear noise and/ or bearing
noise.
Axle Noise Gear Noise

Bearing Noise
Others
Gear Noise –
The most important characteristic of the gear noise is that it is usually

sensitive to accelerator position. E.g. noise audible under drive
condition will often disappear under coast condition (i.e. driving in
neutral with the clutch released and engine running) at the same
vehicle speed and vice versa.
Axle gear noise whine will always occur at the same road speed and
throttle setting i.e. drive or coast (i.e. driving in neutral with the clutch
released and engine running). Gear whine is usually a fairly high pitched
pure tone as opposed to a low-pitched rumble caused by a spalled
bearing.
Some noises, which can be confused with axle gear whine, are: -
…. Whine from an engine component; this will always occur at the same
engine speed irrespective of which transmission gear is used

Page 3 of 30
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
…. Whine from an indirect Transmission gear (e.g. 5th gear on some

vehicles produces a whine comparable with axle whine) however this
will disappear when the direct transmission ratio is selected.
…. Whine from tyres or wind noise from a rack or aerial. These noise
generally occur over a very broad speed range and do not change with
driving mode i.e. drive or coast (i.e. driving in neutral with the clutch
released and engine running)
Remember
Before diagnosing the whine as axle gear noise, ensure that the
whine:
(a)Occurs in direct transmission ratio (4th gear)
(b) Changes with throttle/ accelerator variations (drive and coast) (

i.e. driving in neutral with the clutch released and engine running)
(c) Always occur at the same road speed and not engine speed,
(d) Occurs over a limited vehicle speed. (This can vary over a wide
band should the axle be in extremely bad condition.)
Bearing Noise –
Bearing noise is inclined to be less throttle sensitive than gear noise and
frequently occurs over a wide speed range. Bad cases of faulty bearings
can, in fact be detected from walking speed, building up in pitch as
speed increases and is not directly affected by changing from drive to
coast (i.e. driving in neutral with the clutch released and engine
running) and visa versa
(a)Rear wheel bearing noise tends to be low pitched grumble, which can
normally be detected and confirmed when driving on a smooth road
at constant speed, with the noise most audible while swerving
sharply from left to right. If the noise increases or decreases as the

Page 4 of 30
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
car is swerved, it is probable that a wheel bearing is faulty. Driving
close to a wall or a curb at a suitable speed can carry out a further
check for wheel bearing noise.
(b) Differential bearing noise is usually similar to in pitch to wheel

bearing noise but is not affected by the swerve check referred to
previously.
(c) Pinion bearing noise is normally at a higher pitch than wheel or

differential bearings and is often slightly sensitive to throttle
position, although not to the same extent as gear noise.
Other:
1. A further condition, which can exist, is due to a worn bearing that

allows the gear set to move out of its correct mesh cause gear noise.
This condition is usually throttle sensitive, with the noise frequently
disappearing on a “drive” condition.
Any amount of or endplay in either the pinion bearings or differential

carrier bearings are detrimental to the gears and bearings and will
cause axle noise.
2. A high spot sometimes occur on either the ring gear or the drive
pinion; this shows up as a ticking or light knocking noise over a
restricted range of throttle position. The frequency of the noise will
indicate whether the high spot is on the pinion (drive shaft
frequency) or on the ring gear. The severity of the noise indicates the
size of the defect. A light “tick “ is seldom detrimental and usually
occurs in new axle and will normally disappears once the axle has
been run in.
3. Louder noise usually indicate a more serious defect and a knock

occurring in an axle which was previously free from this type of noise
must always be investigated.
Care of the axle –

Page 5 of 30
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
The lubricant level should be checked every 10000 Kms with the vehicle
unladen and in a level ground. The lubricant level should be at the
lower edge of the filler plug. Use lubricant meeting oils specification of
GL 5 and viscosity of SAE 90 .The brand names have been specified in
the lubricant section.
Note: Unless otherwise specified the assembly procedure /

guidelines is the reverse of the disassembly procedure
IN VEHCILE ADJUSTEMENT & REPAIR –
The works in axle that can be done without removing from the vehicle
are:
Replacement of pinion seal
Backlash adjustment
Replacement of Pinion seal
Remove the propeller shaft from

the companion flange

Page 6 of 30
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Using the MST 216, Lock the
companion flange.
Unlock the pinion nut
Remove the companion flange along

with the dust cover
Using screwdriver take out the old
oil seal- take care not to damage
the seating / contact areas/
Fit the new seal using the dolly.
Apply oil on lip and ensure that

seating are has been wiped clean
and free of burrs
Backlash adjustment.
The backlash adjustment should not be done on the vehicle. This is
due to the fact that the spreader usage in vehicle is difficult if the
vehicle isn’t being attended in a pit. Further after adjustment it may be
necessary to adjust pinion height. (Any change in backlash indicates
wear- hence though shim adjustment may compensate for gear teeth
wear. It will not compensate the pinion wear and pinion bearing wear
and loss of preload)

Page 7 of 30
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
However it is suggested that the tooth contact be checked on the
vehicle before taking decision to
open/ overhaul. It is recommended
that after draining the oil and
opening the rear cover. Put paint
marks in four different places. Then
push the vehicle forward and
backwards at least 15 feet. This will
give a much better tooth contact
under load. (It should be
remembered that with load the tooth
contact moves away from toe to heel). The tooth contact without load
is given in the specification sheet.)
Rear axle Overhaul –
Comprises of the following major steps
1. Removal & Refitment of the axle from the vehicle.
2. Removal of the Refitment of the hub and the brake carrier and oil
seal.
3. Removal of the differential assembly.
4. Pinion height adjustment and preloading of pinion bearings
5. Assembly of the crown wheel.
1) Removal and Refitment of the axle assembly from the vehicle
Support the body on stand and

remove the tyres.
Remove the shock absorber.
Remove the brake pipe T clamp
from axle
Remove the LSPV spring from axle
end

Page 8 of 30
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Loosen suspension links.
Axle to be supported & should not

fall
Remove the axle from the vehicle
2) Removal & Refitment of the rear axle shaft & hub
Remove the brake drum after

loosening the two screws
Remove the parking brake locking

Page 9 of 30
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Loosen the 6 screws holding the

retainer.
Using the MST576 and the sliding

hammer MST 577. Pull out the hub
integral with the axle shaft,
prepackaged bearing, retainer ,oil
seal and carrier
For removal of the bearing the

locking collar has to be cut using
a drill. It should be cut up to the
end and then using the chisel it
should be snapped open
Remove bearing using the

hydraulic press and the MST.
While assembly use the MST 578

to support the bearing & tube MST
579 for pressing

Page 10 of 30
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector

Page 11 of 30
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
The assembly section is shown in the sketch attached. Please note

the bearing direction the circlip
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO FIT THE

LOCKING COLLAR BY HEATING.
THE COLLAR IS HARDENED AND

TEMPERED.HEATING & PRESSING
MAY CAUSE IT TO LOOSEN IN
SERVICE CAUSING MAJOR
FAILURE

Page 12 of 30
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
While reassemble use the hole in
axle shaft flange to tighten the
retainer bolts.
Please ensure that the hydraulic

press is capable of at least 10
tons load and it has a adequate
stroke.
3) Removal of the Centre assembly
After draining the oil - remove the

differential cover set screws.
Remove the differential side

bearing bolts

Page 13 of 30
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Remove the side bearing caps,
Using MST 205, expand the

differential.
Pull out the crown along with the

bearings
Using MST 216, lock the

companion flange.

Page 14 of 30
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Unlock the pinion nut.
Remove the companion flange

along with the dust cover
Tap the pinion along with

bearings,
4) Assembly of the Centre assembly
Using the special tool
Without the special tool
Preloading of the crown wheel and backlash adjustment.
The pinion preload setting and tooth contact setting can be done by
using:
a) Special Tool. The special tool and gauges are strongly recommended
in either of the scenario
new axle housing is used or
the bearing seating surface has worn out.
b) Without the use of special tools. This can be done only if the crown
wheel & pinion is being replaced in the existing housing and the
crown wheel bearing seating and the pinion inner bearing seating
area is not worn.
4 a) Assembly Using the Special Tools
If the pinion bearings are having

pitting, flaking or spalling of the

Page 15 of 30
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
raceway then they have to be
replaced.
Remove the outer race using the

MST
( For Fitting use MST 200)

To measure the Z value (distance of pinion apex from the carrier
center)
Place the setting gauge (MST 581) in

the carrier (the pinions inner
bearing outer race & shim should be
removed) Please note that the
lifting handle should be removed
after placing it in position
Place the setting gauge 2 – MST 582

( in the crown wheel bore)
Measure the gap between the

setting gauge 1 and 2 using a feeler
gauge.
Ensure that the gauge 582’s face is

parallel to the differential case.

Page 16 of 30
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
( Use a level gauge)
For example if the thickness

measured X is 12 thou
The value etched in pinion is Y
Then the shim value is X-Y
In this example it will become
12-5= 7 thou
Place the 7thou shim below the

bearing seating area.
After that cross check the gap

between the gauge and the new
pinion. It should be the same as the
Z mark punched. In this case 5 thou
( tolerance ± 1 thou)
In case the Z value is –ve then the
gap has to be checked between the
bore & MST 582.
This will ensure that the tooth contact of the Crown wheel and
pinion is accurate
However this shim also affects the distance between the two pinion
bearings and thus will affect the pinion bearing preload.
Suppose 10 thou of shims were the

thickness originally present (at the
height adjusting end and the new
value is 12 thou.)
Hence to maintain the pinion

bearing preload equal amount of
shims at the outer bearing end will

Page 17 of 30
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
have to be adjusted
Since the shim thickness at the inner
bearing has increased by 2 thou
hence add 2 thou of shims from the
other end.
If the pinion preload is not as per

the specifications after assembly
then add or remove shims from the
outer bearing end.
Please note that if the shims are

removed or added at the outer end
for adjusting the preload then do
not add or remove shims at the
height adjusting end- that will
disturb the contact.
Before inserting the companion

flange at the end- apply Loctite 638
in the splines so that the loosening
can be avoided.
4 b) Only if the crown wheel & pinion are being replaced – no wear
on seating surfaces is present
If the pinion bearings are having

pitting, flaking or spalling of the
raceway then they have to be
replaced.
Remove the outer race using the MST
( For Fitting use MST 200)

Page 18 of 30
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
If the crown wheels bearings are
having pitting, flaking or spalling of
the raceway then they have to be
replaced.
For removal of the bearing use MST

202
( For fitting the crown wheels side
bearing use the MST
Note the Z value etched on top of the

old pinion ( O) and the Z value etched
on the top of the new pinion ( N)
The correct shim thickness = O-N (

Old-New)
If the value is + then shims have to be

added and if – then shims have to be
removed. These shims are between
the pinion inner bearing outer race &
the housing.
This will ensure that the tooth contact

of the Crown wheel and pinion is
accurate
However this shim also affects the

distance between the two pinion
bearings and thus will affect the
pinion bearing preload.
Suppose 2 thou of shims are adjusted.

E.g + 2 added
Then to maintain the pinion bearing

preload equal amount of shims at the
outer bearing end will have to be
adjusted

Page 19 of 30
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Since the shim thickness at the inner
bearing has increased by 2 thou hence
add 2 thou of shims at the other
bearing
If the pinion preload is not as per the

specifications after assembly then add
or remove shims from the outer
bearing end.
Please note that if the shims are

removed or added at the outer end
for adjusting the preload then do not
add or remove shims at the height
adjusting end- that will disturb the
contact.
Adjustments of the crown preload & tooth backlash
Install the crown, in the carrier.

Instead of using the bearings use MST
583, - one on each side.
The advantage of using the MST

instead of bearings while setting is
that as the outer race does not keep
getting tilted hence we get accurate
reading further the bearings do not
get damaged when they are removed
after checking the values of shims
required.
Push the crown assembly towards the

pinion so that the backlash is zero.

Page 20 of 30
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
In this position find the shim pack
which has to be inserted on right
(Back of crown) side. And also on the
teeth side.
Move shims from teeth side to back of

the crown side so that the backlash is
achieved.
Add an additional 0.075mm (0.003”)-

of shim on the both the side so that
the crown teeth get preloaded.
Take out the assembly, keep the

selected shim packs correctly.
Remove the MST 583.
Insert the bearing assembly along with

the selected shim pack.
Use MST 205 to spread the carrier.
While using the spreader ensure that

the expansion is not more than 0.5
mm. If more it can cause permanent
deformation of the carrier.
While assembling the caps ensure that

the markings match.
Torque- 9.6 to 12.5 Mkg ( 70 to 90

Lbft)

Page 21 of 30
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Check the backlash, if less or more

then the shims should be moved from
one side to the other.
Note: Approximately 5 thou shim is

equal to 3 thou of backlash.
Check the backlash.
0.13 to 0.25 mm ( 0.005”-0.010”)
Check the runout in four places it

should be less than 0.15 mm ( 0.006”)
Toe Heel After the backlash has been achieved,

check the tooth contact on both the
drive and the reverse side.
Note since the crown wheel is without

load hence the contact should not be
6 mm aprox
exactly at center but as shown in the
sketch.

Page 22 of 30
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Specifications –

Semi floating single reduction without diff. lock
43
10
No of teeth on
crown N1 4.3
No of teeth on
pinion N2
Axle reduction ratio
N1/N2
Pinion Pre load 23 to 45 Kgcm
Preloading of 0.075 mm ( 0.003”

differential bearings
Crown-pinion (0.005 to 0.008”

backlash
Maximum variation (0.003”)

of backlash in a
crown

Page 23 of 30
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Run out of the ring 0.15 mm ( 0.006”)
gear / crown wheel

Hub end play Max 0.3 mm ( 0.0012”)
Hub rotational Not applicable

torque
Toe Check for correct Check on both the driving

Heel tooth contact on & reverse flank. This
both the forward contact is for checking
and reverse without load.
direction
6 mm aprox
Clearance between 0.20 mm (0.008”)

and side( sun) gears
and diff case
Rotational torque of 5 Kg cm
differential case
with sun & pinion
gears
Inner race 0.125 mm (0.005 to

interference 0.007”)
Outer race clearance

Page 24 of 30
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Oil grade/ Viscosity/ GL 5/ SAE 90/ 1.65 liters
Quantity
Location Torque in Nm ( Lbft)

Brake carrier mounting bolts 33.8 to 47.45 (25 to 35 LB FT)
Pinion nut 217 to 244 (160 to 180 LB FT )
Crown mounting nuts 54 to 68 (40 to 50 Lb Ft)
Differential side bearing bolts 95 to 122 (70 to 90 LB FT)
Differential disc cover bolts 16 to 20(12 to 15 LB FT )

Page 25 of 30
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Special Tools --

Puller rear axle shaft
MST 576
Sliding Hammer
MST 577
Ring Rear axle collar support.

MST 578

Page 26 of 30
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector

Tube-Rear axle collar pressing
MST 579
Installer Inner Oil seal Rear axle

tube MST 580

Page 27 of 30
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Rear axle Pinion Height setting
Gauge (1) MST 581

Rear axle Pinion Height setting
Gauge (2) MST 582
Differential side bearing setting

gage MST 583

Page 28 of 30
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Recommended Lubricants –
Specification: GL 5; SAE 90
Brands
Maximile : Maximile DO
Recommended
Other options
IOC SERVOGEAR HP 90
HP HP GEAR OIL XP 90
BPCL - BHARAT SPIROL HD 90
BHARAT SHELL - SPIRAX HD 90
CHEMOLEUMS - CHEMOLEUMS TURBO GL5 SAE 90
GULF MP GO 90
CALTEX THUBAN GL5-90
VEEDOL VEEDOL MULTI GEAR 90 HD
CASTROL - CASTROL HYPOY B 90
Sealant –
Differential cover sealant : Loctite 587 / Gasket

Page 29 of 30
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector

Page 30 of 30
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Front Suspension
Contents
Description
Trouble Shooting
Care of the system
In Car repairs
Working principle, Dismantling, Assembly of the Front Suspension

2WD
Working principle, Dismantling & Assembly of the Front Suspension

4WD
Specification & Wear Data
Lubricants
Tightening Torques
List of the MSTs
Mahindra & Mahindra Ltd Scorpio VLX Front suspension

Confidential- For Internal Circulation Only Nov .07
Page 1 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Description
The front suspension is independent while rear is multilink type. The

front suspension in the 2WD vehicle is wishbone type with helical spring
and telescopically acting hydraulic dampener. In the 4WD vehicles, the
suspension is torsion bar type with hydraulic dampener.
Anti roll bar
The front also employs anti roll bar with ball joints on the connecting
links as shown in the sketch to transfer the loads to the outer wheel
during turns.
Trouble Shooting
A squeak noise from the shock absorber can be produced if movement

between the rubber bushing and metal occurs. Tightening the attaching
parts can usually stop this noise. If the squeak noise persist then
inspect for worn or damaged bushings and attaching components.
Repair as necessary if any thing found amiss.
Squeak also happen due to relative movement from suspension arm’s

bush inner sleeve (serration end) and chassis bracket. This situation
happens, if torque is not as per specs. Torque tightening the LCA & UCA
bolts normally resolves the issue.
The shock absorber bushings do not require any kind of lubrication. Do

not lubricate the bushings to reduce bushing noise. Grease or mineral
oil base lubricants will deteriorate the bushing.

Page 2 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
The shock absorbers are not refillable or adjustable. If a malfunction

occurs, the shock absorber must be replaced. To test a shock absorber
hold it upright in fully extended position for 10 minutes. Then force the
piston in and out of the cylinder four or five times. The action
throughout each stroke should be smooth and even.
9 Check and adjust:

9 Hub end play
9 Camber to be
checked and
adjusted.
One Edge Wear Excessive camber
9 Check & correct Toe

In
9 Check the chassis
bend
9 If tyre rotation not
carried out as per
Feathered Edge Incorrect Toe In schedule. Do the tyre
Wear rotation.
Excessive Vehicle 1. Body Mounts 9 Tighten the body

rolling loose. mounts.
2. Suspension 9 Tighten the
mounting loose. suspension mounts.
3. Broken or 9 If broken stabilizer
deteriorated bar- replace
stabilizer

Page 3 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
4. Worn stabilizer 9 Replace the bushes &
bush tighten to the
specified torque,
5. Malfunctioning 9 Replace the shock
shock absorber absorber.
6. Stabiliser link bolt 9 Tighten the link bolts
loose
Vehicle inclined Broken or 9 Replace the coil
deteriorated coil spring
spring
Noise 1. Parts worn or 9 Tighten the parts or
loose replace
2. Broken coil spring 9 Replace the coil
3. Malfunctioning spring
shock absorber
9 Replace the shock
absorber
Caution: Do not lubricate the suspension bushes/joints.
Care of the system
9 The first wheel alignment should be carried out at 5000 kms then at
10,000 Kms. Subsequently every 10,000 kilometres.
9 Torque tighten the LCA & UCA bolts to the required torque. (Upper
arm 110-130 Nm , LCA front 150-180 Nm; LCA rear 110-130 Nm)
9 First at 5000 Kms then subsequently every 10,000 Kms.
9 Check the shock absorber for leaks every 10,000 Kms.
9 Check the rubber bushes for the mounting of the shock absorber,
stabilizer bar and links every 20,000 Kms or once in a year
In Car repairs
a) Wheel alignment
b) Wheel hub greasing

Page 4 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
a) Wheel alignment
The sequence of the wheel alignment, which should be followed, is:

Carry out the runout compensation when using the computerized
equipment
1. Steering Wheel Centralize- cross check & adjust.

2. Castor checking & adjustment ( Computerized / Manual)
3. Camber checking & adjustment( Computerized / Manual)
4. Toe in checking & adjustment. ( Computerized / Manual)
5. Wheel Turning Angle, checking and adjustment. ( Computerized /
Manual)
6. Check the centralization of the Steering wheel as the final operation
Caution: In order to obtain the correct values and avoid complaints.

Please note that that the following parameters have to be adhered
to without fail:
♦ The tyre pressures in all the four wheels are as per the
specifications.
♦ Vehicle should be unladen and parked on level surface
♦ Ensure that the wheel hub play is correct.
♦ Check that the chassis and the under body are not coated with
mud. If in doubt get the vehicle cleaned before doing the
checking.
♦ Check the ride height variation as per the specification.
♦ Replace the parts of suspension if found badly damaged
♦ Before starting the measurement, ensure that the parking brakes
are applied and the rear wheels are blocked
♦ Before doing the wheel alignment – ensure that the linkages i.e.
the ball joint are not worn or loose. Check the free play in the
steering.
♦ All the tyres and the wheel disc should be of the same type.
Caution: This procedure for centralizing the Steering wheel is valid

only if the misalignment of the spokes is less than 10 degrees. In
other words this procedure is only for fine-tuning the steering
wheel position not for glaring error. If it is more 10 degrees then
remove the steering wheel and initially realign to less than 10
degrees.

Page 5 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Steering Wheel Centralization
To check for the centralization of the

steering wheel. Drive the vehicle on a
level road surface; note the angular
position (misalignment of the steering
wheel spokes.
Raise the vehicle. Keep the wheels in

Straight Ahead Position.
Mark the position of the track rods

and the track rod ends.
Slacken the track rod end lock nuts

and also remove the gaiter outer
retaining clips.
Rotate both track rods in the same

direction approximately 30 degrees
for every 1-degree of steering
misalignment error.
Clock
wise Anti clock
error wise error
If the steering wheel has an anti

clockwise angular error then both
track rods must be rotated clockwise-
when viewed from the left – hand side
of the vehicle.
Clock
wise Anti clock
error wise error
If the steering wheel has an clockwise

angular error then both track rods
must be rotated anticlockwise- when

Page 6 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
viewed from the left – hand side of
the vehicle
With the computerized wheel alignment gauges the checking procedure

may vary slightly. However the sequence of checking and the
adjustment procedure remains the same. The most common error made
while doing the wheel alignment using the computerized equipment is
that the wheel run out compensation procedure is not carried. That is
one of the reasons of poor repeatability
The computerized wheel alignment machines, which have been

approved by M&M, are of Precision or Manatec make. It is mandatory
that the wheel alignment machine be calibrated at regular interval
specified by the individual Manufacturer.
Wheel alignment using computerised gauge (Photos are with

Manatec )
Start the computerised

alignment machine. Move the
cursor to the alignment name
and press enter.
Enter the details of the details

as displayed on the screen, the
vehicle code can be selected
from the list by pressing the F3
button on the key board. For
moving to the other details
press “enter” or “tab”. Press
“F5” when all the details are

Page 7 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
entered.
State the tyre and the bearing
condition. The condition can be
selected by moving the up or
down arrow keys. For selecting
particular condition press enter.
For going to the next tyre
condition press “tab” key. When
the conditions are selected
press “F5” key
From the alignment menu select
two wheel Alignment, since our
vehicle have fixed alignment at
the rear.
Fix the sensors on the rear as

well as front wheels.
Caution:
While fitting the sensors ensure
that the clamps are properly
tightened.
The right sensors are in place,
sensors are marked with right
and left side.

Page 8 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Ensure that the bubble in the
spirit level of the rear sensor is
set in the center of the marking
made on it.
Jack up the front wheels.
Loosen the knob on the sensor.
For the runout press the runout

key on the sensor as shown in
the figure.
Move the tyre in the direction

as shown on the screen by
holding the sensor, after
completing half rotation press
the run out key on the sensor
complete the remaining
rotation.
Caution : Move the tyre slowly

and smoothly.

Page 9 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
The front wheel run out will be
displayed, press “enter” key to
continue.
Remove the lock-pins of the

turning table
For achieving the straight ahead

position move the steering
wheel slowly to the directions
as displayed on the screen first
to the right and the to the left.
Hold for some time at the end,
for the computer to acquire
data. Hold for some time at the
centre position. Fix the steering
lock at that position. Press
“enter” key to continue.
Press “enter” key to continue.

The values of Castor, camber,
and toe will appear.

Page 10 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
The castor & the camber are
adjusted by addition or removal
of
The Toe is changing the track

rod end distance. When done
press “enter” key.
The sequence of adjustment

which have to be carried is
Castor
Camber
Toe in adjustment
For adjusting the Castor
The values should be within
2.75 °±1.00 (2°45’± 1.0°)
The difference between the two
wheels should be within ±45'
The adjusting shims are
available in 1.6, 0.4-mm
thickness.
Addition of shims in front

between the fulcrum lever and
the chassis bracket will
reduce the castor.
Addition of shims in rear

increase the castor
0.4 mm = 9’(0.15°)
1.6 mm = 37’(0.62°)
Loosen the lower arm mounting
bolts ,and the upper arm side
nuts so that the lower arm
movement is free
Remove the front apron cover.

Page 11 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Compress the spring by moving
the lower arm, using a jack
Loosen the fulcrum mounting
bolts
Add or remove shims as
required
Tighten the fulcrum mounting
bolts to 12.0 to 14.0 Mkg (87 lb.
ft- 101 lb. ft). Also refer to the
Torque chart.
After that decompress the
spring.
Tighten the lower arm mounting
bolts. And the upper arm side
nuts. As per the Torque chart
Before tightening shake the

vehicle by compressing the
front and rear of the vehicle
alternatively by hand.
For adjusting the Camber
The value for any given wheel
should be 0°14' ± 0°30' and
the maximum difference
between the two wheels should
be ± 30'
The shims are available in

thickness of 3.2, 1.6, 0.8 mm.
Addition of shim between the

fulcrum and the chassis
bracket will decrease the
camber.
0.8mm =0.15 °( 9’)

1.6 mm = 0.32 °(19’)
3.2 mm = 0.62°(37’)
To increase the camber –
remove the shims

Page 12 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
bolts, and the upper arm side
nuts. so that the lower arm
movement is free
Take out the apron cover
behind the wheel by carefully
removing the plastic fasteners
the lower arm, using a jack.
bolts
required

ft- 101 lb. ft). Refer to the
torque chart
spring.
nuts.
Cross-confirm the camber value.
For adjusting the Toe In
Adjust by moving the tie rod.
The tie rods should be adjusted
equally on both sides. The

Page 13 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
variation between left and right
side of the tie rods should be
maximum one turn. (If it is
more than the centralization of
the steering wheel will also be
affected.)
Adjusting the Wheel tuning angle

Bring the Wheels in Straight
Ahead Position (SAP). At this
position confirm that the
turntables Zero are also showing
Zero
Turn the steering wheel to Right
Hand Side so that the wheel
turns through 36±0.5° (Please
refer the specifications)
Check the condition of the
stopper bolt of LH side It should
touch the bracket on the lower
arm assy.
If it is not touching or the wheel
is not able to turn through
36±0.5° then loosen the lock
nut adjust the bolt and then
lock the bolt with locknut.
Turn the steering now towards
the Left-hand side and then
adjust the stopper on the right
hand side.

Page 14 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
For print out press “F10” key to

save press “ctrl” and the
“home” key together.
Take print out of the final sheet

as displayed in the figure in
which all details will be
available.
To exit press ctrl and home.

The data will be stored in the
computer and can be retrieved
as and when required.
Even if the manual gauge is used please ensure that it is having high
accuracy and also repeatability.
Castor checking (With the bubble type gauge)

Page 15 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Confirm that the bubble is set

at Zero and also that the
turntable is also set to zero.
Remove the turn tables locking

pin
Rotate the steering so that the
wheel turns inwards by 20
degrees.
Set the castor scale to zero
Turn the steering wheel in
opposite direction so that it
turns outwards by 20 degrees
The value in the castor scale
gives the castor value.
The values should be within
2.75 °±1.00 (2°45’± 1.0°)
Repeat on the other side
The difference between the two
wheels should be within ±45'
The adjusting shims are
available in 1.6, 0.4-mm
thickness.
Addition of shims in front

reduce the castor
Addition of shims in rear

increase the castor

Page 16 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
0.4 mm = 9’(0.15°)
1.6 mm = 37’(0.62°)
bolts ,and the upper arm side
nuts so that the lower arm
movement is free
Remove the front apron cover.


bolts.

required.

ft- 101 lb. ft). Also refer to the
Torque chart.

spring.

nuts. As per the Torque chart

Cross-confirm the castor value.

Page 17 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Camber checking (With the bubble type gauge)
Keep the front wheel in

straight-ahead condition. ( SAP)
Clean the hub assembly for any

dirt or mud. Remove the front
wheel hubcap.
Install the magnetic base of the

gauge in such a way that the
centre pin of the gauge aligns
with stub axle centre drill and
gauge is sitting squarely on the
hub.
By turning the gauge bring the

spirit level to read " ZERO ".
The value in the camber scale

at this point is the Camber
reading. Note the reading
Repeat the same procedure on
the other wheel.
The value for any given wheel
should be 0°14' ± 0°30' and
the maximum difference
between the two wheels should
be ± 30'.
The shims are available in

thickness of 3.2, 1.6, 0.8 mm
Addition of shim between the

fulcrum and the chassis
bracket will decrease the
camber.
0.8mm =0.15 °( 9’)


Page 18 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
1.6 mm = 0.32 °(19’)
3.2 mm = 0.62°(37’)
To increase the camber –
remove the shims

bolts and the upper arm side
nuts. so that the lower arm
movement is free
Take out the apron cover

behind the wheel by carefully
removing the plastic fasteners

bolts

required

Page 19 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
ft- 101 lb. ft). Refer to the
torque chart

spring.
nuts.

Cross-confirm the camber value.
Replace the apron and the hub
cover.
Caution: Ensure that while the hubcap is being fitted back the
Anabond RTV sealant 673 has been applied. The sealant should be
applied in the mounting face as well as the inner dia.
Do not fill grease in cavity.
Failure to do so will result in premature wheel bearing failure and

tyre wear.
Toe in checking. (With manual gauge)
Mark the center of the tyre

treads. Do it for both the tyres
Adjust the height of the pointer
so that it touches the marked

Page 20 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
line in line with the centre of
the axle spindle/ hubcap.
Place the gauge in front of the
vehicle so that the pins touch
the centre of either the treads/
or the inner edge of the wheel
disc at the flat-machined area.
Note the value in the scale
Take the gauge to the back of
the wheel and take
measurement at 180 degrees
backward
Note the value in the scale
The difference in the value
gives the toe in.
The total difference should be

between 1 to 3 mm. (0.15° to
0.45°).
Adjust by moving the tie rod.
The tie rods should be adjusted
equally on both sides. with only
max. The variation between left
and right side of the tie rods
should be maximum one turn.
(If it is more than the
centralization of the steering
wheel will also be affected.)
Wheel Turning Angle (With manual gauge)

Page 21 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Bring the Wheels in Straight
Ahead Position (SAP). At this
position confirm that the
turntables Zero are also showing
Zero
Turn the steering wheel to Right

Hand Side so that the wheel
turns through -( Please refer the
specifications
Check the condition of the
stopper bolt of LH side It should
touch the bracket on the lower
arm assy.
If it is not touching or the wheel

is not able to turn through
36±0.5° then loosen the lock
nut adjust the bolt and then
lock the bolt with locknut.
Turn the steering now towards
the Left-hand side and then
adjust the stopper on the right
hand side.
Check the Steering Wheel Centralization

One of the most common complaints / perceptions is that after the
Wheel Alignment the Steering wheel is not centralized. Though strictly
speaking it does not constitute wheel alignment but if the steering
wheel is centralized then a lot of customer dissatisfaction will be
avoided.

other words this procedure is only for fine-tuning the steering
wheel position not for glaring error. If it is more 10 degrees then
remove the steering wheel and initially realign to less than 10
degrees.

Page 22 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Adjust the Steering wheel centralization
Cross check the Wheel Toe In after

this operation, before releasing the
vehicle.
b) Wheel hub greasing –
Dismantling –
• Jack up the vehicle & remove the wheel.
• Remove the caliper assembly without disconnecting the brake
hose.
Caution: Ensure that the brake hoses are not stretched/
damaged. Put the caliper without straining the brake hose.
1. Remove the hub cover using a screwdriver.


Page 23 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
2. Using the MST 571, remove the outer locknut.
3. Take out the lock washer and the inner nut.
4. Pull out the hub along with the bearings.
5. Remove the Oil Seal.
Inspection –
• Inspect the rollers and the inner races of the bearings for
Scoring, pitting/ brinelling or spalling.
• If any damage is noticed – inspect the outer races also.
• To remove & refit the outer races, use MST.
• If the outer race / cup is found to be loose in the housing
then it is advisable to replace the hub. Trying to recondition
the hub bore is not recommended.
• If the bearing seating area or the oil seal seating area in the
spindle is worn then replace the spindle.
Assembly –
• Apply the MAXIMILE LCG3 grease on the bearings.

1. Locate the inner bearing cone in the hub.
2. Press the new oil seal using the MST 574.
Note: The lip of the oil seal should be coated with grease. Also fill
grease in the cavity where the oil seal spring is present.
3. Press the hub assembly on the spindle & fill the grease.
4. Locate the inner cone of the outer bearing.
5. Tighten the inner nut. and back off by 90 degrees .The hub play
should be within 0.010 to 0.030 mm.
Ensure that the hub assembly is being rotated while the inner
nut is being tightened. This is essential to ensure that the roller
centralize themselves and also so that they abut properly.
6. Put the locking washer & tighten the outer nut.
7. Apply Anabond RTV 673 sealant & Press the hub cover using the
MST 575.

Page 24 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Working principle, Dismantling & Assembly of the Front Suspension
2WD
The front Wheel suspension in the 2 WD vehicles is wishbone type with
helical spring and telescopically acting hydraulic dampener. Both the
lower and upper arm employ two point mounting.
An anti roll bar is used to transfer the loads to the outer wheel during
turns. The telescopic shock absorbers are used to dampen the wheel
oscillations and ensure proper wheel contact irrespective of the road
condition.
Points to be ensured while fitting any new bushes in the suspension
–
The bolts should be fully tightened only when the wheels are in ground.
When the bolts are tightened with any particular wheel jacked up then
it causes preloading of the rubber bush in the normal operating zone
and thus reducing its life.
Caution: Do not lubricate the suspension

bushes/joints.
For fitting & removing bush use soap solution only.
Jack the vehicle- locate the jack
Behind the lower arm just below

the first outrigger
Remove the tyre .

Page 25 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Remove the calliper assembly

without disconnecting the brake
tube.
Caution: Ensure that the brake

tubes are not stretched/
damaged. Put the calliper
without straining the brake tube.
Remove the Shock Absorber.
In case only the Upper arm

bushes have to be replaced-
remove the arm.

Page 26 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Loosen the special tools so that

the spring is slowly
decompressed.
Remove the coil spring and the

tool gradually
Remove the lower Ball joint
using the Special tool after
removing the split pin and the
castle nut.
Remove the pin fulcrum bolt on
chassis & remove the upper arm.
Remove the Lower control arms

front and rear nut and remove
the LCA.

Page 27 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Note
While assembling back ensure
that
1. The smaller dia of the coil
spring is on top i.e. the taper
of the spring is upwards.
2. Both the spring should have
same spring rating ( 1 dot or 2
dot)
3. The rubber pad at the top has
to be replaced if found
cracked or ruptured.
For removing the upper and

lower arm bushes use the Special
tool MST 564 & 565
Note:
While fitting new bushes use
soap solution so that the bush
can pressed easily.
Caution: Use of any lubricant

will result in degradation of the
rubber bush and lower life.
Pressing without soap solution
will damage the bush

Page 28 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
During refitting use the dolly.
Caution:
In the lower arm while pressing

the rib in the arm has to match
groove in the tool
Fit the shim in between the
chassis and the Upper Control
Arm.
Tighten fully the fulcrum bolts.
Note: Do not fully tighten the

nuts in the end of fulcrum pin at
the bush end.
While aligning the lower arm

ensure that both the pivot are
inserted at the same time. If it is
inserted one at a time then
inserting may damage the bushes
besides making the assembly
difficult.
While tightening the lower arm
bolts either the wheels should
be on ground or roughly the
lower arm should be parallel to
the ground & cross member

Page 29 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
If it is tightened on any other
position then the rubber bushes
will get preloaded.
While fitting the shock absorber
ensure that after torque
tightening the standout is
approximately 7 mm. (If the
standout is more then it
indicates over tightening or bad
rubber washers). Refer to the
torque check list
Fully tighten the upper arm bolts

after the wheel is in ground.
Working principle, Dismantling, Assembly of the Front Suspension

4WD
The front Wheel suspension in the 4 WD vehicles is wishbone type with
torsion bar springs and telescopically acting hydraulic dampener. Both
the lower and upper arm employs two point mounting.
The torsion bar is connected to the Lower control Arms rear end
through a Torque control Arm. The rear end of the torsion bar is
connected to a ride control arm. A ride control height-adjusting nut
links the control arm to chassis.
An anti roll bar is used to transfer the loads to the outer wheel during
turns. The telescopic shock absorbers are used to dampen the wheel
oscillations and ensure proper wheel contact irrespective of the road
condition.
Caution:
The Torsion bars are pre-twisted. LH marking identifies the Left

Hand side and RH marking identifies the Right Hand torsion bar. The
arrow should be facing front.

Page 30 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
While jacking up the vehicle (for doing ride height adjustment)
ensure that the jack or the two post lift points are not touching the
torsion bar.
The dismantling sequence is reverse of the assembly procedure

explained below –
Jack the wheels, ensure that

the anti roll bar link has been
disconnected.
Insert Lower Control Arm on

frame
Insert The torsion bar rear end

in Height Control Arm serration
Put the height control arm

assembly on chassis bracket.
It is advisable to keep all the

bolts of the LCA & UCA loose

Page 31 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
while doing assembly, as it will
ease the assembly operations.
Also if the bolts are tightened in
this position then the bushes
will get preloaded. Further
while trying to adjust the ride
height the effort required to
turn the ride height bolt will be
high and cause damage to the
face.
Insert the bolt of height control
Arm and flush the thread end to
Height control nut.
Give a slight twist to the torsion
bar by hand so that the rocker
maintains a horizontal position/
touching the bottom of the
bracket.
Holding the torsion bar by hand

and insert/slide in the Torsion
bar into the Lower Control
arm’s Torque Arm.
Tighten the Torque Arms 3 bolts

(2 bolts onto the weld nuts and
1 free bolt +flanged nut)
It is essential to tighten the

torque arms bolts first.
In case it is not done so and the

ride height is adjusted. Then
the adjustment will not be
achieved, and also the twist of
the torsion bar by tightening

Page 32 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
will not result in proportionate
lift/height of the LCA.
Also the 3 bolts will not seat

properly on the torque arm and
may damage the threads of the
3 bolts.
In other words the torque arm
bolts ensure that the torsion bar
becomes integral to the LCA
through the Torque arm
Tighten the height control bolts

by 24 to 26 Turns
Lower the Jack so that the

wheels are touching the ground.
Gently shake the Vehicle 5/6
times .
Tighten the Lower control Arms
and the Upper Control Arm’s
both the front and rear bolts to
the specified Torque.
Measure the ride height. (Lower
control Arms front bolt head
centre to ground.)
Note: Ensure that the
measurement is done on level
ground with specified tyre
pressure on all four wheels.
(Front 2.0 bar and Rear 2.2
bar).
If variation is more than +/-7.0

mm then tighten or reduce the

Page 33 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
height by turning the height
adjusting nut.
It is suggested that for turning
the nut it is advisable to jack
the vehicle.
Take the measurement again
after a ride.
If the ride height varies from
the specifications then readjust
after loosening the UCA & LCA
bolts and jacking both the
wheels only
1 turn of the bolt affects the

ride height by 6 to 7 mm.
Hence if the ride height is less

by say 3 mm then turn the ride
height bolt by half a turn
The assembly procedure for fitting the bushes onto the LCA & UCA is
the same as mentioned in the 2WD. There is no change in setting the
Wheel alignment procedure also.

Page 34 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Specifications –
Description Specification
Type Independent, double wish bone with
telescopic shock absorbers
Front Shock absorbers- 2WD
Maximum length: 335±3.
Minimum length: 222+3.
Shock Absorber Stand out – 23 mm
Front Shock absorbers- 4WD

Maximum length: 378±3.
Minimum length: 244+3.
Shock Absorber Stand out – 23 mm
Coil Spring Approx. Free ht: 309mm

Solid ht. : 152.6.
Total coils: 8.34 Approx.

Page 35 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Coil spring Load Identification 1 yellow Dot
2 yellow Dots
Camber 0.23 °±0.5 (0°14’ ± 0°30’)
Difference between LH & RH ±0.5° (±30’)

Camber
Castor 2.75 °± 1.0 (2°45’± 1.0°)
Difference between LH & RH ±0.75 ° ( ± 45’)

castor

Page 36 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Total Toe in 1 to 3 mm.
Total Toe in ( in degrees) 0.15 to 0.45 ° (9’ to 27’)
Shock absorber stand out 23 mm

Individual Toe in 0 to 20 minute
King pin Inclination 10.75° ± 1° (10°45’± 1°)
Wheel Turning Angle 36°- 2WD
4WD
35°-Inner Wheel angle

32°-Outer Wheel angle
Ride height Variation Between 15 mm

LH & RH. ( Up to LCA front
pivot bolt)

Page 37 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Lubricants –
No lubricants / grease to be used in the suspension bushes. Only soap

solution to be used during assembly
Anabond RTV 673 is used for the hubcap.
Location Torque Nm ( lbf-ft)

Upper Arm side bushes 120 ± 10 Nm (88 ± 8 lbf-ft)
Upper Arm Ball joint 26 ± 3 Nm (19 ± 2 lbf-ft)
mounting nut
Upper Arm pin fulcrum 130 ± 10Nm (96 ± 8 Lbft)
mounting nut
Lower Control Arm Front 165 ± 15 Nm (122 ± 11 Lbft)
Mounting
Lower control Arm Rear 120 ± 10 Nm (88 ± 8 Lbft)
mounting
Torque Arm
M12x1.25 with spring washer 70 ±10 Nm (51± 8 Lbft)
& weld nut
Torque Arm 50 ±10 Nm ( 37 ± 7 Lbft)
M10x1.25
LCA ball joint mounting nut 70 ±10 Nm (52 ± 8 Lbft)
LCA bump stop mounting 50 ±10 Nm ( 37 ± 7 Lbft)
Stabilizer bar on Frame 37.5 ±7.5 Nm (28 ± 6 Lbft)
Stabilizer bar + Link 45 ± 5 Nm (52 ± 8 Lbft)
Link on Lower Arm 19 ±3 Nm (14 ± 2 Lbft)
Shock absorber Top- on 19 ±3 Nm (14 ± 2 Lbft)
frame
Shock absorber Bottom on 19 ±3 Nm (14 ± 2 Lbft)
LCA
Shock absorber Bottom on 70 ±10 Nm (52 ± 8 Lbft)
LCA ( 4WD)
Steering stopper on knuckle 57 ± 7.5 Nm (46 ± 9 Lbft)
Castle Nut UCA 140 ± 20 Nm (103 ± 15 Lbft)
Castle Nut LCA 140 ± 20 Nm (103 ± 15 Lbft)
Frame- Rebound stopper 50 ± 10Nm ( 37 ± 7Lbft)

Page 38 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
List of the MST’s –

MST-561
Upper Arm Ball Joint Puller
MST-562
Lower Arm Ball Joint Puller
MST–563
Fulcrum Mounting Bolt Spanner

Page 39 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
MST-564
Fixture Upper/ Lower Arm Bush
MST-565
Extractor/Installer Arm
Suspension Bush
MST-571
Special Socket for hub nut

Page 40 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
MST-572
Installer Front Wheel Bearing
Cone-Outer
MST-573
Installer Front Wheel Bearing
Cone-Inner
MST-574
Installer Front wheel Hub oil
seal
MST-575
Installer Front Hub Grease Cup

Page 41 of 41
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Multilink Rear Suspension
Contents
Description
Trouble Shooting
Shock Absorbers
Coil Spring Replacement
Bush Replacement
Specifications
Tightening Torques
Mahindra & Mahindra Ltd Scorpio VLX Rear Suspension

Page 1 of 15
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Description
The rear suspension is with coil spring and five links. This type of rear
suspension provides more comfort & better handling characteristics of
the vehicle.
The suspension encompasses Upper Links, lower links, Panhard Rod. Coil
springs & Shock Absorbers.
The upper & lower links are tubular with rubber bushes press fitted on
both ends. The lower links are taking the loads due to acceleration &
braking. The upper links mainly are used to guide and to some extent
share the lateral loads. One end of the links is connected to the chassis
while the other end is at axle.
The Panhard rod is connected between the axle & the chassis .It takes
all the transverse loads experienced during cornering controlling the
axle movement in lateral direction.
The anti roll bars are used to transfer the loads to the outer wheel
during turns.
The coil springs absorb the road shocks due to terrain & different load
conditions. The shock absorbers dampen the oscillations of the vehicle.
The rubber bumper fitted on the chassis reduce the impact loads into
the body.

Page 2 of 15
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
The bonded rubber silent blocks / bushings are press fitted & does not
require lubrication with oil. (Also should never be lubricated). While
jacking up the vehicle the jack should always be put below the axle
only. Under any circumstances the vehicle should not be jacked up
putting the jack below any of the link including Panhard rod.
Caution:
While lifting the vehicle, if the resting pads are pressing
Against any of the lower links, then there is a strong possibility
that The lower links will get bent.
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTION

Vehicle tending Permanent distortion or Replace.
to be lower on breakage of coil spring
one side & poor
ride.
Poor ride Stabilizer link rod loose Tighten. If required add
( excessive washer between nut &
pitching or roll) link.
Unsmooth operation of Replace.

shock absorber
Installation of wrong Replace with proper
shock absorber parts.
Installation of wrong coil Replace with proper parts
spring
Bouncy ride Breakage of coil spring Replace.
Over inflation pressure Adjust.

of tyre
Adjust or replace the coil
Unsuitable installation springs with new ones.
(maximum and/or
minimum length) of Replace with proper
shock absorber parts.

Page 3 of 15
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Deformation or damage Replace
of bushing
Oil leakage of shock Replace

absorber
Bouncy ride/ Fault in operation of Replace.
pitching/ roll. shock absorber
Damage or deformation Replace.

of shock absorber mount
Deformation or damage Replace.

of shock absorber
Anti roll bar link loose Retighten.
Noise Wear or damage of shock Replace

absorber component
parts
Loosening of suspension Retighten to the specified

link installing bolt torque.
Deformation or loss of Replace.

bushing
Unsuitability of Replace with proper

maximum and/or parts.
minimum length of shock
absorber
Breakage of coil spring Replace
Wear or damage of ball Replace

joint.
Deformation of stabilizer Retighten to the specified

clamp. torque
Retighten to the specified
Link nut loose torque

Page 4 of 15
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
In Car Repairs –
Note: Unless otherwise specified the assembly procedures /

guidelines are the reverse of the disassembly procedure
1. Shock Absorber
2. Coil spring
Shock Absorber –
40 ± 10 Nm 1
(30 ± 7 lbf-ft)
2
40 ± 10 Nm
(30 ± 7 lbf-ft)
1. Remove the upper attaching nut, washer & bolt.
2. Remove the lower attaching nuts, washer from the axle.
3. Remove the shock absorber. ( Check Point A )

Page 5 of 15
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Coil Spring –
1. Remove the stabilizer bar.
2. Remove the coil springs. ( Check Point B )
3. Separate the rubber spring seat.
Suspension Overhaul / Bush Replacement –
Note: For dismantling the suspension; the vehicle should be placed on

level ground / four post lift. A Two-Post Lift can be used for
convenience only for loosening the fasteners if a Four-Post lift is not
available.
Tightening has to be done only on four post with the wheels touching the
Board.
Failure to do so can cause poor ride, floor vibrations, wheel wobbling
2
Mahindra & Mahindra Ltd Scorpio VLX 5 Rear Suspension

Page 6 of 15
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
90 ± 10 Nm
(66 ± 7 lbf-ft)
90 ± 10 Nm
(66 ± 7 lbf-ft)
1. Loosen & remove Panhard Rod by removing nuts, bolts & washers.
90 ± 10 Nm
(66 ± 7 lbf-ft)
90 ± 10 Nm
(66 ± 7 lbf-ft)
2

Page 7 of 15
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
2. Loosen & remove Lower link assembly.
90 ± 10 Nm
(66 ± 7 lbf-ft)
90 ± 10 Nm
(66 ± 7 lbf-ft)
3. Loosen & remove Upper link assembly.
4. Loosen & remove shock absorber.
40 ± 10 Nm
(30 ± 7 lbf-ft)

Page 8 of 15
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
5. Loosen & remove Stabilizer link nuts.
6. To remove & refit the link bushes. Use the MST in the mechanical
press. (Refer Check point C)
Ensure that the bushes are lubricated with soap solution only. Under no
circumstance use any mineral oil or grease; as they degrade the bushes.
Stabilizer Bar Link Replacement –
1. Loosen & remove the stabilizer link upper nut.
2. Loosen & remove the stabilizer bar link lower nut & remove the
stabilizer bar link assembly. (Check Point D)

Page 9 of 15
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Stabilizer Bar Bush Replacement –
2 2
Note: The vehicle should be parked on ground / Four Post Lift such that
all four wheels will be resting on the level surface.
1) Loosen & Remove stab link nuts & the stabilizer bar mounting bolts.
2) Remove the stabilizer bar from the vehicle.
3) Change the old bushes with new one.
Note:
While assembling ensure that the bushes are liberally lubricated with
Soap Water.

Page 10 of 15
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Caution:
Never use any mineral based oil / grease for the
lubrication of any of the suspension bush including the
link bushes / stabilizer bar / shock absorber bushes.
Check Points –
A)
The proper orientation of the

cup washers at the bottom end
of the shock absorbers should be
ensured.
B)
While fitting the coil spring back

;
The correct orientation should
be ensured.
If the coil spring is held

vertically; the flat end coil
should be facing upwards
(Towards the Chassis) & curved
towards the axle.

Page 11 of 15
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
C)
Ensure the fitment of proper

stablink assembly & proper
orientation on both sides.

Page 12 of 15
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
D)
Protecting sleeve
Special tool for removing

B Bush
Support Block.
For removing the bush from the

link following sequence should
be followed – ( Refer
Photograph)
1. Place link on the support

block as shown.
2. Insert the spigot in the centre
hole of the bush.
3. Place the protecting sleeve on
MST --- such that the spigot
will not get damaged because
of the mechanical press
screw.
4. Tighten the mechanical press
screw & remove the bush.
Note :
Use the side A of the tool while
pressing the lower or upper link
bushes.
The side B has to be used while
removing & installing the
transverse link/ Panhard rod
(The width of the bushes are
different)

Page 13 of 15
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Specifications –
Type Multi link with stabilizer Bar &

telescopic shock absorbers
Rear Shock absorbers Maximum length – 503 ± 3.0 mm
Minimum length – 314 ± 3.0 mm
Stroke – 189 mm
Dampening Force –
Expansion – 148 ± 21 mm
Contraction – 71 ± 13 mm
Coil spring Load Identification

1 yellow Dot / Line
2 yellow Dots/Line
Tyre Pressure in all for wheels 32 PSI / 2.2 Bar

Page 14 of 15
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Description Value
Panhard rod – Chassis end & 90 ± 10 Nm ( 66 ± 7 lbf-ft )
Axle end
Upper Link – Chassis end & 90 ± 10 Nm ( 66 ± 7 lbf-ft )
Axle end
Lower Link – Chassis end & 90 ± 10 Nm ( 66 ± 7 lbf-ft )
Axle end
Stabilizer link Nut 40 ± 10 Nm ( 30 ± 7 lbf-ft )
Stabilizer Bar Mounting Bolts 40 ± 10 Nm ( 30 ± 7 lbf-ft )
Shock Absorber Nut – Upper & 40 ± 10 Nm (30 ± 7 Lb-ft)
lower

Page 15 of 15
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
HVAC
Contents
Description
Trouble Shooting
Care of the system
In Car repairs
Control panel
Specification
Recommended Lubricants
Mahindra & Mahindra Ltd Scorpio VLX HVAC

Page 1 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Description --
The Heater, Ventilation and Air conditioning combines air conditioning,

heating and ventilating functions.
The system comprises of:
9 Blower & Air Inlet system

9 Heater core, and Air distribution assembly.
9 Air Conditioning system.

Page 2 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Heater system
The heater system is controlled by temperature mixing flap. The

temperature mixing flap controls the volume of hot air flow into the system.
Air conditioning System
The system uses non-CFC refrigerant R134a.
The refrigerant at low pressure and temperature enters the compressor

where it is compressed and its pressure and temperature increase. The
refrigerant after leaving compressor enters condenser and here it is
condensed into high-pressure liquid and is collected in receiver drier. From
the receiver drier it passes through expansion valve where it is throttled
down to a low temperature and pressure. After finding its way through
expansion valve it finally passes into evaporator coil where it extracts heat

Page 3 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
from surrounding. The refrigerant, which was in low-pressure liquid state,
converts to low-pressure vapour. The low-pressure vapour then again enters
the compressor.
Nylon
mesh
The incoming air (in fresh mode or recycle mode) passes through a particle
filter & then gets cooled and dehumidified by the evaporator. The
evaporator is in operation all the times unless the AC switch is kept in off
condition. To maintain minimum evaporator temperature a fixed
thermostat-setting switch controls the compressor clutch. This switch which
is called Anti freeze switch has a probe so that it touches the coldest part of
the evaporator is used to avoid formation of ice. (If ice formation is allowed
then the ice formed prevents exchange of heat thus reducing the cooling
and forcing the compressor to work continuously/ longer period leading to
low cooling as well as system failure.)
The evaporator always cools the incoming air (recirculated or fresh) to an

amount set by the fixed thermostat value. The cooled air gets into the
heater depending upon the secondary temperature mix flap , thus the final
air temperature is dependent on the amount of the air passing through the
heater
For example when the control panel thermostat is set to the coldest value
then no quantity of hot water goes through the heater and the final outcome

Page 4 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
is only the cold air. As the control panel’s knob is moved towards the hotter
the mixing start i.e. the quantity of hot water going through the heater
starts increasing proportionately.
It should be borne in mind that when the engine is cold the temperature of
incoming water is low, hence to get a desired temperature the knob will
have to be set any given position. However as the engine warms up the
water coming to the heater also gets warmer, thus the final out coming air
temperature will raise. As a result after the engine warms up the knob in
the panel will have to be readjusted to get the same out coming air
temperature.
Trinary Pressure switch: It is mounted on Receiver drier.
High-Low Pressure operation:. If the system pressure becomes low then it

switches off the compressor. Thus in the case of refrigerant loss due to any
system leak the compressor failure is avoided. Once the pressure increases
above 32 bar then the compressor is shut off to avoid any system failure. If
the system pressure falls due to any leaks then the compressor is switched
off.
Medium pressure operation: When the pressure in the system goes above
17 bars then it switches on the condenser fan. As the pressure reduces
below 14 bar the condenser fan is switched off.
AC Performance Test --
This test has to done in shade and at an ambient temperature of 30 to 40

degrees maximum. If the ambient temperature is more than that, then
please take the vehicle to the coolest area available in shade and then
carry out the test.

Page 5 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
A. Start the engine, switch on the AC and keep the Engine RPM at 1500.
B. Set the Blower to 3rd speed, the ventilation mode to be set to chest
and recirculation mode. The temperature control should be set to the
coolest.
1. These tests have to be performed at ambient temperature ranging

from 300 – 400 C.
2. Vehicle must be in shed with bonnet closed and engine speed should
be set at 1500 RPM with AC on.
3. Blower to be set in 3rd speed, ventilation to be set recirculation mode
and temperature control to be set to the maximum cool.
4. In 10 minutes close door test the average grill temperature should be
less than 120 C. (Open Door Test - in 10 minutes open door test the
drop in average grill temperature with respect to ambient
temperature should be 150 C).

Page 6 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Note:
In normal conditions:
The low side pressure should be 1.5 to 2.5 bars.
High-pressure side the pressure should be 15 to 17 bar.
This is with reference ambient temperature of 30 to 35 ° C

If the ambient temperature is different from the range refer to the chart
for getting the range of suction and discharge pressures.

Low pressure side Evaporator flooding due 9 Remove refrigerant
pressure high to Block valve stuck 9 Evacuate/dehydrat
Ps>2.5to 2.9 open. e
And 9 Change expansion
High pressure side 1. Dirt in Block valve. valve
pressure gauge high. 2. Moisture in the 9 Change
Pd>19.5 to 25 bar refrigerant circuit filter/drier.
9 Charge correct
Discharge air warm amount of oil &
refrigerant.
9 Check
performance.
Low side –High Non condensable ( 9 Remove refrigerant

High Side- High excessive air) 9 Evacuate/dehydrat
Ps>2.5-3.0 bar e
Pd> 19.5-25 bar 1. Large amount of air 9 Change
Suction side piping is caused by filter/drier.
hot to touch. insufficient 9 Charge correct
evacuation after amount of oil &
repair or servicing of refrigerant.
system 9 Check performance
2. Leak in system
allowing air and

Page 7 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
moisture to enter.
Low side –High 1. Expansion valve 9 Change the
High Side- High stuck open. expansion valve.
Ps>2.5-3.0 bar
Pd> 19.5-25 bar
Frosting on suction
side piping
Low side –High 1. Excessive refrigerant 9 Check refrigerant

High Side- High 2. Poor condenser condition
Ps>2.5-3.0 bar cooling 9 Check & repair
Pd> 19.5-25 bar 3. Engine or condenser condenser fan.
fan not working 9 Check condenser.
Discharge air- Warm 4. Fan direction 9 Check pressure
High side tubes-Very reverse. cap, clearance
hot 5. Condenser fan between fan and
Compressor clutch- clogged with debris/ radiator.
Could continuously sand. Check coolant and any
cycle on the high 6. Radiator other radiator
pressure switch overheating. problem.
Pressure does not

come to normal when
condenser cooled by
water
Low side- Low or 1. Expansion valve- 9 Remove refrigerant
vacuum Stuck closed and or 9 Evacuate/dehydrat
High side- High insufficient refrigerant e
Ps> 1.5 bar to vacuum flow to suction side of 9 Change
Pd> 19 to 22 bar the compressor. filter/drier.
9 Charge correct
Discharge air- slightly 2. Foreign material or amount of oil &
cool moisture entry refrigerant.
causing rust 9 Check performance.
formation.
Low side _ low or Clogging on high side: 9 Remove refrigerant.

Page 8 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
vacuum 9 Clean & flush
High side- High 1. Clogging between system.
Ps> 1.5 bar to vacuum compressor outlet 9 Change filter drier.
Pd> 5 to 7 bar and evaporator inlet 9 Charge correct
( High side) amount of oil &
Discharge air-slightly refrigerant.
cool 2. Very little or no 9 Check performance
High side tubes- Cool refrigerant flow to
and showing signs of suction ( low) side of
sweating or moisture the compressor
build up at the
position after the
point of restriction.
Temperature
difference found on
both the sides of the
clogged component.
Low side Gauge- 1. Excessive moisture 9 Remove refrigerant
Normal to Vacuum ( in system 9 Evacuate/dehydrate
Gradual reduction) 9 Change expansion
High side- Normal 2. Moisture can freeze valve 9 check)
Ps> 1.5 to vacuum within the expansion 9 Change filter/drier.
Pd> 14 to 16 bar valve and cause 9 Charge correct
blockage through amount of oil and
Discharge air becomes rust formation. refrigerant.
warmer as low side 9 Check performance.
cycles to vacuum.
Low side- High 1. Compressor 9 Replace
High side- Low malfunction. compressor.
Ps> 4 to 6 bar
Pd> 7 to 10 bar 2. Compressor faulty, 9 Remove refrigerant
internal blockage in 9 Evacuate/Dehydrate
Compressor –Noisy. suction Hose after .
Discharge air- Warm low side filing port. 9 Change filter drier.
Discharge hose- Cool. 9 Charge correct
amount of oil &

Page 9 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
refrigerant
9 Check performance.
Abnormal noise 1. Belt 9 Correct belt

slippage/damage. tension/ replace
2. Idler pulleybelt.
misalignments 9 Replace bearing in
3. Compressor clutchthe pulley.
pulley faulty. 9 Check the
4. Loose compressor compressor
mounting bolts mounting
5. Loose A/C plumbing 9 Check for loose
touching firewall/parts and correct.
front panel/Fit rubber packing
fenders. where clearances
low.
6. Compressor internal 9 Replace
damage. compressor.
High /Low pressure 1. Faulty compressor 9 Replace

equalize soon after discharge or inlet compressor.
compressor stops. valve.
Compressor is not hot
to touch. 2. Faulty compressor
seal.
Compressor pressure 1. Non condensable in 9 Recover

drops rapidly after system refrigerant/ check
switching off and does for leaks and repair
not stabilize to
saturation pressure as
per ambient
temperature.
Line to condenser is Restricted flow of 9 Remove restriction
excessively hot. refrigerant in system Evacuate

Page 10 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
9 Replace receiver
drier.
Charge through the
charging unit.
Insufficient/ no air 1. Blower rotation 9 Correct the blower
flow direction wrong. fitment.
2. Sealing 9 Renew sealing.
disconnected. Remove blockage.
Insulation piece 9 Adjust cable.
blocking air passage. 9 Recharge battery.
3. Mode cable not Check the charging
adjusted properly. system.
4. Voltage insufficient 9 Correct earthing.
< 12 Volts 9 Correct wiring.
5. Improper earthing. 9 Replace fuse.
6. Open circuit, wiring
harness. 9 Clean filter
7. Fuse blown element by
8. Filter clogged tapping.
9 Replace filter
element if airflow
is still insufficient
after cleaning.
9 Replace filter
element after
15,000 km OR one
year.
Compressor clutch 1. Open circuit/ Fuse 9 Replace fuse.

engagement not blown. 9 Charge battery.
satisfactory 2. Weak battery. 9 Change relay.
3. Faulty clutch relay. 9 Check for leaks,
4. No refrigerant. charge refrigerant &
5. Shorted clutch coil. oil & check.
6. Oil/ dirt on clutch 9 Replace coil.
plate. 9 Change clutch

Page 11 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
plates
Check condenser/ 1. Condenser fan
radiator Fan- direction pusher type Radiator
of rotation fan puller.
If fan not operating:
• Loose connection
• Loose wiring
harness.
• Motor burnout.
Air circulation in the climate box –
Fresh Air
To Demister
Recirculated
air To face middle RH
To face Middle LH
To Face RH
To center console
To foot RH

Page 12 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Knob Position
Flaps↓ Face Face-foot Foot Foot- Defrost
defrost
Face LH Open Open
Face RH Open Open
Face Open Open
Middle RH
Face Open Open
Middle LH
Center Open Open Open Open
Console
Foot LH Open Open Open
Foot RH Open Open Open
Defrost Leakage Open Open
The Airflow can be either fresh air or recirculation mode.

The air box with the electrically controlled flaps & recirculation mode is
slightly different. Sketch given below –

Page 13 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Care of the system --
The system should be flushed and charged every 50,000 or 1 year of

operation. The quantity of the gas which has to be depends on the capacity
of the compressor. With 150 cc compressor the quantity is 700 ± 20 grams.
With 170 cc the quantity has to 700 ± 20 grams
The refrigerant used is R134a.
Do not use / mix R12 & R134 A. the oils used for compressor is unique for
R134. DO NOT MIX. IT WILL CAUSE DAMAGE TO ‘O’ RINGS as well as the R/D.
Though R134a is non-CFC, it is recommended that it should not be

discharged to atmosphere.
We recommend the use of ROBINAIR equipment for evacuation, charging of

the system.
The wire mesh filter should be washed with normal water pressure, dried
and inserted back once every 30,000 Kms. The filter should be replaced it is
noticed to be torn or damaged. Also it is recommended that the vehicle

Page 14 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
should not be driven with AC or Blower on without the particle filter as it
will seriously damage the AC system components.
The procedure for cleaning the particle filter is as follows –
Remove the Glove Box.
1. Remove the HVAC Filter Cover by opening the snap clips on both
sides.

Page 15 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
2. Take out HVAC Filter Element.
3. Clean the Filter Element with water ( Caution do not use high pressure
water). Dry it completely.
Fit the cleaned HVAC Filter & Cover; lock the snap clips on both sides.
The procedure for the replacement of particle filter is as follows –
Remove the Glove Box.
1. Remove the HVAC Filter Cover by opening the snap clips on both
sides.

Page 16 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
2. Take out HVAC Filter Element.
3. Put the new Filter Element.
4. Fit the HVAC Filter Cover & lock the snap clips on both sides.
It is recommended that the evaporator fins be cleaned of dirt/ fungus every
40,000 Kilometer or once in 9 months for normal operation. If the vehicle is
not clocking long mileage then also it should be cleaned every 9 months
(normal areas) and 4 months in dusty conditions.
This will ensure that the heat transfer is effective hence better cooling and
also increase the airflow. The recommended cleaning agent is mentioned in
the recommended lubricant section.
In Car repairs --
Caution
9 Extreme care has to be taken to prevent any liquid

refrigerant in coming in contact with skin. Always wear
safety goggles.
9 Do not allow liquid refrigerant to touch bright metal. Refrigerant will

tarnish bright metal and chrome surface. Refrigerant in combination
with moisture is very corrosive and can damage to all metal surfaces.
9 When charging, always keep the tank in upright position. If the tank is
on its side or upside down, liquid refrigerant will enter and affect the
compressor.
9 Always double check that the gas being used is R134a.The refrigerant
cylinder is color-coded to avoid confusion. R134a is Blue.

Page 17 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
9 The compressor oil for R134A gas is different from R12A compressor
oil. Do not mix. If the R12A compatible compressor oil is used then it
will damage the O rings as well as the receiver Drier.
9 The Robinair equipment AC 350 should be used with R134a gas only.
9 Never discharge a system or do brazing/welding operation when the

engine is ON.
9 PAG oil is highly hygroscope. Open containers only when ready to use.
Cap containers immediately after use.
9 Use only the specified oil for the AC system
9 Do not allow PAG oil to contact bare skin.
9 Do not allow PAG oil to contact paint work- wash immediately
The charging procedure comprises of the following distinct steps –
Discharging the system.
Evacuation of the system and checking for low vacuum leak
Purging – if required.
Preliminary charging & High Pressure leak test.
Charging the system.
Evaporator cleaning
Performance test.

Page 18 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Discharging the system --
The following procedure is recommended for evacuation.
1. Connect the hose of Recovery unit to the vehicle circuit

Red hose to the high pressure charging port
Blue hose the low pressure charging port
2. Open the quick coupler valves on the hose after they are connected to
the system
3. Check the manifold gauges the units control pane. They should register
above zero. If it is indicating zero then either the hose is not connected
properly/or/quick coupler valves are not opened or the system is empty.
4. Make sure that the drain valve at the bottom is closed.
5. Open both the manifold valves on the control panel
6. Open the Gas (vapor valve and liquid valve on the tank).
7. Switch on the power
8. Choose Recover option from the panel
9. To assure that the complete recovery of the refrigerant. Wait for 5

minutes and watch the manifold gauges for a rise above zero.
10. If a rise occurs, press HOLD/CONT. repeat until the system pressure
hold for at least 2 minutes
11. The system displays the weight of the refrigerant recovered.
12. Confirm that the oil catch bottle is empty. Then slowly open the drain
valve and allow the oil to be drained into the bottle. When all the oil has
been recovered, close the valve immediately. New clean oil must be
added to system before recharging with the refrigerant

Page 19 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
13. The automatic recovery unit will operate until the air conditioning
system has been emptied of refrigerant down to atmospheric pressure.
The cylinder can now be closed.
Evacuation of the system –
The evacuation and leak test ensues that the system does not leak under
low-pressure conditions.
Ensure that the hoses are connected to the charging ports and valves on the
hoses. Tank & manifold are open.
Choose vacuuming program (Shift/Reset option) from the control panel.
Set up the vacuuming time in minutes. Approximately 15 minutes of

vacuuming time is recommended.
The unit displays the complete message after the vacuuming is over.
Check the moisture indicator. If it is green, it means that the system is

ready for recharging. If it is not green then manual recycling has to be done
for one hour. In case the moisture indicator still does not turn green, the
reason could be saturated receiver drier. It should be replaced.
The charging station is equipped with recycling facility. During evacuation

the refrigerant is automatically recycled to assure recharging with the
cleanest possible refrigerant. Recycling begins automatically after 5 second
of the vacuum pump starting. Non condensable gases (mostly air) are
automatically vented from the tank.
The system must hold the vacuum of –100 Kpa for a minimum of 15 minutes.
If vacuum is held then the system has no ands and should be evacuated for
further 15 minutes
This completes the evacuation process.

Page 20 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Purging – if required --
Where the system has been ruptured, contaminated, or a compressor has to

be removed, reinstalled or replaced, the system should be checked for
contamination, and if so then the entire system must be flushed.
The system can be flushed with Nitrogen.
Preliminary charging & High Pressure leak test --
This ensures that the system does not leak under high pressure
conditions.
Confirm that the hoses are connected to the charging ports and valves on
the hose, Tank & manifold are open
Enter the refrigerant quantity by weight and press ENTER. (At least 200
grams of charge are required to do the high-pressure leakage test)
Press CHG to start charging. The unit displays the completed message after
the charging is completed.
Use the electronic leak detector to probe the leakages. Leakage checking to
be done at the following points –
• Expansion valve joints

• All pipe joints.
• Suction & discharge ports.
• Both the charging ports
Note: Inspect for leaks by slowly moving the probe of the detector
around all the hose connections and points of possible leakage’s. The
R134a is heavier than air; hence, any leakage will be more apparent at
the bottom of fitting.

Page 21 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Charging the system –
If no leaks are found then evacuate and charge the -total system
requirement is 700 ± 20 grams.
However in case of leakage, the system should be discharged.

After that repeat, the steps from evacuation onwards till the above steps.
Then proceed.
In case the system was checked for High pressure leaks by using Nitrogen,
Evacuation should done first and then system should be directly charge with
7000±20 grams.
Close both the manifold valves and then start the vehicle.
Start the vehicle’s AC system and set it to maximum cooling. Check the
pressure gauges and temperatures in the vehicle.
Turn off the engine.
Disconnect the high side hose and start the vehicle. Open both the manifold
valves to pull the refrigerant from both the hoses into the system.
At the lowest operating pressure close the low side valve and switch off the
vehicle. Disconnect the low side hose and remove adapters if used.
Close the high side manifold valve. Both the valves should now be in closed
position.
9 Do not start the engine when the valve on the manifold

and tank are open.
!

Page 22 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
9 Ensure that the valves are closed before starting the engine.
9 Never run the compressor without the refrigerant in the system as
the lubricant relies on the refrigerant flow
Accurate system refrigerant charge can only be determined by charging

the correct amount of R134a.
If in doubt as to gas charge, e.g.

Suction pressure low
Or
Discharge pressure low
Or
Air outlet temperature at the face high.
Then: Evacuate the system and Charge with the 700±20 grams of R134a
Carry out cooling system pressure test and suction (low side) pressure
reading comparison.

Page 23 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Evaporator Cleaning Procedure –
Remove the Glove Box, remove Blower Connection & remove Blower
Assembly.
1. Insert “Coil Rinse Nozzle” inside the Climate Box Assembly at the
blower neck.
• Spray “Coil Rinse” at least 2 times.
• After Spraying, the Liquid becomes Foam & enters in the Evaporator
coil.
• Assemble the removed Blower Assembly again.
• Wait for 10 minutes.
2. Close all the Vents / louvers.

Page 24 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
3. Start AC with Blower on 1st speed, Run the Engine at 1500 RPM for 5
minutes.
• Put AC Off & put Blower on 4th Speed for 5 minutes, Close all the
Vents.
• All the Evaporator Containments & Water (Liquid) will drain out
through the Drain Hose & Evaporator becomes clean.
Special Instructions for Vehicle Users to avoid Wet Smell on the

Evaporator:
Put OFF the AC & put Blower on 4th speed 5 minutes before stopping the
Vehicle, this will keep Evaporator DRY & NO WET SMELL will come from
Evaporator.
Performance test –
Pressure gauge readings together with the face air outlet temperatures are
the only method of checking and diagnosing the cooling system.
Checking system oil charge —
The compressor is charged at the factory with oil ( as per the cc- see the
matrix below for the exact quantity) refrigerant oil, which circulates within
the entire AC system. Only this type of oil, which is pale yellow in color,
must be used when adding or changing oil. This oil is not compatible with
any other PAG oil. It is not necessary to regularly check the oil level in the
system. It should be remembered that the oil gets circulated within the
whole system. Therefore, whenever an AC system component is replaced a
quantity of new refrigerant oil must be added to the system, where a major
loss of system oil has occurred. The loss normally takes place when:
Hose failure or leak is present.
Refrigerant system component is damaged due to collision.

If oil is suspected to be in the system

Page 25 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Compressor capacity Oil Quantity Type of oil

150 cc 135 cc SP 10 PAG ( Sanden)
170 cc 150 cc FD46XG PAG ( hella)
The procedure to be followed is –
Recover refrigerant from the system by evacuation.

Drain out the refrigerant oil.
Flush the remaining oil using R134a refrigerant.
Add oil quantity as per the matrix of new refrigerant oil to the compressor.
Install the compressor after replacing the Suction and discharge “O” rings.
Note: Ensure that the ‘O” rings are not twisted and that both the seals and
‘O’ rings are clean and then oil.
Follow the steps of charging procedure.
Compressor Replacement –
1. Discharge the refrigerant
2. Remove the suction and discharge pipes from the compressor, ensuring no
foreign items get clogged to the ports. (In order to have better
accessibility it is suggested that the following parts be removed first-
right wheel, right aprons; oil cooler)
3. Loosen the tensioner pulley.
4. Remove the fan belt
5. Loosen the compressor mounting bolts.
6. Remove the compressor.


Page 26 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
7. Drain and measure the refrigerant oil from the original compressor by
removing the drain plug.
8. For example, the oil quantity drained from the original compressor is 80
cc.
The replacement compressor comes with 150 cc of compressor oil.
The implication is that out of the total 150 cc of the original compressor.
70 cc of oil is in the system. Hence if the replacement compressor is
fitted as it is, it will cause this 70 cc extra to get into the whole system
and affect the performance.
9. Hence it should always be –

Oil to be drained from new compressor =Total oil capacity of compressor-
Drained oil
The refitting procedure is the reverse of assembly procedure.
10. Follow the steps of charging procedure.
Control Panel --
The control panel has 3 knobs- the right knob is for degree of cooling to
heating- depending on the knob setting. For maximum cooling set the knob
on blue color dot and for maximum heating set the knob on red color dot.

Page 27 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
The left knob sets the flap position to direct the airflow to face only or
face & feet or feet only or feet & defrosting or only defrosting.
The middle knob controls the blower speed. The bottom row indicates AC
low , AC high & fresh air / recirculation mode.
The control panel is PCB based & has only one cable.
Setting of the Control Panel Cable --
The procedure, which is, outlined below are the setting procedure for
assembly. However, please note that the removal of the cables should also
be done in the same positions.
Caution: Failure to follow the procedure may cause breakages.
Note: The procedure for setting of the links with Electric actuation is
given after the manual control panels
Heater cable Setting
Heater cable setting Procedure –

Page 28 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Hold the control panel in front of the housing.
Keep the cooling & heating knob

at the highest cooling point
position.
Clamp the cable of the control

panel water valve to closed
position of water lever in the
housing side.
Heater cable at closed position,

Page 29 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Fitting the Fresh /re circulating flap ( with the flap in the fresh air mode)
Lever for
Fresh / Re-
circulating
mode
Motor for
Connecting Fresh / Re-
Rod circulating
mode

Page 30 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Replacing the Antifreeze switch –
The function of the anti freeze switch is to protect the refrigerant system
from damage. It switches off the compressor when the condenser water
dries ices up on the evaporator fins. Otherwise, the evaporator becomes
extra cool, resulting in the air passage between the fins getting blocked.
Suction pipe becomes extra cool and sometimes iced up, the refrigerant
remains liquid even after the expansion valve due to insufficient heat
transfer across the evaporator surface and eventually the compressor will
get damaged due to liquid refrigerant inflow.
Replacement procedure:
Remove the wiring harness from the connector.

Pull out the probe carefully.
While fitting back , ensure that the orientation of the bulb
Refrigerant: R134A
Compressor oil: FD46XG. PAG stands for ( Poly Alkaline Glycol oil)
Oil quantity to be filled while replacing components –
• Condenser/evaporator: In addition to the drained quantity- 20 cc

• Receiver Drier: Add 20 cc of new oil
• If any one pipe is replaced then 10cc. (If 2 pipes replaced then it
should be 20 cc.)

Page 31 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Evaporator cleaning Agent --
"Coil Rinse" Packaged by Chemguard Laboratories; Kuala Lumpar.
In India Marketed by Astro Trading Company

Contact person Mr. Rakesh Bhai; Mobile no 9820141308
Specifications –
Blower Motor: 12 V; 300 W

Condenser Motor: 2500± 200; 12V; 200 W
Expansion Valve- 2T
Chart showing the Effect of ambient temperature on Low Pressure side
pressure & High side pressure with R134 A

Page 32 of 32
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Brakes
Contents
Description
Trouble Shooting
Care of the system
In Car repairs
Working principle Assembly & dismantling of the Front Disc Brakes
Rear principle, Assembly & dismantling of the Rear Brake
Working principle Assembly & Dismantling of the Master cylinder
Working principle of the brake booster
Working principle LSPV Valve setting
Parking Brake Description, Setting
Tightening Torques
List of the MSTs

Mahindra & Mahindra Ltd Scorpio VLX Brakes
Page 1 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Description
The brake system is vacuum assisted ‘H‘split type. The front brakes
are twin pot calipers with ventilated rotor. The rear brakes are drum
types with self-adjusting mechanism. The parking brakes are actuated
in the rear through cable. Both the front disc pads and the rear brake
liners are non-asbestos.
The system is equipped with ABS which ensures optimum braking

distance without allowing the wheels to lock.
Preliminary checks involve inspecting fluid level, parking brake action,

wheel and tyre conditions. Checking for obvious or external leaks or
component damage and pedal response. A road test will confirm or
deny the existence of the problem.
While road testing if the complaint involved low brake pedal, make
several low speed stops and note if pedal comes back to normal height.
Check the pedal response with gear in neutral and engine running. The
pedal should remain firm under steady pressure. During road test make
normal and firm brake stops in speeds of 40 to 60 Km/h. Note faulty
brake operation such as pull, grab, drag, noise, low pedal, hard pedal,
fade, pedal pulsation, etc.
Diagnosis –
Pedal falls away
A brake pedal that falls away under steady foot pressure is generally
the result of system leak. The leak point could be at a brake line,
fitting hose, wheel cylinder or Master Cylinder Internal leakages caused
by worn or damaged piston, seals may also be the problem cause.
If leakage is severe fluid will be evident at or around the leaking
component.

Page 2 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Low pedal
If a low pedal is experienced, pump the pedal several times. If the

pedal comes back up, worn lining and worn rotors or drums are the
most likely cause. However, if the pedal remains low and / or the
warning light illuminates then the problem is in the master cylinder,
wheel cylinder, or calipers.
A decrease in master cylinder fluid may only be the result of normal
lining wear. Fluid level will decrease in proportion to the lining wear. It
is a result of the outward movement of caliper and wheel cylinder
pistons to compensate for normal wear. Top up reservoir fluid and
check brake operation to verify the complaint.
Spongy pedal
A spongy pedal is most often caused by air in the system. However thin
drums or substandard brake lining and hoses will also cause a condition
similar to spongy pedal. The proper course of action is bleed the system
or replace thin drums and suspect quality brake lining and hoses. In
case the system has not been maintained as per recommendations and
the brake hoses have not been replaced then due to swelling of the
hoses during braking – it also causes spongy braking. In such a condition
it is advisable to replace the hoses and replace all the seals and change
the brake fluid.
Hard pedal or High pedal effort
A hard pedal or high pedal effort may be due to lining that is water
soaked, contaminated, glazed or badly worn. Defective vacuum
assistance will also cause hard operation. The vacuum booster or check
valve (NRV) could also be faulty. Test the booster function. As detailed
below —
1. Start engine & check booster hose connections as well as the EGR
valve connections. Correct any vacuum leak before proceeding
further.
2. Stop the engine and put in neutral.

Page 3 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
3. Pump the brake pedal until all the vacuum in the reservoir is
exhausted ( normally after 6 to 8 pedal applications the brake pedal
will become hard)
4. Press and hold brake pedal under light foot pressure
a) If the pedal hold firm then proceed to step 5.
b) If the pedal does not hold firm then and falls away then the master
cylinder is defective.
5. Start the engine and note pedal action.
a) If the pedal falls away slightly under light pedal action and then hold
firm then proceed to step 6
b) If no pedal action is discernable then vacuum pump or vacuum check
valve is defective.
6. Rebuild the vacuum reserve as follows. Release brake pedal.
Increase engine speed to 1500 rpm and then bring it to idle and shut
off engine.
7. Wait for about 90 seconds and try brake action again. Booster should
provide two or more vacuum assisted pedal applications. If vacuum
assist is not performed then perform check for the check valve and
booster.
Find the enclosed flow chart for reference –

Page 4 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
TROUBLE SHOOTING OF VACUUM BOOSTER ASSEMBLY

BASIC TEST
ENGINE OFF. Depress & release brake pedal

several times to remove vacuum from Booster
Assembly. After this the pedal application will feel
hard to press.
Depress the brake pedal & hold with light pressure of @ 10kgs. &
start the ENGINE
If the booster is functioning satisfactory,

the pedal will fall slightly & then hold.
Here less pressure will be needed to hold the
pedal dawn.
IF THE BOOSTER IS NOT OPERATING If the BOOSTER is

Disconnect the vacuum hose from the NRV . OPERATING pl.
Then with ENGINE RUNNING , turn over & do the
check vacuum supply with a vacuum gauge. VACUUM LEAK
There should be at least 600 mm of Hg vacuum TEST.
for Diesel & 500 mm of Hg for petrol vehicle.
If VACUUM SUPPLY IS If VACUUM SUPPLY IS

BELOW 600 mm of Hg for 600 mm of Hg for or
diesel & 500 mm of Hg more for diesel or 500
for petrol veh. replace or mm of Hg or more for
repair vacuum hose & petrol vehicle, then the
vacuum source. booster is faulty &
should be replaced.
When adequate vacuum

supply is obtained,
repeat basic test.

Page 5 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
VACUUM LEAK TEST
Run engine to medium speed. Release accelerator

& turn Engine OFF. This builds up vacuum.
Wait for 90 sec.& apply brakes. Two or more

applications should be vacuum assisted.
IF APPLICATIONS ARE NOT VACUUM IF APPLICATIONS ARE

ASSISTED disconnect vacuum hose VACUUM ASSISTED there
from vacuum source or NRV is no vacuum leak.
whichever is easier. If disconnected DO THE HYDRAULIC LEAK
from NRV , attach short length of TEST.
hose to valve.
Blow into hose attached to NRV. If air

passes through , valve is defective.
IF NRV or CHECK VALVE IS IF NRV OR CHECK VALVE

DEFECTIVE install new NRV IS OK , vacuum booster is
& repeat VACUUM LEAK leaking & should be
TEST. replaced.
HYDRAULIC LEAK TEST Depress & release brake pedal

several times . Then hold pedal
depressed with medium pressure.
IF PEDAL FALLS AWAY hydraulic system is IF PEDAL DOES

leaking. Check for external leakage at wheel NOT FALL
cylinders, calipers , brake pipes , hoses & AWAY
joints. hydraulic
If there is no external leak, there may be an system is not
internal leak ( master cylinder seals ) . Repair leaking.
or replace parts needed to correct leak.

Page 6 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
CHECK VALVE OR NRV -- NON RETURN VALVE ( MOUNTED ON VACUUM BOOSTER FT.
FACE
Brake drag
Brake drag occurs when the lining is in constant contact with the rotor
or drum. Drag can occur at one wheel, all wheels, front only or rear
only. It is caused by incomplete shoe release. Drag can be minor or
severe enough to overheat the lining, rotor and drum.
Brake drag has a direct effect on fuel economy. Undetected minor drag
can be misdiagnosed as an engine complaint. In case of severe drag it
can also cause clutch slip.
Minor drag will usually cause slight surface charring of the lining. It can
also generate hard spots in the rotor or the brake drum from the
overheating/ cooling process. In most cases the rotors, drums, wheels,
and tyres are quite warm to touch after the vehicle is stopped.
Severe drag can char the brake lining all the way through. It can also
cause distort and score rotors and drums to the point of replacement.
The wheels, tyre and brake components will be extremely hot. In
severe cases the lining may generate smoke as it chars from
overheating.
Some common causes of brake drag are:

♦ Loose or damaged wheel bearing
♦ Seized or sticky caliper or wheel cylinder piston.
♦ Loose caliper-mounting bracket.
♦ Loose mounting bolts of the rotor.
♦ Distorted brake drum or shoes.
♦ Rear brake shoes binding on worn/ damaged support plates
♦ Misassembled components
♦ Incomplete release of parking brake
♦ No free play
♦ Clogged master cylinder return port
♦ Broken master cylinder return spring
♦ Early lock of rear wheel due to change in setting distance of LSPV
(Any change in rear spring camber can affect or also wrong setting.)
Page 7 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
If the brake drag occurs at all the wheels, the problem may be related
to a blocked master cylinder compensation port or faulty vacuum
booster (binds does not release).
An improperly mounted brake light switch can also be a cause of drag.
An improper mounting may prevent the brake pedal to return
completely. This will cause the master cylinder feed port port to be
blocked. The brakes would be partially applied causing the drag.
Brake Fade
Brake fade is a product of overheating caused by brake drag. However

overheating and subsequent brake fade can also be caused by riding the
brake pedal, making repeated high deceleration stops in a short time
span, Constant braking on steep roads also cause brake fade. If the
brake lining is contaminated with oil or glazed then also the brake
fading will take place.
Pedal Pulsation
Pedal pulsation is caused by components those are loose or beyond

tolerance limits.
Disc brake rotors with excessive lateral runout or disc thickness
variation, or out of round drums are the primary cause of pulsation.
Other causes are loose wheel bearings or calipers and worn, damaged
tyre
Pull
A front pull condition would be the result of:

• Contaminated lining in one caliper.
• Seized caliper piston
• Binding caliper.
• Loose caliper.
• Loose or corroded slide pin.
• Improper brake shoes
• Inadequate contact of pad.
Page 8 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
• Damaged rotor
• Incorrect wheel bearing adjustment (at one wheel)
• Incorrect tyre inflation(High variations between two wheel)
• Shoe return spring weak or broken
A worn, damaged wheel bearing or suspension components are further

cause. A damaged front tyre (bruised, ply separation) can also cause
pull.
A common and frequently misdiagnosed pull condition is where the

direction of pull changes after a few stops. The cause is a combination
of brake drag followed by brake fade at the dragging brake unit.
As the dragging brake overheats, efficiency is so reduced as the fade

occurs. If the opposite braking unit is still functioning then its braking
effect is magnified. These causes pull to switch direction in favor of the
brake unit that is functioning normally.
While diagnosing a pull in change in pull condition, remember that pull

will return to the original direction if the dragging brake unit is allowed
to cool down (and is not seriously damaged)
Rear Brake Grab
Contaminated lining, bent, or binding shoes and support plate usually

causes rear grab (or pull). This is particularly true when one wheel is
involved.
Brakes Do not Hold After Driving Through Deep Water Puddle
This condition is generally caused by water soaked lining. If the lining is

only wet it can be dried by driving with the brakes lightly applied for 2
to 4 kms. However if the lining is both wet and dirty then it will be
necessary to dismantle, clean and reassemble.
Brake Fluid Contamination

Page 9 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
There are two causes of brake fluid contamination. The first involves
allowing dirt, debris, or other liquid material to enter cylinder reservoir
when the cover is off. The second involves adding to, or filling the
cylinder with a non- – recommended fluid.
Brake fluid contaminated with only dirt, or debris usually retains a
normal appearance. In some cases the foreign material will remain
suspended in the fluid and be visible. The fluid and foreign material
can be removed from the reservoir with a suction gun but only if the
brakes have not been applied. If the brakes are applied after
contamination, system flushing will be required. The master cylinder
may have to be disassembled, cleaned and the piston seals replaced.
Foreign material lodged in the reservoir compensator/ports can cause
brake drag by restricting the fluid return after application.
Brake fluid contaminated by a non recommended fluid will usually be
discolored, milky, oily looking or foamy. In some cases it may even
appear as if the fluid contains sludge. However remember that the
brake fluid will darken in time and occasionally are cloudy in
appearance. These are normal conditions and should not be
mistaken for contamination.
If some type of oil has been added to the system then the fluid can
separate into distinct layers. This can be verified by draining off a
sample with a clean suction gun. Then pour the sample into a glass
container and observe fluid action. If the fluid separates into distinct
layers, it is definitely contaminated.
The only real correction for contamination by non-recommended

fluids is to flush the entire hydraulic system and replace all the
seals and the brake hose.
Brake Noise –
Squeak/Squeal
Brake squeak or squeal may be due to linings those are wet or
contaminated with brake fluid, grease or oil. Glazed linings and
rotor/drums with hard spots can also cause squealing. Dirt and foreign
material embedded in the system will also cause squeak/squeal. Worn
retaining pins can also cause disc pad to squeak/ rattle.
Page 10 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
A very loud squeak or squeal is frequently a sign of severely worn brake
lining (or the drum or the rotor). If the lining has worn to the rivets
then metal to metal contact takes place. If the condition is allowed to
persist then rotors/drums can become so scored that replacement is
necessary.
Thump/clunk
Thumping or clunking noise during braking are not caused by the brake
components. In many cases such noises are caused by loose or damaged
steering, suspension or engine components. However caliper that bind
on the slide surface can generate thump or clunk noise. In addition,
worn out improperly adjusted, or improperly assembled rear brake
shoes can also produce a thumping noise.
Chatter –
Loose or worn components or glazed/burnt lining usually causes brake
chatter. Rotors with hard spots can also contribute to chatter.
Additional causes of chatter are out of tolerance rotors, brake ling not
secured properly to shoes, loose wheel bearings and contaminated
brake lining.
Brake lining contamination –
Brake lining contamination is usually a product of leaking calipers or

wheel cylinders, driving through deep puddles, or lining that has
become covered with grease and gravel during repair.
Wheel & Tyre Problems –

Some conditions attributing to brake components may actually be
caused by a wheel or tyre problem
A damage wheel can cause shudder, vibration and pull. A worn or

damaged tyre can also cause pull.
Severely worn tyres with very little tread depth can produce a
condition similar to grab as the tyre loses and recover traction.

Page 11 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Flat spotted tyres can cause vibration and wheel tramp and generate
wheel shudder during brake operation.
A tyre with internal damage such as bruise or ply separation can cause
pull and vibration.
Defective Parking Brake –
Can be caused by excessive brake lever play. Sticky parking cable,

grease or oil on shoe, excess shoe clearance (normally caused by
malfunction of automatic adjusting mechanism)
Care of the system –

The brake fluid should conform to DOT 3 specifications.
The brake fluid should be replaced once a year or every 40,000

Kms – which ever is earlier. This is because brake fluid is
hygroscopic in nature hence it absorbs moisture. The normal
braking operation also results in brake fluid getting heated. The
process of heating and cooling also results in moisture. The brake
fluid boiling point keeps coming down due to the presence of
moisture hence if not changed it can cause higher corrosion of the
wheel cylinders/ master cylinders/ brake tubes as well as spongy or
poor braking.
Caution – Do not mix brake fluid of different brands. Do not use any
brake fluid, which is kept in an open container. Always use brake
fluid from a sealed container.
The brake fluid should not be contaminated with any mineral oil.
Do not use reuse brake fluid that has just been bled.
The list of the recommended lubricants is enclosed at the end of the

Manual.

Page 12 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
In Car repairs –
a) Free Play Adjustment.

b) Brake Bleeding.
c) Front Pad replacement
d) Rear brake shoe replacement.
a) Free Play adjustment
Adjusting the pedal to booster push rod sets the free play adjustment.
b) Brake bleeding
4 2
3 1
1. First step in bleeding is bleeding the system in conventional

way as per the sequence below -
1. Rear left
Page 13 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
2. Rear right
3. Front left
4. Front right
The procedure at each of the bleed point is to pump 2 to 3 times; open

the bleed screw1/4th turn. Then close the bleed screw. Again pump 2/3
times then open the bleed screw keeping the pedal pressed down.
Close the bleed screw and release the pedal. Repeat the operation
until no bubbles are coming.
It is also advisable to keep the engine running at idling so that the
pedal travel is complete.
2. In the second stage the bleeding of the EHCU assembly needs

to be done. The procedure is as below -
1. Connect scan tool to the K-Line Diagnostic Connector.

2. Follow the instructions displayed.

Page 14 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
3. When scan tool displays “BRAKE BLEEDING” disconnect the scan tool
and proceed.
4. Perform base brake bleeding a second time.
5. Top up master cylinder fluid level and verify proper brake operation
before moving vehicle.
The air trapped in the EHCU assembly will be pushed out into the
hydraulic circuit during Step 2. Repeat the manual bleeding as per
the sequence explained in Step 1 to ensure no air in the hydraulic
circuit.
Caution -
Before opening the reservoir cap- clean the area of all dust and
muck.
Before starting the bleeding – ensure that the parking brake is in

released condition.
After bleeding each point put back the rubber cap.
Always use the brake fluid from a sealed container.
A pipe should be connected from the bleed screw to a clean

container where the pipe other end is fully immersed in brake fluid.
Doing the bleeding without the pipe can lead to improper bleeding
as the presence of small bubbles can not be seen without the tube.
DO not reuse the bled fluid. (It will have air bubbles entrapped.)
During the bleeding operation ensure that the master cylinder fluid
level does not become below lower level. (It can draw air thus
defeating the purpose of bleeding)
If the brake fluid has to be reused then it should be poured into a

can using clean plastic pipe. The removed fluid should be kept
without disturbing for at least 72 hours, so as to allow the air
bubbles to get out. Later it is suggested to use chamois leather to
strain the brake fluid.

Page 15 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
c) Front Pad replacement
Put the vehicle under hand brake in order to prevent from rolling.
In Car Repairs –
Removal & Refitment of Brake pads --
Note : The Assembly sequence is the reverse of the dismantling

sequence. Any special precautions to be taken while disassembling
or assembly are indicated & shown later.
Replacement of the brake pads –
1. Loosen and remove the bolt - Pin of the guide pin & swing up the
caliper. (Check Point A)
2. Remove the old pads one by one.

Page 16 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Check Points –
A)
While swinging down the caliper
take care and see that the
antisqueal shims are not damaged.
While fitting the guide pin ensure

that the straight portion of the pin
matches with the ear of the caliper
body.
It is recommended to change the

antirattle clips at the time of pad
change.
After tightening the bolt to torque .

Rotate the disc and ensure that
the disc is free to rotate.
B)
Connect a transparent plastic pipe
to the bleed screw on the caliper.
Dip the other end of the pipe into
a container filled with brake fluid.
Ensure the tip of the plastic pipe

always remains dipped in the brake
fluid.
Loosen the bleed screw & push both

the pistons one by one into the
caliper bore.
Ensure the pistons are pushed back

fully into the caliper bore.

Page 17 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Caution :
Because the bleed screw is loosened to push the pistons of the
caliper back, it is required to bleed the vehicle to retain the original
brake performance of the vehicle.
CAUTION
If the pads are to be reused make sure they are assembled back in
the same position as they were when removed i.e., inboard pad on
to the piston side and outboard pad to the wheel side. This is
possible only when at the time of removal these pads are marked for
their positions and kept aside.
Never lubricate the pad seating areas as it may lead to jamming.
After fitting the pads, apply brake pedal 5 to 6 times in static
condition in order to make the pads align properly.
The brake pads require nearly 200 Kms of running for bedding in.
Hence it is advisable that during the brake testing after fitting the
new pads and also during the initial run, severe braking and / or
continuous operation be avoided.
Rear Brake liner replacement -
Remove the wheel.

The jacking point for rear axle is
below the axle . Care must be taken
to avoid any damage to the
suspension links.

Page 18 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Remove the brake drum after
removing the drum mounting screw.
Remove the parking brake cable

lock.
If there is any difficulty in removing

the drum ; using a screw driver push
the hand brake lever. A click sound
will denote that the shoe setting is
dropped.
Now the drum can be removed using
two puller bolts.
Detach the hand brake cable from

the lever on the trailing shoe by
moving the lever towards the centre
of the brake. & remove the cable
end from its location in the end of
the lever
Remove the return spring (near the

wheel cylinder ) from trailing shoe.
Reduce the adjuster assembly to its
Page 19 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
minimum length by lifting the end of
the pawl lever and rotating the
serrated adjuster nut.
Remove shoe hold down springs and

cup washers from the back plate by
compressing the spring.
Slide both shoes off the wheel

cylinder pistons. Care must be taken
not to damage the rubber boots on
the wheel cylinder. Detach the
adjuster assembly and shoe return
spring from the shoes.
While riveting the new liners on to

the shoe following care should be
taken –
- the hole in the shoe rim has not
become oblong/oval.
- While fitting the rivet the holes
in the liner and the shoe rim are
in same line.
- The rivet head at the back is
formed properly & the rivetting
should be done inside out.
- Inspect the shoe hold down
springs, cups & shoe hold down
pins for any damage /
deformation. Replace if required.
- It is advisable to use new shoe
return springs.
- It is advisable to fit the parking
brake cable on the slot in the
trailing shoe before assembling it
on the back plate.
Clean the shoe resting pads on the
back plate & both the shoe tips.

Page 20 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Place one shoe on backplate &
assemble pin shoe hold down cup.
Fit one end of the shoe return spring
– lower ( abutment spring) in the
slot provided on brake shoe.
Assemble the other end of the shoe
return spring – lower ( abutment
spring)in the second shoe.
Hook the shoe return spring ( short

length coil) to the leading shoe with
the adjuster assembly in its
minimum length condition,assemble
it in between the shoe webs.
Attach the other end of the shoe
return spring to the opposite end of
the trailing shoe.
Leading Shoe
Fit the pawl lever to the spring
dowel inserting one leg of the pawl
between male push rod end & shoe
web of the leading shoe & the other
end of the pawl leg resting on the
adjuster nut.
Hook the short end of the spring
into the hole in the pawl lever & use
plier to attach the opposite end of
the spring on to the shoe web.
Note –
Ensure proper resting of auto
adjuster inside web & hand brake
lever slot.
Ensure that the the auto adjuster

pawl lever edge is properly located
on tooth of auto adjuster wheel.
Connect the Parking brake cable in
Page 21 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
reverse order of dismantling.
Centre the shoes relatively by

tapping & moving upwards or
downwards.
Before refitting the brake drum

check that the drum thickness has
not gone below 8.20 mm.
A thin brake drum will flex during

braking reducing the braking
efficiency and also it will cause
improper functioning of the
parking brakes.
Refit drum & wheels.

Apply brakes few times to adjust the
brake shoes.
Working principle, Assembly & Dismantling of Twin Pot Caliper

Assembly –

Page 22 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
When the brake pedal is pressed then the hydraulic pressure pushes the
two pistons to act simultaneously on the brake disc. The combined
thrust provided by two pistons is much higher than the single piston
caliper.
The sliding rail type carrier on which the twin caliper body slide easily
to ensure that equal thrust is applied on both pads. A higher friction
pad area improves the durability (life) of the friction material.
Disc brakes by their very nature & design are self adjusting to the wear
and hence do not require brake adjustment to compensate the pad
wear.
Servicing of Caliper –
Apply hand brakes. Place wheel chocks on rear wheel
Jack up the front of the vehicle and remove the front wheels by
loosening / removing the wheel nuts.
Disconnect the hose from the caliper by removing the banjo bolt

Page 23 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
1. Loosen and remove the mounting bolts of the caliper.
2. Remove the caliper assembly after removing the banjo bolt at

caliper inlet port.
3. Loosen & remove the sliding pin bolts. Remove the pads. Separate
the caliper sub assembly from the carrier sub assembly.
Clean the caliper & carrier assembly externally with alcohol or fresh
brake fluid.
4. Remove the caliper pistons from the bore by blowing dry compressed
air through the inlet port of the caliper. Care must be taken to
remove both the pistons at a time. Also to avoid the damage to the
pistons, place a wooden block in front of the pistons.
4. Remove the boot.
5. Remove the seal- Pistons from the groove by using a blunt edged
connector or feeler gauge. Take care during seal removal the bore is
not damaged.
6. Remove the bleed screw from the caliper body.
Cleaning & Inspection –
All the removed parts should be cleaned properly using fresh brake
fluid or alcohol and kept in a clean tray.
NEVER USE ANY MINERAL OIL BASE FLUIDS LIKE KEROSENE ,DIESEL ,
PETROL etc,. FOR CLEANING OF REMOVED PARTS.
DO NOT CLEAN THE BORE OF THE CALIPER WITH WATER OR STEAM.
Tips –
The Piston seals are to be

lubricated with fresh brake fluid
Page 24 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
and assembled in to the seal
grooves in the caliper bores.
Make sure the seating of this is
properly done. Then lubricate
the outer surface of the pistons
with fresh brake fluid.
The piston boots are to be

lubricated internally with the
grease supplied in Caliper Repair
Kits before it is assembled on the
pistons.
Fit the boot into the groove in the

caliper body. Locking of the
rubber boot in the groove to be
ensured.
Expand the rubber boots & insert
the pistons one by one into the
caliper bore.
The piston should be inserted into
the bore in a straight position
only. If it gets tilted while
pushing, there is a chance that
the piston will get jam half way &
also can damage the seal.
Servicing / Replacement of Sliding pin –

Page 25 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
1. Separate the sliding pins from the carrier assembly .
2. Separate the rubber boots from the sliding pins.
4. Clean the sliding pins & sliding pin bores.
5. Check the sliding pins for bent / damage / rust. If found should be
replaced with new ones.
Discard all rubber parts.
Smear the pins and the pin bores with the special grease supplied in
Kit.
Fit the pin boots on to the pins and assemble it on to the carrier bore.
Ensure proper location of the boot lip on to the carrier. Move the pins
in and out 3 to 5 times in order to allow for the trapped air inside the
bore to escape.
Repeat the above procedure for the other side caliper assembly.
Inspection of the rotor –
Check the runout of the wheel disc in four places. Excessive lateral
runout will cause brake pedal pulsation and rapid unven wear of the
brake pads.

Page 26 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
The maximum runout permissible is 0.12 mm
1. Disc Brake Rotor thickness variations: Variations in the rotor

thickness will cause pedal pulsation, noise and shudder. It should
be kept in mind that the disc rotor thickness variation is one of
the primary causes for brake pedal pulsation.
The maximum variation permissible is ± 0.012 mm
The rotor thickness should be measured in at least 6 different points

around the rotor face. Position the micrometer approximately 15 mm
from the outer edge.
Recondition on out of specification rotor –
It is not at all recommended to recondition the brake disc.
If the rotor requires only minor cleanup of rust, scale or minor scoring
then use abrasive disc to clean up the rotor face.
Caution:
Do not go below the minimum specified thickness of 21 mm.
Please ensure that whenever the disc is removed from the hub, then
while fitting it back. Use the sealant METALOCK 343 or ANR124 from
FEVICOL on the disc mounting bolts thread. Use new spring washers.
Failure to do so may cause the mounting bolt to work loose.

Page 27 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Working principle, Assembly & dismantling of the Rear Brake –
This brake is designed for use on rear wheels and is equally efficient in
both forward and reverse direction of movement. A mechanical lever
mechanism is incorporated for normal hand brake operation. The
feature of this brake is that the brake shoe adjustment takes place
automatically when the service brake is applied.
The leading and trailing shoes are connected at one end by a two-
piston wheel cylinder and an adjuster assembly. The adjuster assembly
consists of a male and female push rod with an adjuster nut operated
by a pawl.
Coupled on the trailing shoe is a hand brake lever, which pivots on a
pin at the wheel cylinder end of the shoe.
A spring dowel fitted at the leading shoe provides a pivot for the pawl
lever , which is retained in position by a spring hooked on to the web.
The hand brake cable passes through a hole in the back plate, and the
slotted cable end fits in the end of the hand brake lever. When the
hand brake is applied, the cable pulls the lever and this movement is
transferred via the adjuster assembly to the shoes, which move
outwards onto the drum.
Page 28 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
When the foot brake is operated, both the shoes are pushed on to the
drum by the wheel cylinder pistons. As the shoe linings wear, the
outward movement of the shoes exceeds a predetermined amount and
the pawl pivots on the spring dowel to rotate the adjuster nut. This
action lengthens the adjuster assembly sufficiently to reduce the
clearance between the brake shoes and drum to the desired minimum.
The adjustment is repeated, whenever necessary, according to the rate
of lining wear.
Dismantling & assembly consist of:
Shoe removal & Wheel cylinder overhaul –
For removal and refitting the brake

liner. Refer to Rear Brake Liner
replacement section.
Disconnect the brake Bundy tubes.
Remove the rubber boots at the

ends of the wheel cylinder.
Remove the pistons along with the

spring.
Check the bore of the cylinder for

any pitting or scuffing- if so then
the wheel cylinder will need to be
replaced.
Check the piston for any deep
scoring or scuffing.
Before assembly clean the wheel
cylinder and piston with alcohol or
clean brake fluid.
Page 29 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Do not attempt to clean with any
mineral oil. Any trace of it left
will contaminate the brake fluid
and reduce the life of the all the
rubber components of the
hydraulic system.
It is advisable to fit the parking

brake cable on the slot in the
trailing shoe before assembling it
on the back plate
Before refitting the brake drum
check that the drum thickness has
not come below 8.20 mm.
A thin brake drum will flex during
braking reducing the braking
efficiency and also it will cause
improper functioning of the
parking brakes.
Working principle , Assembly & Dismantling of the Master Cylinder –

Page 30 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
The centre Flow master cylinder, Suitable for ABS system is made of
aluminium body with the brake fluid reservoir coupled on to the Master
cylinder.
The Tandem Master Cylinder is designed to operate dual line hydraulic

systems .It consists of two independent hydraulic chambers working in
series and should one chamber or circuit develop a fault, the other
remains operative.
In the normal-“Brakes-off” position, the brake fluid can flow

unrestricted between the dual line systems and separate chambers in
the integral fluid reservoir. Fluid movement to the Independent
cylinders is controlled by two valves-(centre valves) ; hence CF/ CF
Master cylinder. When the brakes are applied the push rod pushes
Master Cylinder primary plunger of the bore.
This master cylinder is divided in to two chambers .The primary train is

composite assembly and is resting on stop washer through a connecting
pin. Connecting pin is rectangular in section and has a hole at centre.
One end of the valve stem passes through this hole. The connecting pin
is assembled in to the circular hole on primary plunger.
The poppet valve train consists of poppet valve assembled on the valve
stem. This composite assembly is ahead upon by a valve spring. The
end of the valve spring is resting on the distance sleeve. The distance
sleeve is held rigidly with the plunger by 6 or 8 crimps on the plunger.
A similar arrangement is provided for secondary train also. The

secondary plunger has a centre slot into which the stop pin
reciprocates. A cover plate is assemble in-between the secondary
grommet and connecting pin to prevent falling off of connecting pin
from cylinder body. This plate also acts as a baffle and reduces the
velocity of fluid jet that will emerge form secondary feed ports on
return.

Page 31 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Secondary and primary plunger train moves as a composite assembly. At
this juncture the poppet valve (centre valves) of both primary and
secondary close the respective sealing faces of the plunger and
pressure is developed.
During further stroke of the primary plunger, the primary spring is

compressed and pressure is developed. The pressurised fluid is forced
though pipelines to the calipers and wheel cylinders.
When the brake is released, the master cylinder plungers move back
creating partial vacuum in front of poppet valves (centre valves)
deseating by deflecting poppet spring and the port are opened and the
brake fluid can again move unrestricted between separate systems and
the fluid reservoir.
Servicing of Master Cylinder –
As the TMC is of CV/CV (Center Valve type) design ; the TMC can be
serviced using only Major Repair Kit. The assembly procedure is in the
reverse order of disassembly.
Stop Pin
Page 32 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
1. Remove the Reservoir Fixing Pin by tapping it carefully.

2. Remove the Reservoir Assembly from grommets.
3. Using a blunt edge screw driver; remove the reservoir grommets.
4. Press the Primary Piston in the bore using a hylem rod & remove
the circlip.
5. Gently remove the Primary Piston assembly.
6. Hold the TMC in upside down condition & by pressing Secondary
Piston gently; remove the stop pin from secondary feed port of
TMC assembly. ( If any problem is observed while removing the
stop pin ; push the Secondary Piston gently using a hylem rod &
gently tap the TMC from the Secondary Feed port side on a
wooden block.)
7. Remove the Secondary Piston assembly.
Caution –
Use only fresh brake fluid for cleaning.
If contamination is observed in the seals (seals would have swollen and
the size would have enlarged compared to the new seals) ensure all
rubber parts in the system including rear wheel cylinder seals, front
caliper seals and the front and rear rubber hoses must be discarded and
the entire system to be flushed with new brake fluid.
ENSURE THAT THE TMC FLANGE SURFAE IS FREE FROM DIRT,DENT & BURR BEFORE
MOUNTING IT ON TO THE BOOSTER.

Page 33 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
NOTE –
1. It is essential that reservoir cap must be removed and cleaned.

While assembling the reservoir cap ensure the presence of filter in
the reservoir.
2. After fitting TMC on to the vehicle / vacuum booster , the outlet
pipes are to be connected and torque tightened.
Working principle of the brake booster –
Note -- The Booster is a non- serviceable Unit & it should never be

tampered with.
Ensure booster out put rod is correctly aligned to the primary piston
bore during the coupling of TMC to the booster.
The Scorpio vehicle is equipped with a Tandem type vacuum booster to

assist driver’s effort. This is achieved by using vacuum from the vacuum
pump provided on alternator in case of diesel engines & from inlet
manifold in case of petrol engines.
A pair of diaphragms is provided between the two shells of the booster

& difference of pressure on two sides of diaphragms ( one side vacuum
Page 34 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
& other side atmospheric pressure ) gives mechanical advantage. This
amplifies the driver’s pedal effort while braking.
The booster assembly & TMC assembly are coupled with the help of
two nuts & washer. The meting dimensions of booster & TMC are
factory set. Hence –
Do not alter the height of the output rod of the Vacuum Booster unit
at any stage and ensure Booster out put rod is correctly aligned to
the primary piston bore during the coupling of TMC to the booster.
Parking Brake -- Description, Setting –

The parking brake is cable actuated and acts on the rear brakes.
On applying the parking brake the parking cables are pulled and they
act on the trailing shoes at the lower end. Since the shoe is pivoted on
top it result in actuation of the trailing shoe. Due to the scroll plate the
force also gets transmitted to the leading shoe.
Based on the slackness in the system the parking brake is manually

adjusted by readjusting the adjusting stud and lock nut.
Specifications & Wear data –

Disc pad Usable 8.5 max
thickness
Replace disc pad if 9 mm

worn out thickness
less than

Page 35 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Disc pad Material Rane R808 asbestos free
Rotor thickness 24 mm
Minimum disc 21 mm
thickness
Runout of rotor 0.12 mm

face- permissible
limit

Page 36 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Disc thickness ± 0.012 mm

variation allowed
Rear Drum thickness 8.20 to 8.35 mm
Minimum thickness 8.20 mm

of brake drum
Maximum taper/ bell 0.05 mm

mouthing of brake
drum
Rear brake lining 3.5 mm to 4.3 mm

Usable thickness

Page 37 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Replace when lining 0.2 mm.
thickness falls below
Minimum Usable
thickness of
Brake shoe Lining Sundaram Asbestos free

Material 3691
Setting length 92.5 mm

(By setting gauge)
Master cylinder I.D 26.99 mm
Wheel Cylinder I.D 25.4 mm
Wheel Cylinder I.D
Brake disc O.D 298 mm

Page 38 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector

Rear Drum I.D 282.2 mm
Boost ratio-tandem 7.5

booster
Booster size
Tandem 8 + 9 inch
Clearance
Adjustment- Front Automatic
Rear Automatic
Free Play of the 3 mm
Brake Pedal

Page 39 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Description Torque Value

Front Brake Caliper Mounting Bolts 24 Nm (18 lbf-ft)
Sliding Pin Bolts 27 ± 5 Nm (20 ± 4 lbf-ft)
Banjo Bolt - Caliper 24 Nm (18 lbf-ft)
Brake pipe connectors – Master 18 ± 4 Nm (13 ± 3 lbf-ft)
Cylinder
Vacuum Booster – Mounting Nuts 21 ± 7 Nm (15 ± 5 lbf-ft)
Brake Pipe connectors – Wheel 21 ± 7 Nm (15 ± 5 lbf-ft)
Cylinder
LSPV Banjo Bolt 24 ± 2 Nm (18 ± 1 lbf-ft)
LSPV Brake Pipe Connectors 18 ± 4 Nm (13 ± 3 lbf-ft)
EHCU Assembly Mounting bolts 57.5 ± 2.5 Nm (42 ± 2 lbf-ft)
EHCU Mounting bolt 11 ± 1 Nm (8 ± 1 lbf-ft)
ECU – CIM Screws 2.8 ± 0.8 Nm (2 ± 0.5 lbf-ft)
EHCU Port - Brake Line Fittings 11 ± 1 Nm (8 ± 1 lbf-ft)
Front - Wheel Speed Sensors 20 ± 3 Nm (15 ± 2 lbf-ft)
Mounting Bolt
Rear Differential Speed Sensor 20 ± 3 Nm (15 ± 2 lbf-ft)
Mounting Bolt

Page 40 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Special Tools --
Tool for removal of Brake shoe

hold down spring
MST – 570
Tool for removal of return

spring.
MST – 569
Specification:
Castrol: DOT 3
Page 41 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
TVS Girling: DOT 3
Sealant:
METALOCK 343 or ANR124 from FEVICOL

Page 42 of 42
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
ABS BRAKES
1.0 DESCRIPTION
2.0 FUNCTION
2.1. Brake Stop Light Switch
2.2. Electronic Hydraulic Control Unit (EHCU)
2.2.1. Isolation
2.2.2. Dump
2.2.3. Accumulator
2.2.4. Pump & Motor
2.2.5. Noise Attenuator
2.3. Wheel Speed Sensor
2.4. Cluster Lamps
2.5. Diagnostic Connector
2.6. Pedal Feel
2.7 Dynamic Rear Proportioning (DRP)
3.0 OPERATION
3.1. Normal Braking
3.2. ABS Braking
4.0 INSTALLATION
4.1. Front Left Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS-FL)
4.2. Front Right Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS-FR)
4.3. Rear Wheel Speed Sensor (Differential Case)
4.5. Installation of ECU
5.0 Torque chart
6.0 System bleeding
7.0 Diagnostic & testing – ABS
8.0 Service
8.1. Serviceable Parts List
8.2. EHCU Removal
8.3. Removal of ECU
8.4. WSS Removal
8.4.1. Front Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS-FL & FR)
8.4.2. Rear Differential Speed Sensor
9 Index of terms used.
All copyrights reserved by Scorpio VLX ABS

Mahindra & Mahindra Ltd

Page no.1 of 26
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
1.0 DESCRIPTION
The system provides three channel ABS pressure control to the front
and rear brakes. One channel controls the rear wheel brakes and the
two remaining channels control the front wheel brakes individually.
The main components of the ABS system are
¾ Speed Sensor Unit (SSU), and the sensor wheels
¾ Electronic Hydraulic Control Unit (EHCU) consists of
o Electronic Control Unit (ECU) and
o Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU).
When the brake is applied, hydraulic fluid is routed from the Master
cylinder to the Front & Rear Brakes through the ABS-EHCU. The
Primary and Secondary outlet of the Master Cylinder is connected to
the EHCU inlet. The EHCU outlet is connected to the Front Left, Front
Right and the Rear Brake circuit. The Electronic Control Unit (ECU)
monitors the Front Left, Front Right Wheel Speed and Rear Differential
speed through the Speed Sensors. If a wheel is about to lock-up, the
ECU signals the concerned cartridge (Valve) in the EHCU. The valve
modulates the hydraulic brake pressure to the respective wheels to
prevent wheel lock-up.
2.0 FUNCTION
2.1. Brake Stop Light Switch

The ECU keeps monitoring the input from the speed sensors
continuously. Though the ABS cycle gets initiated when the ECU finds
a wheel slip condition, the commencement of ABS activity begins when
the ECU receives signal from the Brake Stop Light Switch. In case of
Brake Stop Light switch failure, the ECU still functions, if it finds a
deceleration situation and wheel slip situation.

The Electronic Control Unit (ECU) and the Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU)
are integrated together and called as the EHCU. The HCU consists of a
valve body, low-pressure accumulators, inlet valves, outlet valves,
pump, motor and noise attenuators. The operation of the valves and

Page no.2 of 26
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
the motor are controlled by the ECU, which receives input from the
Speed sensors. The ECU contains the necessary hardware and software
to process the input signals and trigger the HCU accordingly.
ECU
FL-M12X1.5
HCU
FR-M11X1.5
REAR-M10X1
I/P-Ft.-M10X1
I/P-Rr.-M12X1.5
MOTOR
2.2.1. Isolation
The inlet valve is a Normally Open Valve. Under Normal braking

conditions, the fluid from the master cylinder passes through this inlet
valve and reaches the outlet. If the information from the wheel speed
sensors indicates excessive wheel deceleration (imminent lockup), the
first step in the antilock sequence is to isolate the brake pressure
being applied by the driver. Thus, with the inlet valves closed, further
unnecessary increases in the brake pressure will be prohibited. If
required the valve is pulsed for pressure increase in the brakes.
When the brake switch opens, the inlet valve is turned off and fluid
may return to the master cylinder.
2.2.2. Dump
The outlet valve is a Normally Closed Valve. During an ABS cycle, if

the brake pressure has to be reduced to recover the wheel from
slipping, the valve is opened for certain duration and accordingly the
pressure at the brakes gets reduced. If required, the valve is opened
and closed several times, to control the deceleration of the wheel.

Page no.3 of 26
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
2.2.3. Accumulator
During an ABS cycle, when the outlet valve opens to reduce the
pressure at the brakes, the extra fluid from the brakes gets dumped
into the Accumulator. This fluid is used to re-apply pressure to the
brakes, if required during the ABS cycle. Remaining fluid returns to
the reservoir when the brake is OFF. A portion of the fluid also primes
the pump. At the end of the antilock stop, when the driver releases
the brake pedal, the motor will remain running for a short time to help
drain any fluid in the Accumulator.
2.2.4. Pump & Motor
The pump provides the volume needed during the “Re-apply” stage
and is operated by a DC Motor. At the end of the antilock stop, when
the driver releases the brake pedal, the motor will remain running for
a short time to help drain any fluid in the Accumulator.
2.2.5. Noise Attenuator

During an ABS cycle, when the brake pressure is increased, by pulsing
the inlet valve and pumping fluid from the Accumulator, an Attenuator
(Rubber damper) takes up the pulsations and minimizes the pedal
pulsation and Noise.
2.3. Wheel Speed Sensor

The Wheel Speed Sensor works on Hall effect principle. These sensors
can be used to find the speed of any rotating member. The sensor
reads the tooth on the Toner Ring and produces an output signal
proportional to the associated wheel speed.
2.4. Cluster Lamps

The ECU drives the warning lamps in the cluster, whenever there is a
malfunction. Under normal conditions, during ignition ON, the lamps
will be ON for few seconds and then go OFF. If the lamps continue to
glow, then the ABS system needs to be diagnosed to find the fault.
Before connecting the Diagnostic connector, check if the Parking brake
is ON. If yes, release the parking brake and see if the bulbs are OFF.
If not, then continue with ABS system Diagnostics.

Page no.4 of 26
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
2.5. Diagnostic Connector

The Diagnostic Connector is a standard OBD II connector. Whenever a
diagnosis needs to be performed, the Diagnostic Tool has to be plugged
into the Diagnostic connector. The diagnostic tool has to be switched
ON and then the instructions appearing in the tool has to be followed.
Once the communication is established the ECU will send the Trouble
code or Fault ID details to the tool.
2.6. Pedal Feel

During an ABS cycle, when the inlet valve is activated and cuts-off the
communication between the master cylinder and the brakes, the pedal
becomes very hard. This is expected and normal. Also, during the
pressure increase sequence, when the inlet valve is pulsed open to
allow master cylinder pressure to reach the brakes, the driver may feel
slight pedal pulsation, or pedal drop. This is normal and expected
2.7 Dynamic Rear Proportioning. (DRP)
DRP controls rear brake pressure to maximize brake balance efficiency.

The activation of DRP is based on wheel slip comparison of the front
vs. rear. The control is modified to take care of the conditions when
the wheels are turned and negotiating rough roads. The rear brake
pressure is increased or decreased based on wheel slip (front vs. rear).
DRP resumes control after ABS activation.
The advantage of DRP is that it assures the vehicle remains rear skid
limited under all loading conditions. It is able to achieve a brake
balance that is more efficient than a hydraulic proportioning valve.
The Operation of DRP goes unnoticed by the driver in most conditions,
as there is not pedal pulsation when the DRP is active.
3.0 OPERATION
3.1. Normal Braking

During normal brake application, pressure is applied through the brake
pedal and fluid comes from the master cylinder into the EHCU. The
fluid travels through the normally open inlet valve into the brakes.

Page no.5 of 26
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
The pump does not turn on, and the LPA and attenuators are empty of
residual pressure.
Even though the ABS is passive during normal braking, the EHCU
constantly monitors wheel sensor inputs for rapid deceleration. If the
system were disabled, the driver would always have foundation brakes.
The normally open inlet cartridge and normally closed outlet cartridge
would remain in these positions to allow fluid pressure to reach the
brakes.
3.2. ABS Braking
If the information from the wheel speed sensors indicates excessive

wheel deceleration (imminent lockup), the first step in the antilock
sequence is to isolate the brake pressure being applied by the driver.
Thus, with the inlet valves closed, further unnecessary increases in the
brake pressure will be prohibited. Once the pressure is isolated, it
must be reduced to get the wheels rolling once again. This is
accomplished by dumping a portion of the brake fluid pressure into an
Accumulator. A portion of the fluid also primes the pump. The outlet
cartridges are operated independently to control the deceleration of
the wheel. To obtain optimum braking, the reapply sequence is
initiated. The isolation valve is momentarily pulsed open to allow
master cylinder and pump pressure to reach the brakes. The driver
may feel slight pedal pulsation, or pedal drop. This is normal and
expected. At the end of the antilock stop, when the driver releases
the brake pedal, the motor will remain running for a short time to help
drain any fluid in the Accumulator. While the fluid drains back into
the system, the Accumulator springs help force the piston back to their
original position. When the brake switch opens, the inlet valve is
turned off and fluid may return to the master cylinder.
During antilock braking, the solenoid valves contained in the HCU are
opened and closed as needed. The valves modulate the brake pressure
during an ABS cycle.


Page no.6 of 26
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
The brake pressure modulation occurs in three stages – Pressure

decrease, pressure hold and pressure increase or “Re-apply” stage.
During the ABS cycle, the Accumulators in the valve body store extra
fluid released to the system. The pump provides the volume needed
during the “Re-apply” stage and is operated by the motor
Isolation Mode (Pressure Hold)
Every time the driver applies the brakes, the ECU is signaled to
prepare for a possible ABS event. If too much braking force for the
given road conditions is generated, the ECU reads the information from
the speed sensor(s) as excessive wheel deceleration, and begins the
ABS sequence.
The first step is to isolate the brake pressure being applied by the
driver. The ECU closes the isolation valve, preventing additional brake
fluid pressure from reaching the brake circuit(s). This is achieved by
energizing the coil that is directly over the isolation valve causing the
plunger to close the orifice, shutting off fluid flow to the locked
wheel(s). Although each channel of the system can operate
independently, once any front wheel sees excessive deceleration, both
front isolation valves are closed.


Page no.7 of 26
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Dump Mode (Pressure Release)
Once the pressure is isolated, it must be reduced to allow the wheels

to roll again. This is accomplished by dumping a portion of the fluid
pressure into a Low Pressure Accumulator (LPA).
With very short pulses of opening and closing the dump valve(s), brake
fluid is removed from the channel(s) and dumped into an LPA. This
lowers brake pressure at the brake(s) and allows the wheel(s) to begin
rolling again. Dump valves of each channel are operated
independently.
The ABS system is still in isolation mode during the dump mode. The
motor is turned on to allow the pumps to remove brake fluid from the
LPA’s. A portion of the fluid stored in the LPA’s is used to prime these
pumps.


Page no.8 of 26
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Reapply Mode (Pressure Increase)
The reapply mode is initiated to increase brake pressure. The isolation

valve is momentarily opened to allow master cylinder and pump
pressure to reach the brakes. This controlled pressure rise continues
until excessive wheel deceleration occurs or until the brake pressure
equals the master cylinder output pressure. The driver may feel pedal
pulsations, which is an operating characteristic of this type of system.
The attenuator located in the HCU, acts as a shock absorber to soften
this feedback.
As pressure is reapplied to the brakes, the wheels begin to slow down.

If the ECU detects excessive wheel deceleration again, the ABS cycle
will repeat. This controlled cycle occurs quickly, allowing several ABS
cycles to occur every second. It is a much faster and more controlled
method of “pumping the brake pedal”. The cycles will continue until
the driver releases the brake pedal or the ECU determines ABS is no
longer necessary.


Page no.9 of 26
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Brake Release
At the end of the ABS event, the motor will remain running for a short
period of time to allow the pumps to remove brake fluid from the
LPA’s. As the fluid returns to the master cylinder, the LPA return
spring forces the piston to its normal (home) position
NOTE: The three modes mentioned above, do occur but not

necessarily in the order listed every time.


Page no.10 of 26
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
4.0 INSTALLATION
4.1. Front Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS)
A1
A2 A3 5
2
A view of the WSS is shown in the Figure below.
A1
1
2
3
1. Insert the clips into the anchoring points A4 – A1.

2. Install the WSS (2) into the mounting hole in the Knuckle (3).
3. Insert the WSS mounting bolt (1) to the Knuckle (3) and tighten to
the required Torque.
4. Reconnect the electrical connector (4).


Page no.11 of 26
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
A2
A3
Ensure that the air-gap (Between the sensor read face & Toner Ring)
is within 0.6 to 2.0 mm. If the gap exceeds this value, the
performance of the sensor is affected; hence the performance of
ABS will be inhibited. The WSS is not adjustable. If the air-gap is
not within these specifications, then either the WSS or other
components may be damaged.
Front Sensor:
Do’s Don’ts
Install the sensor into the Do not push it in with any hard
mounting hole in the Knuckle. material.
Insert the Sensor mounting bolt & Do not leave the sensor loose.
tighten to the required Torque. It will lead to vibration issues and
lead to malfunction of the ABS
system.


Page no.12 of 26
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Insert the clips into

the Do not leave the cable loose.
anchoring points. If loose, it may foul with other
vehicle parts during vehicle running
condition or during a turn.
Ensure that the sensor is seated In case the Sensor does not fully get
all the way into the mounting seated, do not hammer it inside the
surface. This will ensure that hole.
the gap between the sensor read If the gap exceeds the specified
face & Toner Ring is within the value, the performance of the
specifications. sensor is affected; hence the
performance of ABS will be
inhibited.
The sensor is not adjustable.
4.2. Rear Wheel Speed Sensor (Differential Case)
Please refer Figure below, showing a view of the Rear Differential

Speed Sensor.
O Ring
6
8
7
1. Install O-Ring on sensor (if Ensure that the air-gap (Between


Page no.13 of 26
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
removed). the sensor read face & Toner Ring)

2. Insert sensor (6) in is within 0.6 to 2.0 mm. If the gap
differential housing (7). exceeds this value, the performance
of the sensor is affected; hence the
3. Install the Sensor mounting performance of ABS will be
bolt (8) tighten to the inhibited. The WSS is not
required Torque. adjustable. If the air-gap is not
4. Connect harness to sensor within these specifications, then
(9). either the WSS or other components
may be damaged.
5. Lower the vehicle.
Rear Sensor:
Do’s Don’ts
Remove the Protective Plug fitted Do not push it in with any hard
in the Sensor mounting hole in the material or forcefully with hand
Differential housing. or hammer.
Clean the surface. Ensure there
are no burr or foreign particle in
the mounting location.
Insert sensor in differential
housing.
Insert the Sensor mounting bolt & Do not leave the sensor loose.
tighten to the required Torque. It will lead to vibration issues and
lead to malfunction of the ABS
system.
Ensure that the ‘O’ ring in the In case the Sensor does not fully
sensor has gone in fully and the get seated, do not hammer it
sensor is seated all the way into inside the hole.
the mounting surface. This will If the gap exceeds the specified
ensure that the gap between the value, the performance of the
sensor read face & Toner Ring is sensor is affected; hence the
within the specifications. performance of ABS will be
inhibited.
The sensor is not adjustable.


Page no.14 of 26
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
17
13
18
c
11
12
10 b
a
16
14
15
1. If the Grommet (18) has been removed, install it in the Bracket

(16).
2. Assemble the EHCU (10) in the Bracket (16).


Page no.15 of 26
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
3. Insert the EHCU mounting bolt and washer (17) in the Bracket (16)
and tighten it to the specified torque.
4. Place the EHCU assembly with the Bracket (16) in the vehicle.
5. Insert the Bracket Mounting bolts (14 & 15) and tighten to the
specified torque.
6. Re-connect the electrical harness connector (12) to the ECU (11).
7. Re-connect the brake lines (13) to the EHCU (10) and tighten to the
specified torque.
8. Re-connect the battery cable to the battery.
9. Bleed the brake system.
NOTE: If the ECU is being replaced with a new ECU, it must be

reprogrammed with the use of a scan tool.
4.4. Installation of ECU

1. Insert the ECU (11) in the HCU (10).
2. Insert the ECU mounting screws (a,b,c & d) and hand tighten in the
order a,b,c and d as shown in the Figure.
3. Then tighten to the specified torque in the same order.
4. Re-connect the electrical harness connector (12) to the ECU (11).
5. Re-connect the battery cable to the battery.
Do’s and Don’ts

ECU Handling:
Proper electro-static discharge (ESD) handling precautions must
be observed, especially near exposed printed circuit board.
Reference JEDEC (Joint Electron Device Engineering Council)
standard 625-A. People and equipment should be controlled to
guarantee the modules maximum ESD exposure does not exceed
1.5 KV.
Proper handling must be observed in order to keep the cure in
place gasket (CIPG) and thermal pads free of contamination or
damage. Non-compliance or damage may result in a compromised
seal or loss of module function.
Avoid spilling corrosive brake fluid on wiring.

Page no.16 of 26
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
General Don’ts:
• Do not expose any part of the ABS control system to excessive heat
or flame.
• Do not use any ABS component if it has signs of being dropped or
damaged.
• Do not repair any ABS component including wire harness and
connectors. Replace them, entirely, with new components.
EHCU:
Do’s Don’ts
Ensure that the correct EHCU as per If wrong part is used, it will
the vehicle configuration is taken for lead to deteriorated / Erratic
installation. performance of ABS.
Veh. BI P/N M&M P/N
Config.
M1 2WD 29061011
M1 4WD 29061012
N1 2WD 29061016
N1 4WD 29061013
Ensure the EHCU assembly is properly If the bracket is not fastened
fastened – 2 fastening on the wheel properly, it will lead to
arch & one fastening on the sidewall. vibration issues and lead to
Apply specified tightening torque. deteriorated / Erratic
performance of the ABS
system.
Connect the inlet & outlet brake tubes Beware of tube-nut wrong
in the correct ports. threading during brake line
Match the pipe nut colour to the installation.
coloured rings in the port
identification label.
Proper tube routing is

essential for performance and
safety of the system.


Page no.17 of 26
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Use Plastic clips for brake tube Do not use metal clip.
routing. It will lead to NVH issues.
Tighten the pipe nuts to the specified Use proper torque when
torque. attaching all fasteners and
brake lines.
Electrical Connections:
• Wiring routing issues and loose connections are common causes

of ABS service calls.
• Ensure proper electrical connections are made at sensors (FL, FR
& Rear) and EHCU assembly.
• Ensure that the Diagnostic Connector is secure in its place.


Page no.18 of 26
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
5.0 TORQUE CHART
Torque
Description
(N.m)
EHCU Assembly Mounting bolts 55 – 60
EHCU Mounting bolt 10 – 12
ECU – CIM Screws 2.2 – 3.6
EHCU Port - Brake Line Fittings 10 - 12
Front - Wheel Speed Sensors 17 - 23
Mounting Bolt
Rear Differential Speed Sensor 17 - 23
Mounting Bolt
6.0 SYSTEM BLEEDING
ABS system bleeding requires conventional bleeding methods plus use

of the scan tool. The procedure involves performing a base brake
bleeding, followed by use of the scan tool to cycle and bleed the HCU
pump and valves. A second base brake bleeding procedure is then
required to remove any air remaining in the system.

Page no.19 of 26
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
1. Perform base brake bleeding.

2. Connect scan tool to the K-Line Diagnostic Connector.
3. Follow the instructions displayed.
4. When scan tool displays “BRAKE BLEEDING” disconnect scan tool
and proceed.
5. Perform base brake bleeding a second time.
6. Top off master cylinder fluid level and verify proper brake operation
before moving vehicle.
7.0 DIAGNOSTIC & TESTING – ABS
The ABS performs several self-tests every time the ignition switch is
turned on and the vehicle is driven. The ECU monitors the system
inputs and outputs circuits to verify the system is operating properly.
If the ECU senses a malfunction in the system it will set a DTC (Fault
Code) into memory and trigger the warning lamp. If the warning lamps
in the cluster glow, then Diagnosis should be performed immediately
by an authorized service person. The diagnostic tool has to be
connected to the Diagnostic Connector C1, found below the steering
column & the tool has to be switched ON. Follow the instructions
appearing in the tool. Once the communication is established the ECU
will send the Trouble code or Fault ID details to the tool. Please refer
Appendix-1 for trouble shooting.
NOTE: The scan tool is used to

C1 diagnose the Antilock Braking
System. For test procedures
refer to the Diagnostic Manual.


Page no.20 of 26
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
8.0 SERVICE
8.1. Serviceable Parts List
None of the child parts in the ABS assembly are serviceable. Following
list gives the description of components, which can be replaced.
Sl. Description
No.
1 ABS Assembly
2 EHCU Assembly
3 HCU with Motor
4 ECU with Screws
5 Mounting bracket – EHCU
6 Mounting Accessories
7 WSS – Front
8 Rear differential Speed Sensor
8.2. EHCU Removal
1. Place a heavy rod on the brake pedal, such that it presses the
pedal. (This is to keep pressure on the brake system.)
2. Disconnect the battery cable from the battery.

Page no.21 of 26
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
3. Disconnect the brake lines (13) to the EHCU (10).

4. Disconnect the electrical harness connector (12) from the ECU (11).
5. Remove the Bracket Mounting bolts (14 & 15).
6. Lift the EHCU assembly with the Bracket (16) from the vehicle.
7. Remove the EHCU mounting bolt (17) from the Bracket (16).
8. Remove the EHCU (10) from the vehicle.
8.3. REMOVAL OF ECU
1. Disconnect the battery cable from the battery.

2. Disconnect the electrical harness connector (12) from the ECU (11).
3. Remove the ECU mounting screws (a,b,c & d) from the ECU.
4. Remove the ECU (11) from the EHCU (10).
8.4. WSS Removal

8.4.1. Front Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS-FL & FR)
1. Raise and support the

1 2 vehicle.
2. Disconnect the electrical
connector (4).
3. Detach the clips from the
anchoring points A4 – A1.
3
4. Remove the WSS mounting


Page no.22 of 26
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
bolt (1) from the Knuckle

(3)
5. Remove the WSS (2) from
the Knuckle (3).
A4
A3
A2
A1
8.4.2. Rear Differential Speed Sensor
6 8
7
1. Raise vehicle on hoist.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector (9)
3. Remove the Sensor mounting bolt (8) from the Differential Housing
(7)
4. Remove the Sensor (6) from the Differential Housing (7).


Page no.23 of 26
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
ABS Process Do’s and Don’ts
Service Bay / Ware-House / Material In-warding:
Rough handling: Modules should not be tossed into vehicles or

bounced around prior to assembly.
ABS modules have sensitive components that may be influenced by
rough handling.
Mating features such as connector pins and threaded ports can be
damaged and become out of tolerance.
Drop Policy: If a module is dropped from more than approximately 12”
height, it should be scrapped.
Impact drivers : some Use of screwdrivers that can generate high
frequency vibrations can affect certain components in the module.


Page no.24 of 26
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
9.0 Index of Common Terms Used
DTC : Diagnostic Trouble Codes
ABS Lamp: It is the yellow lamp with the ABS written (photo to be
inserted)
Parking Brake Lamp: The parking brake lamp & the FLWI lamp is a
combined red lamp. (Sketch required). The ABS errors will also be
shown through this red lamp.
DRP : Dynamic Rear Proportioning
Note: DRP is equivalent to electronic LSPV. It is active only when the

rear wheels are tending to lock.
ABS : Anti Lock Braking System
Note: ABS is active only in the extreme condition when the front wheel
lock is taking place. In normal operation the braking does not activate
the ABS functionality. Also the brake pedal pulsation when the ABS is
active is normal
Note: When the lock takes place normally the rear tend to lock first
hence initially the DRP kicks in. Then the second stage if the front is
locking then the ABS also becomes active.
Under severe panic braking the front wheels can lock first or all the
four wheels will tend to lock. Under this condition the ABS will come
into operation immediately.
WSS : Wheel Speed Sensor .


Page no.25 of 26
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Front Toner Wheel: Is mounted inside the disc.

Rear Toner Wheel: Is mounted on to differential case assembly &
serviced with differential case & not serviced individually.
EOL: End of the Line (Only in the assembly line)
Note : Clear all the DTC codes before giving the vehicle back to the
customer. Any unhealed code should be attended and then only the
vehicle to be released.
It is recommended that when ever the vehicle reports to the workshop,

the DTC codes should be checked.
The status of the code (healed or not present) when it came to the
workshop as well as before leaving the workshop, should be printed.
(Use the print command in the diagnostic, converts to a PDF file, later
the PDF file to be printed. This record should be kept in the vehicle
history and can be useful later.)
After clearing all the ABS related errors drive the vehicle and do at
least 5 ABS braking application and check if any errors are recorded.
Suggestion is that the vehicle speed should not exceed 50 Km/hr when
doing the panic braking to check ABS performance.
ISO : Isolation valve


Page no.26 of 26
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Steering
Contents
Description
Troubleshooting
Care of the system
In Car repairs
Dismantling & Assembly of the Steering Gear
Working principle of the Steering Pump
Specifications
Tightening Torques
List of the MSTs
Mahindra & Mahindra Ltd Scorpio VLX Steering

Page 1 of 28
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Description
The power steering system is a rack and pinion system. The engine driven
hydraulic –pump supplies oil to a control valve situated in housing that
supports the pinion shaft. Movement, imparted to the control valve from
the shaft in the steering column is via a torsion bar. This sensing bar
moves the control valve, which in turn directs the oil to one side or the
other side of the ram piston inside the steering rack.
The control valve is a rotary type spool valve controlled by the torsion
bar interposed between the steering shaft and pinion of the steering box.
The spool valve is a shaft with six flutes and a sleeve, which has six
internal axial grooves, encases this. Radial ports in the sleeve and shaft
pass the oil from the supply to the lines connected to the ram chamber.
A series of the splines between the shaft and the sleeve limit the twist of
the torsion bar to about 7 degrees in each direction; below this angle the
torque applied by the driver to the steering box is transmitted by the
torsion bar. This fail-safe feature provides a mechanical drive from the
steering shaft to the pinion in the event of any power system failure.
The amount of the twist of the torsion bar and the movement of the spool
valve is proportional to the effort applied by the driver. Initial power
steering assistance is obtained at about 0.5 degrees deflection of the bar
and this power rises progressively as the bar moves to about 4 degrees;
the point o maximum assistance.
When the wheel is in straight-ahead position, all the ports are open so oil
is allowed to flow through the valve and return to the reservoir.
As soon as the wheel is turned, the torsion bar is deflected; this allows
the spool valve to rotate relative to the sleeve, cutting off the oil flow
both to the reservoir and one side of the ram. At the same time the other
side of the ram is subjected to oil pressure, which builds up sufficiently
to move the road wheel and return the torsion bar to no – torque
position. During this stage the oil displaced from the uncompressed side
of the ram is returned to the reservoir.

Page 2 of 28
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
On occasion when the resistance to road wheel movement is excessive,

the oil pressures build up to its maximum. At this pressure a relief valve
fitted inside the pump opens and allows the oil to return to pump inlet.
The rack and pinion design is a simple design. However it is still

susceptible to various problems in particular to leaks. If the bellows are
ripped or are unable to keep the contaminant’s away then it can cause
damage to oil seal and subsequent leaks.
One complaint, which can be present, is that the steering may be stiff
and jerky when the unit is cold and as the vehicle is driven/ warmed the
power assist gradually comes back. It normally indicates that grooves
worn into the bore of the pinion aluminum housing by hard control valve
seals.
Wear in the centre housing causes the fluid to leak around the rack
piston. Causing either steering wander or lack of straight-ahead stability.
Another cause of steering wander and erratic control often accompanied
by clumping, thunking noise is the deterioration of rack mounting
bushings.
Fluid levels can be hard to locate. Sometimes you will see a low level in
the pump reservoir but no evidence of escaping liquid. Squeeze the
bellows and you will probably find that they are full of liquid. To confirm
if that side of the rack is the culprit, then remove the both the bellows,
clean the rack housing and then operate the system to observe the
seepage directly.
It should be mentioned that a rusty input shaft U joint or deteriorated

flexible textile/rubber coupling could imitate rack problems.

Page 3 of 28
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Caution: After attending to the repairs it critical that the system be
completely flushed completely. Disconnect the return line from the
pump and put in a container, then disable the injection (remove the
wire from the shut off solenoid) and crank the engine. Add fresh fluid
until you get a clear flow from the line. Take care that the reservoir
does not run dry during the flushing. Failure to do so will result in
premature failure of the repaired unit.)
The possible causes for the power steering complaints are tabulated
below:
Problem Possible Causes Corrections

Objectionable Noisy relief valve in There is some noise
Hiss hydraulic pump. Steering in all the power
gear noise valve noise is steering system. One
transmitted trough the of the most common
steering column or open-air is a hissing sound
passages in the area where most evident at
the column or controls pass stand still parking.
through the floor into the Hiss is a high
engine compartment. frequency noise that
is present in every
valve and results
from high velocity
fluid passing valve
orifice edges. There
is no relationship
between this noise
and the steering gear
performance. DO not
replace the
intermediate shaft or
the steering gear
unless the noise is
too objectionable.
Check the dashboard
seals between the

Page 4 of 28
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
drivers area and
under hood to
eliminate open
space/ gaps
Rattle or chuckle 1. Gear loose on frame. 9 Check the gear

noise in Steering mounting bolts.
Gear Torque the bolts
to specifications.
2. Steering linkage 9 Check the IBJ and
looseness. OBH for wear.
3. Pressure hose touching 9 Adjust the hose

other parts of the position. Do not
vehicle. bend the tubing
by hand.
4. Loose IBJ or OBJ 9 Replace.
5. Improper over centre- 9 Adjust to
clearance. A slight rattle specification
may occur on turns
because of increased
clearance off the high
point. This is normal and
clearance must not be
reduced below specified
limits to eliminate this
slight rattle.
Excessive wheel 1. Air in the steering. 9 Add oil to the
Kick Back or pump reservoir
Loose Steering and bleed.
2. Steering Gear Mounting 9 Tighten attaching
loose. bolts to the
specified torque.
3. Front wheel Bearings 9 Replace loose

Incorrectly adjusted or parts.
worn.

Page 5 of 28
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
4. Steering Gear Improperly 9 Adjust the wheel

adjusted. bearings or
replace as
required.
5. Damaged or worn steering 9 Adjust to
Gear. specifications
6. Worn or damaged rubber 9 Dismantle and
bushing for mounting assemble the
steering gear steering gear as
specified.
9 Replace the
rubber bushings.
Vehicle leads to 1. Front end misaligned. 9 Adjust to
one side or the specifications.
Other (keep in 2. Unbalanced steering gear 9 Replace the gear
mind the road valve. If this is the cause Valve.
condition and steering effort will vary
wind conditions.) light in direction of lead
Test the vehicle , and heavy in opposite
Going in Both direction.
directions , On a 3. Steering shaft rubbing 9 Align the column.
Flat road with the ID of the shaft
tube
4. Steering linkage not 9 Adjust as
level. required.
Momentary 1. Low oil level in Reservoir. 9 Add steering fluid

Increase in 2. Pump Belt slipping. as required.
steering Effort 9 Tighten or replace
When Turning the belt.
Wheel Quickly To 3. High Internal leakage’s ( 9 Refer to pump
the Right or Left Steering Gear or Pump) test.
Poor return of 1. Tyres under inflated. 9 Inflate to
Steering specified
pressure.
2. Lower coupling flange 9 Loosen the pinch

Page 6 of 28
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
against the steering gear bolt and
adjuster assemble.
3. Steering wheel rubbing 9 Adjust the

against directional signal steering column.
housing.
4. Tight or seized steering 9 Replace the
shaft bushing/bearings. bearings.
5. Steering joint or linkage 9 Relubricate/

binding. replace the joints.
6. Steering column 9 Align the steering
misaligned. column.
7. Lack of lubrication in the 9 Relubricate/
suspension ball. replace the ball
joints.
8. Improper front end 9 Check & adjust to
alignment. specifications.
9. Steering gear adjusted 9 Adjust the
too tight. preload.
10. Kink in return hose. 9 Replace the hose.
Steering wheel 1. Low oil level in Pump. 9 Add fluid as

Surges or Jerks required.
when Turning 2. Loose pump belt. 9 Adjust tension as
with engine per specification.
running, 3. Sticky flow control valve. 9 Clean the control
especially during valve or replace
Parking. the pump.
4. Insufficient pump 9 Refer to the
pressure/ power steering
System Test.
Hard steering 1. Low tyre pressures 9 Adjust the tyre
effort in both the pressure.
directions 2. Lack of lubrication is 9 Lubricate &
suspension or ball joint. relubricate at

Page 7 of 28
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
proper intervals.
3. Steering gear to column 9 Align the steering
misalignment. column.
4. Pump belt slipping. 9 Tighten or replace
belt.
5. High internal leakage. 9 Fill to proper level
and inspect for
leaks.
6. Sticky flow control valve. 9 Refer to pump

Pressure test.
7. Lower coupling flange 9 Replace or clean
rubbing against steering the valve.
gear.
8. Steering gear preload 9 Loosen the pinch
high. bolt and assemble
correctly.
9. Improper front end 9 Adjust the preload
alignment in Straight-ahead
position.
9 Check & adjust to
specifications.
Foaming Milky Air in the fluid and loss of Check for leak &
Looking Power fluid due to internal pump correct. Bleed the
Steering Fluid. leakage causing overflow system. Extremely
Low Level and cold temperature
Possible low will cause aeration
pressure problems if the oil
level is low. If oil
level is correct and
the pump still foams
then check for the
air leakage caused by
loose joint
Low oil Pressure 1. Check for kinks in the 9 Remove the kinks
due to Restriction hose. or replace the
in the Hose hoses.

Page 8 of 28
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
2. Foreign objects stuck in 9 Remove the
the hose. foreign objet or
replace the hose.
Chirp Noise in Pump belt slipping Tighten or replace
Steering Gear Belt
Belt squeal ( Pump belt slipping Tighten or replace
Particularly Belt
noticeable at Full
wheel Travel &
Standstill Parking)
Growl noise in 1. Scored pressure plate, 9 Replace Pump.
Steering Pump thrust plate or rotor
2. Extreme Wear of cam ring 9 Replace Pump.
Growl noise in 1. Low oil level 9 Add the power
Steering Pump steering fluid.
2. Air in the oil. Poor 9 Bleed the system.
pressure hose connection.
Rattle or knock 1. Pump Vanes sticking in 9 Replace pump,
noise in steering rotor slot flush system.
Pump 2. Pressure hose touching 9 Adjust hose
other parts of the position.
Vehicle.
Swish Noise in Faulty flow control valve Replace pump.
steering Pump
Whine Noise In Pump shaft bearing scored Replace pump.
Steering Pump
Low oil Pressure 1. Flow control valve stuck 9 Replace pump.
Due to Steering or inoperative
pump 2. Pressure plate not flat 9 Replace pump.
against the cam ring.
3. Extreme wear of the cam 9 Replace pump,
ring. flush system.
4. Air in oil. 9 Locate source of
leak & correct.
Bleed the system.
5. Low oil level 9 Add power
steering fluid as

Page 9 of 28
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
required.
6. Pump belt slipping 9 Tighten or replace
belt as required
7. Damaged hoses or 9 Replace as
steering gear necessary.
The lubricant level should be checked every 10000 Kms with the vehicle
unladen and in a level ground. The lubricant level should be between the
maximum and minimum mark. The fluid level should be checked with the
engine in off condition. If the oil level is excess it will tend to come out
from the filler cap in use lubricant meeting oils specification of ATF
(Automatic Transmission Fluid. The brand names have been specified in
the Operators Manual and also in the end of the Section.
In Car repairs –
The following repairs can be carried out without removing the

assemblies.
a) Removal and refitment of out board Joints (OBJ)
b) Greasing of the OBJ (In case the rubber gaiter is torn.)
c) Removal & Refitment of the Steering Wheel.
d) Checking for Steering Play.
e) Steering Wheel - Centralize
f) Bleeding the system.
a) Removal and refitment of Track rod ends/ Outer Ball Joint
Loosen the wheel nuts. Lift up the

vehicle and remove the front
wheels.

Page 10 of 28
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Slacken the track rod end lock

nut.
Remove the castel nut split pin and

remove the castel nut.
Remove the track rod end using
the special tool.
Remove the track rod end. While

removing the track rod end, make
a note of the number of tuns
required to remove the end.
While fitting back the end or
fitting a new end turn it back the
same number of threads
b) Greasing of the track rod end/Outer Ball Joint (Only if the rubber
gaiter is torn.)
After removal of the track rod end
Remove the circlip

Page 11 of 28
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Fill the joint with about 10 grams

of grease
Fit a new gaiter and put the lock
c) Removal & Refitment of the Steering Wheel
Remove the horn cover, using the

screw driver
Remove the lock nut, using the 22
mm socket
d) Checking and adjusting the Steering Play
After driving the vehicle in a

straight road, check the wheel
spokes for angular play.
25/30
degrees If more than 25 to 30 degrees then
check -Tie-rod end ball joint or
steering gear inner ball joint or
Lower arm ball joint or universal
joint
Replace the defective part/parts
Caution- While checking ensure
that the engine is in off condition
and wheels are in Straight Ahead
Position ( SAP position)

Page 12 of 28
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
e) Steering Wheel – Centralization

other words this procedure is only for fine-tuning the steering wheel
position not for gross error. If it is more 30 degrees then remove the
steering wheel and initially realign to less than 30 degrees.
To check for the centralization of the

steering wheel. Drive the vehicle on a
level road surface; note the angular
position (misalignment of the steering
wheel spokes.
Lift up the vehicle
Mark the position of the track rods and

the track rod ends
Slacken the track rod end lock nuts

and also remove the gaiter outer
retaining clips.

Page 13 of 28
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Clock
wise Anti
error clock Rotate both track rods in the same
direction approximately 30 degrees for
every 1-degree of steering
misalignment error.
If the steering wheel has an

anticlockwise angular error then both
track rods must be rotated clockwise-
when viewed from the left – hand side
of the vehicle
If the steering wheel has an clockwise

angular error then both track rods
Clock must be rotated anticlockwise- when
Anti
wise viewed from the left – hand side of the
clock
error vehicle
Check the front wheel alignment (Toe

In) after the steering wheel has been
centralized
f) Bleeding the system
Before starting the Bleeding operation, ensure that the Vehicle is in level
ground, and the reservoir is filled to the maximum specified.

Page 14 of 28
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
As with any hydraulic system ensure that the recommended fluids only
are used. Ensure that no dirt enters the system while topping up. Before
opening the reservoir cap, wipe the area with a cloth.
Caution: Ensure that the front

wheels are jacked up and wheels are
lightly touching the ground.
If this is not done then the steering

linkage and components will be
under undue stress.
Even with the wheels partly jacked

up, do not hold the steering in fully
locked position for more than 10
second. Failure to do so may damage
the pump beyond repairs.
Start the engine.
Rotate the steering wheel from lock to

lock 3 to 4 times.
Check if the oil in the reservoir has

dropped down drastically- if so check
for any leaks.
Check if any foaming/ frothing is

taking place.
Repeat the rotation from lock to lock
till the foaming subsides
If the foaming is not subsiding after ¾

Page 15 of 28
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
of the above cycle, check for the
tightness of the hoses in particular the
reservoir to the steering pump and
later the steering gear to reservoir.
The loose connection in these pipes
will allow air to sucked into the
system.
After completing the bleeding
operation, ensure that with the engine
running the oil level is between the
maximum and minimum mark
Close the cap
Dismantling & Assembly of the Steering Gear –
Using the Special Tool, hold the

steering gear in the vice.
Using the special tool remove the

steering gears pipes connecting
the control valve to the gear.

Page 16 of 28
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Remove the outer Ball Joint.
Loosen and dislodge the outer

clips holding the bellows with the
help of screw driver and pliers
Remove the bellows along with

the clips.

Page 17 of 28
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
If the bellow is having any
crack, or swelling then discard
them. It is also advisable to use
new clips along with the
bellows.
Note that the RHS and LHS

bellows are not equal.
Before removing the Inner Ball

Joint (IBJ). Cover the threads with
tape so that during handling and
reassembly they do not get
damaged.
Remove the claw washer after
opening it using screwdriver.
Remove the inner Ball joint
Remove the IBJ on the other side.
Caution: During assembly check

that the steering rack hole is not
clogged with grease. If the hole is
clogged, the pressure inside the
boot will change after it is
assembled and the steering is
turned.

Page 18 of 28
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Remove the bottom end cover,

used for controlling the preload
using the special tool.
Remove the endplay-controlling

plug. Note the condition of plastic
wear area. Remove the spring
Remove the end cap on the tube

side.
Remove the end bush (tube end)

Page 19 of 28
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Before removal of the control
housing the rack should be
pressed to the either end.(At the
extremes of the rack the
clearance with the pinion teeth is
more hence assembly and removal
is easy)
Remove the control housing

Remove the rack..
The Teflon piston seal should be

removed and refitted by fingers
only. Smear power steering oil on
seal before assembly.
To remove and refit the inner seal
use the special tool.

Page 20 of 28
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Caution: While refitting the rack
ensure that rack teeth do not
damage the inner seal in the tube
and the housing
To remove the pinion bearing use

the special tool.
For assembly also use the same
tool but the other end.
For removal and refitting the

pinion outer bearing use the
special tool.
Tap out the pinion from the

control housing using the special
tool.

Page 21 of 28
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Remove the bearing & the sleeve.
Push the pinion along with the

control housing.
While assembly fit the control

sleeve using the special tool.
Press the oil seal using the special

tool.
After the rotating torque has been
adjusted by using the end plug. It
has to be locked.

Page 22 of 28
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Press the oil seal at the tube end
using the special tool.
Fit the end plug (tube end) using
the special tool.
Fit the bottom plug using the 18-

mm socket.
Fit the inner ball joint

Fit the bellows.
Caution: ensure that the outer
clips are fitted on top of the
groove. (The rubber boot also has
a beading, which sits on the
groove.)
Caution: The tube side boot is
smaller than the control housing
side.
Working principle of the Steering Pump –
The steering pump is non-serviceable. Hence it cannot be repaired.
The pump is a constant flow, vane type incorporating a flow control valve
(with an integrated relief valve) and it is gear driven by engine. The
power steering pump consists of housing, drive shaft, cartridge assembly
& bearing(s) apart from the valve.

Page 23 of 28
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
As the pump rotates a vacuum is created at the inlet, which causes

atmospheric pressure to force the fluid in to pump from the reservoir. As
the rotor rotates, the inlet port closes and the fluid is trapped between
the vans. Further movement forces the fluid to be pressurized as the
profile of the cam ring constantly reduces the available volume. At the
minimum point of the profile the chamber opens into the outlet port.
The rotor is having 10 vanes, thus each rotation is equal to 5 pumping

action. The discharge rate of the power steering pump increases in
proportion to the pump speed increases.. The flow control valve is
provided to maintain the optimum flow of the supplied oil for power
steering operation, at all engine speeds. The relief pressure will open
when the system pressure exceeds the set value. This normally happens
when the steering wheel is turned and held in the lock position.
Specifications –
Description Value
Rack & Pinion, End Take Off,
Steering Gear Type
Integral Power Assisted
Steering Gear Make Sona Koyo
LH – 75 mm & RH – 75 mm,
Rack Travel (Steering Gear)
maximum
Overall Steering Ratio 20 : 1
Total Turns Available on Input
3.75
Shaft of the Steering Gear
No. Of Steering Wheel Rotations
3.6
(Lock to Lock)
Torque required on input shaft to
1.5 Nm
move the Rack (preload)
Normal Operating Pressure 85 bar
Steering Wheel Diameter 395 mm / 365 mm
Sliding Vane Type – Positive
Power Steering Pump
displacement

Page 24 of 28
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Pump Make Koyo
Pump Make Delphi
Clockwise when viewed from shaft
Direction of pump rotation
end
Pump Flow 8.5 LPM @ 1000 rpm
Pump – Pressure Relief 75 kg/cm2 0r 75 bar
Pump – Drive Gear driven
Wide Operating Speed – Pump 600 rpm - 6500 rpm
Wide Operating Temp. Pump &
- 40 ° C to + 120 ° C
Gear
In-built System
Flow Control cum Pressure Relief
7.5 +0.5 / - 0 Mpa.
Valve in Pump
8.5 ± 0.7 lit / min @ 1500 RPM
Oil capacity – System 0.8 lts. aprox.
Description Torque Value Nm (lbf-ft)

Steering Gear Centre Bolt 120 ±10 Nm (88 ± 7 lbf-ft)
Steering Gear Mounting Clamp 85 Nm (63 lbf-ft)
Bolts

Page 25 of 28
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
List of the MSTs –

MST – 547
Steering wheel puller
MST – 548
Steering stand
MST – 549
Tie rod end remover
MST – 550
Socket steering pump Nut

Page 26 of 28
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
MST – 551
Unit wrench –12 mm

MST – 552
Spanner power Steering Lock nut
MST – 553
Drift pinion assembly
MST – 554
Rack stopper wrench
MST – 555
Installer power Steering Oil End
Cap
MST – 556
Driver needle bearing

Page 27 of 28
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
MST – 557
Driver bearing rack Housing

MST – 558
Installer oil seal-Steering
MST – 559
Installer pinion Housing Upper
Pinion Oil seal
MST – 560
Installer oil seal Power steering.
The recommended brand names are
DEXTRON TEXMATIC 1278 / 1888 from CALTEX ATF
Capacity is 0.8 lts.

Page 28 of 28
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Description –
Immobiliser is a major security device to prevent the vehicle being

operated by an unauthorised person. An electronic immobiliser is part of
the engine control unit (ECU), and prevents the vehicle from being
started unless it recognises signals from a right remote key.
Immobiliser is now integrated part of existing CDL (Centre door locking)

unit.
System description –
• Existing CDL modified

• Engine ECU
Advantages –
• Enhanced security
• Immobilization through Engine Management system
Operating principle -
This is basically working on Radio Frequency. To activate the Immobiliser

vehicle has to be armed through remote. Once vehicle is locked through
remote, RF signal is fed to CDL unit and in turn CDL unit will send signal
to Engine ECU.
In case of unauthorised entry Engine ECU will receive a code from CDL
unit and will lock the vehicle accordingly.
If the key with the correct code is used, engine control unit is activated
and engine can be started.
Mahindra & Mahindra Ltd Scorpio VLX Immobiliser

Page 1 of 5
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
We are using the following security system –
Eng ine
RF Signal Management
Digitally Driven
System
Security ECU
System
ECU Software
Immobilization
10101001..1
Battery Starter
FI P
Motor
Relay

Page 2 of 5
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Key Benefits -
• Enhanced security for vehicle.

• Success over theft attempt is less
• Increased Customer Satisfaction
• Adaptable to any CRDe engine platform.
Electrical Layout & Location Of IMMOBILISER Units –
Shock Sensor
Precautions -
• If doors are not working properly with remote then contact service
person immediately.
• If vehicle is not starting, contact authorised service station.


Page 3 of 5
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Diagnostic Codes -
Code Error description Vehicle Behaviour

Error
Immobilizer Immobilizer The vehicle will not start and if
Signal Error control: indicates the driver tries for more than
that the received three times then the vehicle will
P1812 pattern and the get completely locked.
transmitted
pattern is not
correct
SRC High Vehicle will not start, even the
Communication
P1828 Error starter motor will not get
wire may open
activated
SRC Low Communication Vehicle will not start, even the
P1829 Error wire may be starter motor will not get
short activated
Signal is in Wrong The vehicle will not start and if
the error communication, the driver tries for more than
zone - Code three times then the vehicle will
received get completely locked.
P182A from CDL
may not be
correct
- Theft made
attempt.
Signal is in ECU is Locked Vehicle will not start
Immobilize Completely (ECU
zone Locked due to
P182B continuous
occurrence of 3
immobilizer
errors)

Page 4 of 5
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Note -
1. What happens to immobilizer , if the battery is disconnected –
• Normally in a battery disconnected condition, vehicle is Non

operation which includes, starter motor & Engine ECU etc.
• If the battery is connected again, Immobilizer will go to the

same state as in previous condition.(before battery removal)
Possible causes for Immobiliser not operating -
• Physical damage due to breaking of wire or short circuiting.

• Physical damage/ failure on CDL/GSM unit as a result proper
communication is not going to EMS ECU
• Damage/ failure in Input capturing circuit of Engine ECU
• Battery supply is not available to GSM
• Excess in wire length communication b/w GSM/CDL unit and Engine
ECU

Page 5 of 5
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Description –
Audio control on steering wheel allows the driver to operate the audio
system without any disturbance and movement, while driving the vehicle.
The system has four switches which are mounted on Steering wheel.
1. SEEK ( Scanning the different radio frequency, changing the track in

case of CD )
Press the SEEK switch once to go up by 0.05MHz on the radio station

frequencies.
Press the seek switch continuously for more than 3 Sec for AUTO Scan of
radio Station.
In CD/SD CARD/ USB modes, next track can be played by pressing the
switch once.
2. VOLUME + (Volume control)

To increase the volume by one point press the VOL+ switch.
3. VOLUME - (Volume control)

To reduce the volume by one point press the VOL- switch
4. MODE : To switch between different modes in Audio system. There

are five modes available in Audio.
When MODE switch is pulled once, next mode is selected in the following
sequence provided the required media are connected
- Tuner
- CD/MP3
- SD Card
- USB
- Auxiliary
Mahindra & Mahindra Ltd Scorpio VLX Audio

MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
In Case of absence of any mode USB/CD/SD Card, system will toggle
between tuner and auxiliary modes
Tuner and Auxiliary modes are available by default.
In case if CD is Loaded in Audio System then sequence will be;
Tuner Æ CD Æ AUX
If all medias are already inserted in Audio unit then sequence will be :
Tuner Æ CD Æ SD CARD Æ USB Æ AUX.
CAUTION!!!
AUDIO CONTROLS ON STEERING WHEEL

MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
CAUTION !!!!
• Do not place the removed faceplate or the faceplate case in areas

exposed to direct sunlight, excessive heat or humidity. Also avoid
places with too much dust or the possibility of water splashing.
• To prevent deterioration, do not touch the terminals of the unit or
faceplate with your fingers.
• To prevent a short circuit when replacing a fuse, first disconnect
the wiring harness.
• Do not place any object between the faceplate and the unit.
• Applying spray cleaner directly to the unit or wiping the faceplate
with a hard cloth or using a volatile liquid such as thinner may
scratch the surface or erase characters.
Note –
1) Press the Power ON/OFF button available on face plate to TURN

ON/OFF the Audio system. Turning ON /OFF of Audio system is not
available on Steering wheel switches.
2) In case of non functioning of Audio Control through steering wheel

switches, Audio can still be operated either through Face plate or
Remote.

MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
ELECTRICAL LAYOUT AND LOCATION OF AUDIO UNITS
Two 8 pole 8 pole Connector

Connectors

MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Electrical Circuit Diagram - AUDIO

MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector

MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Diagnosis -
Sr. Problem Cause Solution

No.
1. No sound can be T turned on Turn off
heard or
Volume is low The fader or balance Reset the fader or balance
settings are set all settings
the way to one side
2. Memorised station Leads are not Disconnect the power supply
is erased matched correctly and reconnect the wire
The fuse has blown with the car carefully
Makes noise when accessory power
the ignition is ON, connector
ACC,OFF positions
3. USB drive doesn’t Check its version/ Supported USB 2.0 version
play format type having FAT/FAT32 format
4. Preset stations are The car antenna is Pull the antenna out
not receivable not extended
5. Seek tuning is not The broadcast is too Use manual tuning
possible weak
6. Sound skips during The CD is scratched If scratched change the CD
CD play or dirty If dirty clean it

MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Introduction
Cruise control known as speed control or Autocruise is a system to

automatically control the speed of the vehicle. It enables the driver to
maintain a constant road speed without using the accelerator pedal. To
activate cruise, the vehicle speed must be greater than 40 km/h and
engine speed should be greater than 1200 rpm.
Need for the feature -
• Its usefulness for long drives across sparsely populated roads results
in better fuel efficiency.
• To maintain the lane speed limit.
Operating Principle -
Cruise Control system works on the closed loop system principal. System
controls the fuel injection of Engine depending on the feedback signal of
speed of the vehicle, to maintain the SET speed of vehicle.
Cruise
switches
Engine Clutch
ECU Brake
Acc. Pedal
Vehicle
speed
sensor
Engine
Mahindra & Mahindra Ltd Scorpio VLX Cruise Control

Page 1 of 12
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
System Description -
1. Switches on steering wheel.

2. Clock spring (Communication link)
3. Electronic Control unit (ECU)
8 Pole Ground
Connector Terminal
12 Pole
Connector
Clock spring

Page 2 of 12
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
The system has four switches –
Press SET+ to go into cruise mode.
1. SET (+) To increase the set cruising speed -
• Press and hold the SET (+) switch.

• It will increase the speed of the vehicle by 1.5Km/hr, while
vehicle is in Cruise mode.
• While in Cruise mode, if pressed continuously, vehicle speed
increases by 1.5Km/hr. e.g. if vehicle is running at the speed of
70 Km/hr in cruise mode ,on pressing set (+) once ,speed will
increase by 1.5 km/hr, if press continuously the speed will also
increase continuously in steps of 1.5 km/hr.
• Release the SET (+) switch as soon as the desired cruise speed
has been reached.
2. SET (-)To reduce the set cruising speed –
• Press and hold the SET (-) switch.

• It will decrease the speed of vehicle by 1.5Km/hr,while vehicle is
in Cruise mode.
• While in Cruise mode, if pressed continuously, vehicle speed
decreases continuously by 1.5Km/hr. e.g. if speed is 70 km/hr on
pressing cruise (-) once, speed will decrease by 1.5 km/hr, if
press continuously the speed will also decrease continuously in
steps of 1.5 km/hr.
• Release the SET (-) switch as soon as the desired cruise speed has
been reached.
• Do remember that cruise control system will not operate at
vehicle speed below 40 km/hr.

Page 3 of 12
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
3. RESUME/COAST (resume to the last preset speed) -
By pressing the RESUME/COAST switch, the last set cruise speed can be
resumed, provided the ignition switch is ON and the vehicle speed is
above 40km/hr. e.g. If the user activates the cruise at 90 Km/hr & runs
the vehicle. After some time, user deactivates or comes out from Cruise
mode. Here if user wishes to have the same cruise speed (i.e.90km/hr),
user may press RES/COAST button, which will re-activate the cruise mode
and vehicle cruise speed will be maintained at 90km/hr
4. CRUISE (Press “cruise” button to Disengage the cruise control)
The purpose of this switch is to deactivate the cruise application by

pressing the clutch or brake pedal, or when the cruise switch is pulled up.
The preset cruise speed in system memory will automatically get
cancelled when the ignition switch is turned off.
Clock spring (Communication Link ) & Engine ECU
• All the Steering Switches are connected to Engine ECU through

Clock spring.
• Clock spring is part of Steering & it acts as a communication link
between switches and engine ECU
• Clock spring takes all electrical inputs signals from steering
switches & feed to Engine ECU.
• Depending on various electrical signals from Switches, Engine
ECU takes the respective action related to the cruise application
Overtaking the vehicle in cruise mode -
Cruise Control will not work in 1st Gear & reverse gear.
2nd Gear or 3rd gear - ~30 km/hr

4th Gear or 5th gear - ~ 45 km/hr are the preferable speeds in each
gear above which the Cruise Control can be comfortably operated.

Page 4 of 12
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
If the foot is kept on Accelerator Pedal, then the Cruise Control function
is overridden & the input is taken from the Accelerator.
If the Accelerator Pedal is released before 20 seconds, then the Cruise

Control function will still be active & the system will return to Cruise
Control mode. If the Accelerator Pedal is released after 20 seconds, then
the system will not return to Cruise Control mode & the driver has to
reactivate the Cruise Control if owner wants to return to the Cruise
Control mode.
While driving with cruise control, never shift the gear to neutral [or]
to other gears, with out pressing the clutch pedal. Otherwise engine
will over run.
CAUTION -
• DO NOT use cruise control on slippery road surfaces

(rainy/icy/snow-covered), up-hill / down-hill driving.
• DO NOT use in heavy traffic where a constant speed can not easily
be maintained.
• If the SET PLUS button is pressed, the acceleration is felt to be too
fast & vehicle goes beyond control , then press brake or clutch
immediately for safety and to come out of cruise.
Care to be taken when vehicle is in Cruise Mode -
Though the system gives comfort on driving, driver has to be always in

alert condition to avoid accident due …..
ALERT CONDITIONS –
• Unpredictable Obstacles
• Sharp Turns
• Steering control
• Drowsy Feeling

Page 5 of 12
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Electrical Layout & Location Of Cruise Units -
Ground terminal
Clock spring 8
pole connector
Cruise buttons
12 pole
Connector

Page 6 of 12
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Electrical Circuit Diagram - Cruise Control

Page 7 of 12
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
CONNECTOR INFORMATION

Page 8 of 12
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Diagnosis -
Sr. Symptom Reason Cause Action
No.
1 Cruise 1.Due to non How to check the
mode not availability of 1.Clutch switch CLUTCH switch:
working signal from faulty • Check the voltage
or not clutch switch 2. Brake switch level between
getting brake switch faulty battery ground and
deactivat to ECU at K58 (brake out
ed. box).
• Clutch press
condition no voltage
i.e. open condition.
• Clutch in idle i.e.
not pressed it should
be 12volt.
If above ( a) condition
satisfy, clutch switch
operation is ok or else
switch is faulty.
How to check the BRAKE
switch:
• Check the voltage
level between
battery ground and
at K17 & K 80.
• Brake in press
condition voltage
should be 12 volt &
when brake in idle
condition open
condition i.e.
absence of 12 volt.
• If above condition
satisfy, brake switch

Page 9 of 12
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
operation is ok or
else switch is faulty
2 Cruise 1. Due to non 1. loose 1. pl check the proper
mode not availability of connection of connection of wiring
working signal from clock spring harness connector to clock
or not steering connector and spring connector
getting switches wiring harness
deactivat connector 2. pl check the clock
ed. 2. Clock spring spring if damaged replaced
damaged as per the standard
3. Steering procedure
Switches faulty
3. How to check the
working of steering
switches:
• pl connect the brake
out box at Engine
ECU wiring harness.
Do not connect the
other end of brake
out box to the
engine ECU. check
the resistance value
between K35 & k32 (
resistance w.r.t to
each switch is given
in below table.)
• if particular switch
or all switch do not
satisfy the condition
mentioned in table
• Pl. change the

steering switch
assembly with new

Page 10 of 12
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
one.
3 Cruise is Due to non 1.loose 1. pl check the proper

not availability of connection of connection of speed sensor
getting signal from speed sensor connector and vehicle
activated Vehicle speed connector wiring harness connector.
sensor 2.Speed sensor
faulty How to confirm the speed
sensor faulty:
• Pl run the vehicle to
see whether the
cluster shows the
speed of vehicle if
yes vehicle speed
sensor is said to be
ok. If not change the
speed sensor and
check with the same
procedure.
• Once cluster shows
the speed of vehicle,
service engineer can
check the cruise
mode as per the
procedure.

Page 11 of 12
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
TABLE for checking the resistance value w.r.t Steering switches -
Sr.no. Switch Switch condition Resistance in

ohms
1 All in idle Not pressed 4330 +/- 5%
condition
2 SET+ Pressed 810+/- 5%
3 SET- Pressed 420+/- 5%
4 Cruise off Pressed 150+/-5%
5 Coast / RES Pressed 1630+/-5%
TABLE for checking the voltage value w.r.t. Steering switches -
Voltage should be checked across K35 & K32
Sr.no. Switch Switch condition Voltage in volts

1 All in idle condition Not pressed 4.2 to 4.5volt
2 SET+ Pressed 2.6 to 3 volt
3 SET- Pressed 1.8 to 2.2 volt
4 Cruise off Pressed .87 to 1.1 volt
5 Coast / RES Pressed 3.4 to 3.8 volt

Page 12 of 12
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Introduction:
The primary applications of Rain Light Sensor are

1. Automatic Switching ON/OFF the wipers
2. Infinite control of the wiper speed relative to the amount of rain
3. Automatic Switching ON / OFF the headlamps in Low light/tunnel
condition
RLS provides luxury feature to customer by automatically controlling

Wiper & Headlamp system.
Need for the feature
In adverse weather conditions, this rain sensor reduces the strain on the
driver by automatically controlling the wiping process,
Also light sensor is extremely useful in conditions like tunnel entry and
low light condition in a day, thus increasing both driver comfort & safety.
System description
The system consists of:
• RLS Sensor
• Mounting Ring / Fixing Element
• ECU / Gateway (nothing but a controller) which receives data from
Sensor and accordingly activates & deactivates Wiping System &
Head-Lamp System (located below Driver Seat)
• “AUTO LIGHT” and “AUTO RAIN” Switches on Centre Bezel
Mahindra & Mahindra Ltd Scorpio VLX RLS

Page 1 of 17
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Rain/Light Sensor and mounting ring (fixing element)

Page 2 of 17
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Operating principle
Light Sensing
• The ambient light detection lens picks up the light / luminous

intensity in the vicinity of the vehicle.
• The frontal light detection detects the light / luminous intensity
directly in front of the vehicle.
• With intelligent software algorithm & considering difference
between ambient light detection lens & frontal light detection
length accordingly Head-lamps will get On & OFF.
Ambient light
detection
Front Light
Detection

Page 3 of 17
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Rain Sensing
• This Rain Light sensor is based on the principle of reflection and

refraction.
• This sensor has Emitters & Receivers.
• The sensor transmits infrared beams towards windscreen and

light bounces back from surface of the windscreen to the
receiver.
• The light bounces back from surface of the windscreen to the

receiver.
• If water in any form sticks on the outside surface of the

windscreen, it disturbs the Beams and microcontroller interprets
the data and determines the wiping speed.
Receiver Receiver
Emmiter Emmiter
Dry Windshield Wet Windshield

Reflection Reflection

Page 4 of 17
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
RLS Operation -
1. Turn ON the Ignition

2. To activate the “AUTO LIGHT ” feature, press switch with Auto light
symbol
3. The orange LED on the switch will be continuously ON indicating
that AUTO LIGHT feature is activated. To come out of the Auto
Light we have to press the switch once again.
4. To activate the “AUTO RAIN ” feature, press switch with Auto wiper
symbol .
• Once “AUTO RAIN” mode is activated, system will give one

WIPE on a Windshield and the orange LED on the switch will
be continuously ON indicating that AUTO RAIN feature is
activated.
• This feature will get deactivated either by turning off the
ignition or pressing the AUTO RAIN button.
Caution -
• In case of any damages / scratches to windshield, new sensor

needs to be installed/ assembled.
• Old sensor can not be used on the new windshield as it is
calibrated for a particular windshield.
• In case of any damage to Sensor, new sensor needs to be
installed/ assembled at authorised service stations because
sensor is a non-serviceable unit.
• Auto Head-lamps will remain “ON” until enough Light intensity
is not available. Once enough light is present, after 5 Sec
Head-Lamp will go OFF. This is a designed feature to avoid
false Switching ON / OFF of Headlamp.
• Do not put any band/tape outside the sensor on windshield.

Page 5 of 17
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
• Do not use any chemical to clean inner surface of front
windshield to avoid any damage to the sensor.
Limitations -
• There is a difference between Light intensity sensed by Sensor

& by Human eye. It may possible in the evening time Head-
Lamp will get on early as sensor senses it as a Low intensity.
This is absolutely a normal behavior. In case customer doesn't
require Light, he can switch OFF “AUTO LIGHT” mode
anytime.
• After sensing the water on windshield, wiping will start
automatically. It might possible that after wiping initiated you
can not see water on windshield but still wipers will keep on
wiping. This is because of the mist present on windshield.
Human eye can not see that but Sensor can sense it & it will
keep on wiping. This is absolutely a normal behavior. In case
customer doesn't require Wipe, he can switch OFF “AUTO
RAIN” mode anytime.
• Sensor can not detect difference between water & mud, ice,
snow, oil etc. In these cases sensor may not behave properly
and customer can switch OFF “AUTO RAIN” mode manually.
Follow me home lamp –
In order to help the driver / passenger, while getting out of the vehicle
during night time, the headlight will light up for maximum 30 seconds.
This feature will get activated only when “Auto Light” switch is pressed
which is mounted on centre bezel.
At low intensity, on turning off the ignition and door opening, this feature
will get activated for 30 seconds.

Page 6 of 17
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Electrical Layout & Location Of RLS Units -
Auto Light Switch
Rain/Light Sensor and mounting ring (fixing element)
Auto Light Switch Auto Wipe Switch

Page 7 of 17
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
RLS Sensor Fitment Procedure –

Page 8 of 17
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector

Page 9 of 17
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector

Page 10 of 17
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector

Page 11 of 17
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Electrical Circuit Diagram - RLS

Page 12 of 17
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Diagnosis -
Sr. Problem Cause Solution

No.
1. No automatic • “AUTO” • Check whether “AUTO” mode for
Wiping after mode not RLS is activated. (Put left lever of
Rain start activated Combination Switch in “AUTO”
mode as marked on Lever)
• No Power to • Make sure all electrical
controller connections (i.e. Controller,
Sensor) are connected.
2. No automatic • “AUTO” • Check whether “AUTO” mode for

Head-Lamp mode not RLS is activated. (Put left lever of
Switch-ON activated Combination Switch in “AUTO”
after entering mode as marked on Lever)
in Tunnel / • No Power to • Make sure all electrical
Basement / at controller connections (i.e. Controller,
Night Sensor) are connected.
3. No initial Wipe • RLS Gateway • Check whether RLS Gateway is

after putting connector is connected to W/H.
RLS in Auto not • Check whether RLS Sensor is
Mode connected. connected to W/H.
• RLS Sensor • Check whether Wiper circuit is ok
connector is as per TC4 check list for Wiping
not System.
connected • Check supply pin (Battery B+) for
RLS Sensor.
• Check Ground Pin of RLS Sensor.

Page 13 of 17
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
• Error in • Check crimping of Wiper in
Wiper circuit Connectors at Sensor & Gateway
End.
4. In “AUTO” Sensor sensing This is absolutely OK behaviour of
mode, Head- limitation below Sensor. There is a difference between
Lamps get 800LUX Actual Human Eye Light (LUX) Sensing
switch-ON & Sensor Light (LUX) Sensing.
before time. • Whenever ambient light intensity
(Roughly 20 drops below 800 LUX, RLS will
Min early at Switch-ON headlamps in Auto
Twilight mode.
Condition) • If driver / owner doesn’t require
Head-Lamp, he can come out of
“AUTO” mode by shifting Left
Leaver of Combination Switch.
5. In “AUTO” • As per design As per the Homologation
mode specifications requirement,
Headlamps get • In “AUTO” mode Headlamps will
Switch-ON in always get Switch-ON in Low
Low Beam Beam.
only. • High Beam option is not available
for “AUTO” mode.
• If user / customer want to put
Headlamp in High Beam, he can
always manually Switch – ON
headlamps by usual method and
activate the same.
(Note: Once manually headlamps
are ON, you are out of “AUTO”
mode hence automatic wiping &
automatic Head-lamp ON-OFF will
not work.)
6. In daytime • Manual • Please check whether Manual
bright light Switch for Switch, for Headlamps is OFF at
condition, Head-Lamp is Right Leaver of Combination
Headlamps ON. Switch.
remain “ON”

Page 14 of 17
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
after • RLS Sensor on • Please check whether RLS sensor
activating Windshield is is not covered with any Cloth /
“AUTO” mode covered with cardboard / Sun film / shadow
Cloth /
cardboard /
Sun Film /
any kind of
shadow.
7. In Automatic • Dirty / sticky • Please check whether Windshield

Wiping Windshield in area above sensor is clean. It
condition, Sensor Area should be free form dirt, dust, oil,
wipers doesn’t sticky material etc.
wipe with Rain • RLS system is designed for
Intensity Automatic Wiping as per Rain
Speed. Intensity Speed. But user/
customer requirement will vary
from person to person.
• At drizzling rain, some customer
may not feel to Switch-ON wipers
or some may feel that wiping is
required. The wiping intensity is
fixed for Optimum Speed pattern &
it is fixed. The Customer can not
change it. If he needs faster /
slower wiping, he can switch to
Manual Wiping by going in high /
Low Wipe mode.
8. In “Auto” • High amount • RLS Sensor is very sensitive in
mode though of moisture detecting water. In Rainy Season,
there is no present in after wiping water on windshield
water on the air though we are not able to see the
windshield, • Damaged water on windshield, a thin layer
wipers keep on Wiper Blades in terms of moisture gets
wiping. accumulated on Sensor area. This
also detected by Sensor as Water
and it keeps on Wiping. This kind

Page 15 of 17
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
of behaviour is more common in
Rainy Season since there is lot of
moisture present in atmosphere. If
require, in such condition user can
manually switch-OFF Wipers by
coming out of “AUTO” mode.
• Check the wiper blade for wear.
• If the wiper blade can not wipe the
windshield uniformly and clearly,
replace the wiper blade with new
one
9. In “Auto” Damaged Wiper • Check the wiper blade for wear. If
mode though Blades the wiper blade can not wipe the
rain intensity is windshield uniformly and clearly,
less, wiper replace the wiper blade with new
keeps on one.
wiping for long
duration
10. Erratic Sensing • Air Gap • Check whether there is any air gap
for Rain & developed between RLS Sensor & Windshield.
Light between • Check whether any water droplet /
Sensor & dust / dirt is present between RLS
Windshield Sensor & windshield
• Water / Dust • For above both conditions, we
/ Dirt need to replace complete sensor
accumulated with New One.
between
Sensor &
Windshield
11. RLS is sensing • Error in • Check whether Lighting System /

Rain only no Wiper circuit Wiping System is ok as per TC4
Light or vice a • Error in checklist.
versa. Head-Lamp
circuit

Page 16 of 17
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
12. Erratic • Snow/Fog/ • Snow / Fog / Smog is a form of
behaviour in Smog Water.
Snow / Fog / • Sensor can not exactly
Smog. differentiate between water &
Snow / Fog / Smog. This is a
limitation of RLS. In case of erratic
sensing in such conditions, please
Switch-OFF “AUTO” mode of RLS.

Page 17 of 17
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Description –
Reverse Parking Assistance system is an indicating system, which detects

the obstacle behind the vehicle above the ground level and alerts the
driver with the distance and direction of the obstacle along with the alert
sound while reversing the vehicle
Need for the feature -
- To indicate the driver about the obstacle behind the vehicle which
cannot be viewed by normal IRVM and Side view mirrors while taking
reverse.
- To avoid accidents of the vehicle while taking reverse.
- To avoid hitting the child playing behind the vehicle while reversing the
vehicle.
Operating Principle -
It works on ultrasonic principle, In case of any obstacles lying behind the

vehicle upto maximum distance defined from the rear bumper i.e. 120
cm, obstacle height should be 30 cm from the ground.
Sensor height (from the centre of the sensor) is above 57.8 cm from
ground level in unladen condition and 44.5 cm in fully laden condition,
waves get disturbed and are reflected back to sensor and sensor transmits
the signal to ECU which converts data into Audio/Visual alarm to driver.
The audible warning begins when reversing vehicle from a distance of
about 120 cm. The smaller the distance, longer will be the beep.
• High sensitivity
• - System automatically gets activated when the vehicle is shifted
to reverse gear.
• The system generates both audible and visual warning on IRVM when
the vehicle comes within 120cm of the obstacle.
• Display with car image in IRVM provides the distance in cm and the
direction of the obstacle (left or right side of the vehicle)
Mahindra & Mahindra Ltd Scorpio VLX RPAS

Page 1 of 20
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
• 2 sensors provide the maximum coverage across the width of the
vehicle.
• Uses ultrasonic frequency for accuracy
Specifications –
• Operating temperature range: 35-110°C

• 3 detection zones : Less than 50, 50-70, 70-120 cm
Maximum Detection Distance –
1st zone: 120cm – 70cm – Green indication with corresponding distance

2nd zone: 70cm – 50cm - Green & Orange indication with corresponding
distance
3rd zone: Less than 50cm – Green, Orange & Red indication with STOP
indication.
System Description
Reverse Parking Assistance system consists of:

• Electronic Control unit (ECU)
• Sensors (2 numbers fitted at the rear bumper)
• Internal Rear View Mirror (IRVM) with car image and buzzer
integrated
Two sensors on
rear bumper
IRVM
RPAS Controller

Page 2 of 20
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Sensor body
Sensor cover
IRVM with car image
Sensor height
Sensors is 57.8 cm
from ground
in unladen
condition,
44.5 cm in
fully laden
condition.

Page 3 of 20
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Reverse Parking assistant system- Parking Position (min 50cm)
Ultrasonic waves in horizontal direction of the vehicle
Ultrasonic waves in vertical direction of the vehicle -

Page 4 of 20
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Electrical Layout & Location Of RPAS Units -
RPAS Controller
below Co Driver
seat

Page 5 of 20
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Routing for IRVM

4 Pole connector
Two pole rear parking sensors connectors

on chassis

Page 6 of 20
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
RPAS Operation -
Step by step approach -
Turn ON the ignition

1
Car image will appear on the left side of the

IRVM with green and orange indications
blinking 3 times confirming the system
healthiness .
2
Shift the gear to Reverse and move the

vehicle slowly.
3
-If the obstacle is more than 120 cm from the

rear bumper, then the system will not show
any indication in the IRVM and it will not give
any beep sound also.
4
-No directional indication.
If the obstacle comes at 120cm or less from

the rear bumper, system will start giving
indication with beep sound to the user.
5

Page 7 of 20
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
- If obstacle distance from the rear bumper is
in between 120cm to 70cm
- Directional indicator will blink Green in the
corresponding direction of the obstacle and
6 the distance will be displayed on right side of
IRVM with the nearest multiple value of 5 like
75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 105, 110, 105, 120.
- Beep sound will come with longer interval
between the beeps.
Obstacle in between 120cm to 70cm
GREEN : Blink
7 ORANGE: OFF
RED : OFF

in between 70cm to 50cm,
- Directional indicator in the IRVM will blink
Green & Orange in the corresponding
direction of the obstacle and the distance
8 will be displayed on right side of IRVM with
the nearest multiple value of 5 like 70, 65,
60, 55, 50.
- Beep sound will come with shorter interval
between the beeps.
Obstacle in between 70cm to 50cm

GREEN : Blink
9 ORANGE : Blink
RED : OFF

below 50cm
- Directional indicator will be ON with
10 Green, Orange and Red in the corresponding
direction of the obstacle and the distance
indicator will display STOP continuous beep
sound showing danger beyond this point.

Page 8 of 20
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Obstacle in less than 50cm
GREEN : ON
11 ORANGE : ON
RED :ON
Limitations -
• System cannot sense the wire mesh, handrail or small objects.

• System will give wrong signal on reversing the vehicle on grasslands
and bumpy roads.
• System cannot sense the obstacle like cotton or surface which
absorbs supersonic easily.
• System may malfunction or may not function properly when the
same frequency of the system (40 KHZ) supersonic sound is created
by other systems like metal sound, high pressure emission rise or
horn sound to sensor.
• The system may malfunction on a plain ground to ramp or vice versa
• System may give wrong signal by sensing the ground when the
bumper is tilted more from the normal position.
• System operation is dependent on the reflection angle of the
obstacle.
• System may give false alarm during the heavy rain conditions and
during the snow conditions and heavy wind conditions.
• System may give wrong signal when the vehicle is in overloaded
condition by sensing the ground.
• System will not sense the pot holes or the trenches or drainages
which are below the ground level.

Page 9 of 20
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
CAUTION -
• This system is designed to be an aid and should not replace the

need to drive carefully. Under no circumstances manufacturer will
accept any responsibility or liable for any direct or indirect,
incidental or consequential damage, or for any injuries resulting
from installing or use of this system.
• This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving
objects. It is designed to provide a warning to assist the driver in
detecting large stationary objects when moving in reverse at
parking speed of approximately less than 5 Km/ Hr.
• The reverse parking assistance system may have reduced
performance or get activated during the inclement weather.
• To help in avoiding personal injury, always use caution when in
reverse and when using the Reverse Assistance System.
• Please practice reverse parking using different obstacles to grasp
this product performance.
• Clean the sensors, make them free from ice for proper working of
the system.
• Pressing the sensor on active region may damage the sensor &
hamper its sensing range, in turn causing the system to malfunction.
Note -
1. Rear footstep to be kept folded to avoid false alarming

2. Misalignment/ tilting of footstep or rear bumper may cause system
to sense it & may give false alarming.

Page 10 of 20
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Electrical Circuit Diagram – RPAS –

Page 11 of 20
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Diagnosis -
Sr. Problem Possible causes Resolution

No.
Display of A. No power 1. Verify the supply and ground wire
CAR image is supply to the IRVM in the IRVM connector is connected
not properly.
appearing in 2. Check for the Fuse to IRVM is not
the IRVM blown out.
1.
when the 3. Check for the short of the power
switch is in and the ground wire.
'ACC' B. IRVM may be 1. Verify with the new IRVM
position faulted
Display of A. Signal from the 1. Verify the controller connector

the CAR controller is not whether it is connected properly
image going to the mirror 2. Verify with the new Controller
2. appeared
and gone B. Controller may 1. Verify with the new controller
OFF be faulted 2. Verify with new sensors on both
immediately sides.
Car image in A. Signal from the 1. Check whether the controller
the IRVM is sensor is not connector is connected properly.
appearing coming to the 2. Check whether the sensor
but the 3 controller connector is connected properly to
blinks of the the wiring harness of the sensor.
Green and B. Controller may 1. Verify with the new controller
3. Orange LED be faulted
of the C. Sensors on both 1. Verify with the new sensors on
distance sides may be both sides
indicators faulted
not coming
on both
sides
4. Car image in A. Signal from the 1. Check whether the corresponding
the IRVM is corresponding sensor connector is connected

Page 12 of 20
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
appearing sensor is not properly.
but the 3 coming to the 2. Check whether the wires in pin 7
blinks of the controller and pin 15 of the controller
Green and connector are connected properly.
Orange LED 3. Check whether the controller
of the connector is connected properly.
distance B. Corresponding 1. Verify with the new sensor on the
indicators side sensor may be corresponding side.
not coming faulted
on single
side
5. Car image A. Signal from the 1. Check whether reverse lamp is
with 3 blinks Reverse switch is glowing during Reverse, if not, the
of the Green not coming to the problem is in the Reverse switch.
and Orange controller (pin 1) 2. Check the voltage at the pin 1 to
LED the ground. If the voltage is not
appearing within 12+/-4V, then the problem is
during in the Reverse switch wiring harness.
Ignition ON, Change the corresponding wiring
but the harness
system is B. Controller may 1. Check with the new Controller.
not sensing be faulted
the obstacle
during the
Reverse.
False alarm A. Sensors are 1. Gently clean the sensor for any
with display blocked with mud, foreign materials and don't scratch
6. and buzzer snow or ice the sensor.
sounds Sensor body should be inline with
sometimes the sensor cover.
without the B. Sensors are not 1. Check whether sensor has come
obstacle installed in proper out slightly from the bumper.
behind the orientation. 2. Check sensors are installed such
vehicle that 'UP' indication mark is on top
during and the projection in the sensor is
reverse. fitted correctly in the projection of
the bumper.

Page 13 of 20
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
3. Verify whether sensor is shifted
down by more than 10 degree, if so
change the angle of the sensor
towards upside.
c. Bumper may be 1. Check whether bumper is shifted
shifted more from more from its original position, if so
its original correct it or change the bumper with
position new one.
A. Sensor is not 1. Check whether sensor has came
installed in proper out slightly from the bumper.
orientation, which 2. Check sensors are installed such
is sensing the that 'UP' indication mark is on top
System is
Ground or the foot and the projection in the sensor is
giving
step. fitted correctly in the projection of
constant
the bumper.
false alarm
3. Verify whether sensor is shifted
when there
down by more than 10 degree, if so
7. is no
change the angle of the sensor
obstacle
towards upside.
behind the
B. Bumper may be 1. Check whether bumper is shifted
vehicle
shifted more from more from its original position, if so
during
its original correct it or change the bumper with
reverse.
position new one.
C. Foot step is not 1. Verify whether the foot step is
in its original damaged or moved much from its
position. original position.
Only the a. IRVM may be 1. Verify with the new IRVM
buzzer faulted
indication is
coming, but
display of
8. the
direction
and the
distance
indication is
not

Page 14 of 20
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
displaying in
the IRVM.
Only the a. IRVM may be 1. Verify with the new IRVM

display faulted
indication is
available,
9.
but no
buzzer
indication is
available
Obstacle is Sensor may be 1. Verify whether sensor body is
not sensed faulted inside the sensor cover (i.e if
properly by sensor body and sensor cover is
the sensor not inline), then change the
10.
sensor. During fitment of the
sensor, sensor body should not
be touched.

Page 15 of 20
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Attention -
Obstacle at the blind zone cannot be sensed by the system.
Blind Zone
Obstacle
Blind zone

Page 16 of 20
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Please check the condition of the obstacle behind you vehicle before
reversing. In some cases, the display may be not as same as the reality
due to the sensor installed level, obstacle shape, reflection condition and
so on. Some examples are given below.
1. Point B will be detected sooner or later, but A may not be detected

forever.
A
B
2. Not all the obstacles is detected from 120cm, for instance, a person
is detected from 75cm because of the week reflection or absorption
of the waves of the clothes.

Page 17 of 20
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Blind Area
3. The distance indication may move ups and downs due to different
sizes of the obstacle at different positions.
Blind Area
4. Though the obstacle is in the sensing zone the obstacle may not be
detected since the ultrasonic waves are not get reflected back to the
sensor because of parallel/plain/flat surface obstacle parallel to bumper.

Page 18 of 20
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Obstacle
Sensing Zone
5. If the parallel/plain/flat surface obstacle in angular position, the

obstacle will be detected.
Obstacle

Page 19 of 20
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
6. The obstacle of conical shape may not be detected, since the

ultrasonic waves get reflected away.

Page 20 of 20
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Description -
Smart Power window with anti-pinch automatically stops during express

up when obstructions are detected in the path of the closing window.
This feature is provided with driver door only.
Customer benefit: Safety and convenience, particularly with feature like

one-touch closing.
Operating principle :-
Motor With Hall effect sensor - Power Window assembly with in-built
Hall effect sensor in motor gives output pulses for every revolution of
motor to the controller which enables the controller to trace the position
of the glass and reverse the direction of glass in case any upward
movement of glass is obstructed before it reaches to top end position.
Controller - The electronic control unit which is programmed with logic,

senses and memorises the end positions along with the frictional
resistance of door during the learning process.
Driver door with anti-pinching -
Functions -
AUTO UP :
• Turn ON the Ignition.
• Pull the Driver door switch button more than 0.5 Sec. Glass will
start moving in upward direction. Remove your hand from switch.
• During this upward travel, any obstacle is detected with the force
value ranging between 70 ~ 100 Newton, controller will sense the
Mahindra & Mahindra Ltd Scorpio VLX Smart Power Window

Page 1 of 7
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
load and will reverse the direction of glass in down ward direction
for almost full stroke length.
• However if the force against the glass is less than the specified
value then this function does not operate.
AUTO DOWN :
• Push the driver door switch button more than 0.5 sec, glass will
start move in downward direction. Remove your hand from switch.
• These all functions like Auto Up/ down, Anti-pinch during Auto UP
will get deactivated in case of removal of Vehicle Battery Positive
or Negative terminal.
• With de-activation of this feature, normal power windows will still

function.
Smart power window learning -
To activate the feature the learning of the power window assembly for
one complete cycle is required & is as follows –
1. Move the window glass to extreme bottom most position by

continuously pressing the switch.
2. Start moving the glass up by pressing UP switch, hold the switch for
two seconds after reaching to top most position, system will
understand this position as extreme top position of glass.
3. Start moving the glass down wards by pressing down switch, hold
the switch for two seconds after reaching bottom most position,
system will understand this position as extreme bottom position of
the glass.
With the above action, the system memorises the end positions and the
controller is set for that stroke length.

Page 2 of 7
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Now pull and hold the power window switch for 1 sec for express window
up. The same procedure is to be repeated for express window down.
During express up, if movement of glass is obstructed by a 70 N force or

more, it will start moving in down ward direction for almost full stroke
length.
WARNING
• Make sure that the passenger has his/her hands etc. inside the
vehicle before closing the windows.
• Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could

unknowingly activate switches.
Recommendations -
1. In case of vehicle Battery terminal removal (Positive & negative )

the express up/express down/ Anti pinch during express up will get
de-initialised. To initialise the function we have to learn the system
for one complete cycle.
2. In case of hard whether strip condition in express Up mode, glass

will treat it as an obstacle and glass will start going down. This
needs to be checked at authorised service stations
3. In case of anti pinching 5 times continuously at the same point ,

controller will loose memory, so power window needs to be
relearnt.

Page 3 of 7
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Electrical Layout & Location Of POWER WINDOW Units -
Smart power
window
(driver door)
motor and
controller

Page 4 of 7
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Electrical Circuit Diagram - SMART POWER WINDOW -

Page 5 of 7
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Diagnosis -
Sr. Failure Symptoms / Causes Corrective Action

No Effects
1 Power No electrical No power supply
Window not feature
operating working
In-operation Battery discharged Replace / Re-Charge
of all four / Battery voltage Battery
power below 9V (Under
windows load)
Power Window High inrush current Lubricate glass run
fuse (40A) – Power window
blown jammed Check and replace
power window
2 Express up Regulator not Top / Down
not working initialized initialization is
required
5 times continuous Top / Down
anti-pinch (<6 initialization is
Seconds between required
each anti-Pinch)
Up / Down signal Up / Down signal
available for <0.4 required for
Seconds minimum 0.4 Seconds
3 Anti-Pinch Regulator not Top / Down
Not working initialized initialization is
required
5 times continuous Top / Down
anti-pinch (<6 initialization is
Seconds between required
each anti-Pinch)

Page 6 of 7
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Controller failure Power window system
to be replaced
Hall sensor failure Power window system
to be replaced
4 Automatic Obstacle in path of Obstacle to be
anti-pinch glass movement removed
during Glass run very hard Glass run to be
Express up checked. Glass run to
/ Manual up be lubricated
Glass run to be
changed.

Page 7 of 7
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Description –
TPM system measures the pressure and temperature inside the tyre and
transmits it to central receiver unit inside the vehicle through radio
frequency. The receiver unit receives this information, identifies data
received corresponds to which tyre and gives warning signals if
undesirable tyre pressure/ temperature condition occurs.
TPM system provides warning signals to the driver in order to understand

the healthiness of the tyre which helps him to maintain the recommend
air pressure in such a way to have a good vehicle dynamics and better
fuel efficiency.
System Description -
TPMS for a vehicle, comprises of –

1. Pressure sensor mounted on each wheel (FL, FR,RR,RL & Spare
wheel)
2. Receiver (ECU) located in the vehicle near park brake.
3. Display unit located in the instrument cluster.
Location of the sensors, Receiver & Display unit in the vehicle –
Mahindra & Mahindra Ltd Scorpio VLX TPMS

Page 1 of 21
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Location of the TPMS Display unit in the instrument Cluster –
DISPLAY UNIT INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Electrical Layout & Location Of TPMS Units
TPMS Controller
Near Hand Brake

Page 2 of 21
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
TPMS operation:
1 Turn on ignition.
The system performs a self check

and receives latest updated
information (pressure) of all tyre
locations.
2
Note: Only applies to permanent
battery fed solution
Note: This procedure takes max.
10 seconds.
All tyres OK mode

If all conditions are OK, system
confirms showing all green
LED’s. otherwise during a self
test itself if any one of the tyre
3
pressure is below set
value(either warning or alert
condition), deflated tyre
location LED will blink orange,
red respectively.

Page 3 of 21
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Loop Display mode
If pressing the mode button at
the end of OK mode, the system
will display the current
pressure of each tyre starting
from FL. (Rotation from FL->FR-
>RR->RL-> Spare) with in 10
seconds
Single tyre Display mode
During Loop Display mode if
4 Mode button is pressed again,
display will show pressure &
temp of Front Left tyre .
When Mode button is pressed
again within 1 minute, display
5
will show pressure & temp of
Front Right tyre.

6
Rear Right tyre .

7
Rear Left tyre .
With Spare Wheel
8
b
Spare wheel.
9 When Mode button is pressed

a again within 1 minute, display
will exit from single tyre display

Page 4 of 21
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
mode to OK mode.
There are three warning modes (3,4,5) available in the system.
1. PSI
2. TEMP. °C
3. TEMP. ALERT
4. LEAKAGE ALERT
5. PRESSURE ALERT
PRESSURE ALERT —
Please check pressure -
Condition: If any one of the tyre pressure is 75% of set value (32 psi) or
lower.
Response:
-The corresponding tyre LED will blink orange (0.2 seconds on, 0.8
seconds off) for one minute and beep in the same frequency for 15
seconds. If driver wants to turn off the beep sound, he has to push the
mode button..
-The 3-digit 7-segment LED will show the current pressure of the deflated
tyre.
-This complete procedure will be repeated only once. After this it will
light up orange continuously

Page 5 of 21
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
-At the same time it will illuminate the pressure alert LED near the
display.
UNDER PRESSURE ALARM –
Condition : If any one of the tyre pressure is 50% of set value (32 psi)
or lower.
Response :
- The LED of the corresponding tyre will blink red with doubled
frequency (0.1 seconds on, 0.4 seconds off) for 2 minutes and beep at the
same frequency for 15 seconds.
- If driver wants to turn off the beep sound, he has to push the mode
button.
- The same sequence will be repeated continuously until the condition is
improved (a normal or warning condition has been met).
- The 3-digit 7-segment section will show the current pressure of the
tyre.
- At the same time it will illuminate the pressure alert LED near the
display.
- User has to attend the tyre immediately by stopping the vehicle
TEMPERATURE ALERT –
Condition: If the temperature of the concerned tyre is 100°C or higher.

This can happen running
the vehicle with deflated tyre
Response:
-The LED of the corresponding tire will blink red (0.2 seconds on, 0.8
seconds off) for 2 minutes and beep at the same frequency for 15
seconds.
button.

Page 6 of 21
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
- The 3-digit 7-segment section will show the current temperature of this
tire.
- At the same time it will illuminate the temperature alert LED near the
display.
- User has to immediately attend the tyre by stopping the vehicle
LEAKAGE ALERT –
Condition: If the specific tyre is losing more than 3 PSI within 1
minute.
Response:
-The LED of the corresponding tire will blink red (0.2 seconds on, 0.8
seconds.
button.
- The same sequence will be repeated continuously until the condition is
improved (a normal or warning condition has been met).
- At the same time it will illuminate the Leakage alert LED near the
display.
- User has to immediately attend the tyre by stopping the vehicle.
OVER PRESSURE WARNING –
Condition :If the pressure of one (or more) of the tyres is 48 PSI or
higher.

Page 7 of 21
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Response:
- The LED of the corresponding tyre will blink red (0.2 seconds on, 0.8
seconds.
- If driver wants to turn off the beep sound he has to push the mode
button.
- During this whole period, the 3-digit 7-segment LED will show the
current pressure of this tyre.
- Stop the vehicle immediately and check the tyre pressure
Using Spare Tyre in case of tyre puncture -

Page 8 of 21
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Caution : After rectification of the puncture , the swapped spare wheel

should be brought back to the original position by following steps No. 4 to
6.

Page 9 of 21
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
If more than two tyres are to be swapped refer to sequential tyre rotation
procedure.
Care to be taken while servicing -
The sensors are lightweight, mounted in the wheel rim. It’s important to
be careful when using a tyre-mounting machine. The sensor could be
damaged in two ways either by:
• Direct contact with the machine or

• by the bead of the tyre as it is forced over the rim.
CAUTION !!!
- In case of tyre damage/ worn out ,the same sensor needs to be

checked for the physical damage before installing in the new tyre at
recommended service station After installation , the tyres need
to be learned with system
- TPMS sensor is more precise than consumer-grade tyre pressure gauges.

It may be necessary to explain this if the customer routinely mis-inflates
tyres using a gas station gauge.
- If tyres are rotated or a sensor is replaced, the receiver must be

reprogrammed, otherwise the system will continue to report the correct
pressures, but will assign them to the wrong locations on the vehicle.
- In tyre rotation while deflating the tyre by 3 PSI, take care you are not
deflating the same tyre
after long confirmation beep.
TPMS Sensor Replacement Procedure –

Page 10 of 21
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Dismantling –
Start breaking down tyres by

deflating them. Use a tyre valve
tool to remove the valve core from
the stem to completely deflate the
tyre. Remove all the air and then
remove the locknut. Press the
sensor gently towards inside. It will
get detached from the rim.
Then start removing the tyre bead
as follows:
Break down tyres preferably by

using a bead breaker with Nylon
Roller.

Page 11 of 21
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
While using a bead breaker, the
valve must be positioned opposite
to the bead breaker to avoid bead
breaker to avoid possible sensor
damage.
Lift outer tyre bead over the rim

using a tyre tool.
Note – Valve must be positioned
just left of the start position to
avoid sensor damage.
Do not allow the tyre tool to touch
the sensor.
Lift inner tyre bead over the rim

using a tyre tool.
the sensor.

Page 12 of 21
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Lift the inner tyre bead over the
rim & remove the valve stem.
Assembly –
Fit & tighten the sensor onto the

wheel rim.
Note – Tightening Torque – 5 Nm
Place inner tyre bead over the rim.

Note – Start off mounting the tyre
completely opposite to the valve
position.
Place outer tyre bead over the rim.

position.

Page 13 of 21
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Inflate all tyres to recommended

pressure, check valve area for
leakage & rebalance the wheels
prior to installing back on the
vehicle.
Note – Recommended Tyre

Pressure – 32 psi.
Tyre Rotation procedure –
FL FR
1 2
RL RR
4 3
ST

Page 14 of 21
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
After Tyre Rotation –
FL FR
5 3
RL RR
2 1
ST
Learning the system after Tyre Rotation –
Press and hold Mode button on

1
display.
2 Turn on ignition.

Page 15 of 21
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Release Mode button when
display shows L-5.
3
To program spare wheel sensor,
Proceed to step 4
Deflate spare tyre by 3 PSI. The
spare wheel sensor is
L-5 programmed when a long
4 confirmation beep tone sounds
with respective tyre location LED
and automatically FL tyre LED
will start blinking.
After spare tyre programming,
the FL tyre will start blinking
001
green with icon indication
001.Deflate FL tyre by 3 PSI. The
5
FL tyre sensor is programmed
when a long confirmation beep
tone sounds with respective tyre
location LED
After FL tyre programming, FR
tyre will start blinking green
002 with icon indication 002.Deflate
FR tyre by 3 PSI. The FR tyre
6
sensor is programmed when a
long confirmation beep tone
sounds with respective tyre
location LED
After FR tyre programming, RR
RR tyre by 3 PSI. The RR tyre
7
location LED

Page 16 of 21
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
After RR tyre programming, RL
RR tyre by 3 PSI. The RR tyre
8
location LED
Wait for 1 minute, system will

9 come back to all tyres ok mode
and all LEDs will light green.
Limitations –
• TPMS does not monitor other conditions then tyre pressure &
temperature, such as tyre wear.
• TPMS is unable to detect an instant tyre burst or other defect
timely and inform the driver in advance
• At a time, only one tyre can be swapped with spare wheel.
• There may be possibility of getting SCH error on crossing
environment area prone to heavy power lines and RF signals.

Page 17 of 21
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Important Points :
• It is recommended to fill the pressure to 32 psi at digital gauge

station only.
• Every 15 days, owner has to inflate the tyre upto 32 psi and
inflation should be done at cold condition/ambient temp.
• Pressure deviation b/w TPMS Display and Gauge will be
depending upon the following factors:
• Atmospheric pressure
• Error in pressure filling gauge( not calibrated)
• Air leakage during inflation/deflation
• TPMS measures the absolute pressure of the tyre not relative
pressure( gauge pressure)
• Pressure deviation is defined for 0.5 psi (min) and 2 psi (max) by
M&M.
• TPMS sensor has inbuilt battery which has got 5 years lifespan, so
sensor needs to be replaced after 5 years.
• If vehicle battery/fuse is first disconnected and then connected,
it will take 2 minutes to come to All Tyre OK mode in TPMS
display.
• While inflating tyre, pressure updation will take 2 minutes on
TPMS display.
• It should be noted that if you rotate the tyres or replace the
sensor on your vehicle, you MUST re-program the receiver unit
inside otherwise it will consider the sensor is on a different wheel
location.
• At a time, only one tyre can be swapped with spare wheel and
then follow the learning procedure
• If more than one tyre needs to be learned, all the 5 tyres are to
be learned as per the learning spare wheel procedure mentioned
in the manual.

Page 18 of 21
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Electrical Circuit Diagram - TPMS

Page 19 of 21
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Diagnosis –
Sr. Symptom Reason Cause Action

No
1 Display shows 1. Due to lose 1. Antenna
SCH error in all of signal connected Change the antenna.
the tyre location reception with ECU
between all might have
transmitters been
and receiver. removed.
2. Pin in the
antenna may
be damaged.
2 Any one of the Signal 1. Sensor 1. Check & confirm.
tyres alone show interruption non-available
SCH error. between inside the
particular tyre.
senor and 2. Sensor life 2. After the
receiver may exceed 5 specified life time of
years life. the sensor customer
has to replace the
sensor
3 Even if customer New sensor is If the new Refer the learning
changes the new not learned sensor is procedure.
tyre with new with receiver fitted with
sensor system old receiver,
shows “SCH” the learning
error. needs to be
done.
4 Display not Separate While Check the four pole
switching on. connector for connecting connector behind
TPMS display cluster, may the cluster.
not connected. forgot to
(4 pole connect this
connector at TPMS

Page 20 of 21
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
the receiver connector.
end).
5 Display not Even though all Fuse for the Refer to the circuit
switching ON connectors are TPMS may be diagram to locate
connected, fused out. the fuse , battery
display not connection pin &
coming ON. Ignition pin and
check the 12V supply
is available in those
pins after switch on
ignition.
6 Display not Chances of One of the The colour code is
switching ON disconnection wire may be given in the back
of signal line connected to side of the 4 pole
form receiver dummy connector. But
to display in terminal. connection may not
the cluster. be done as per the
colour code. Please
Refer to the circuit
diagram.

Page 21 of 21
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Wheels & Tyres
Contents
Description
Trouble Shooting
Care of the system
In Car repairs
Removal & Refitment of the tyre
Mahindra & Mahindra Ltd Scorpio VLX Wheels

Page 1 of 17
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Description
The tyres fitted in Scorpio are radial tubeless tyres and with a suitable
wheel disc.
In the tyre P 235/75 R 16 - The 215 is the width of the tyre in mm at the
designated air pressure and load. The / 75 is the aspect ratio of the tyre.
(Ratio between the height and width here the height is 0.75 times the
width
The tyres play a very important and vital role in the vehicle handling and
ride characteristic. Hence it is advised that any change not as per the
specification have to be done with caution.
The air pressure maintained has a direct influence on the fuel average
obtained, braking and also on ride characteristic. Hence it is imperative
that the tyre pressure be maintained as per specification. The tyre
specified with the specified air pressure gives these tyres a safe speed of
180 Km/hr

9 Maintain the correct tyre
pressure.
9 Do the tyre rotation.
Under Inflation
Rapid wear at
Shoulder Lack of rotation
Excessive cornering.

pressure.
Rapid wear at
centre Over inflation

Page 2 of 17
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
pressure.
Under Inflation
Cracked Treads
Check and adjust:
9 Hub end play
9 Camber to be checked
and adjusted.
One Edge Wear Excessive camber

Excessive cornering
9 Check & correct Toe In
9 Check the chassis bend
9 If tyre rotation not
carried out as per
schedule. Do the tyre
rotation.
Feathered Edge Incorrect Toe In

Wear No tyre rotation.
9 Balance the tyres.
9 Check the brake drum
roundness.
9 Check jammed wheel
cylinder/ calipers.
9 Check the wheel
bearings.
Bald Spots Unbalanced tyre 9 Avoid driving with
Out of round brake sudden brake locking.
drums in rear.
Faulty wheel
bearings.
Sudden braking.

Page 3 of 17
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Lack of rotation or 9 Tyre rotation.
Worn or Out of 9 Check & replace the
Alignment suspension components.
Suspension
Wavy / Scalloped
wear
Side Wall crack- Kerb damage
radial/ diagonal Stone hit
Side wall crack Run Flat
circumferential / ( It is more obvious
tyre bulging from inside )
The tyre is one of the most abused components hence maintaining the
tyre is of utmost importance.
The recommended tyre pressures are given below:
235/70 R16
Front Rear
2.2 bar / 32 psi 2.2 bar / 32 psi
Up to 5 persons +
40 Kg load
hh
hhh

Page 4 of 17
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
235/70 R16
Front Rear
More than 5 person 2.2 bar / 32 psi 2.2 bar /32 psi
hh
hh
hh
The tyre pressure should be checked once in a fortnight. (Once a week

during summers). The tyre pressures should always be checked &
corrected in cold condition. The valve should be always covered with the
valve cover. An opened valve can have the valve needle stuck in a partial
position causing the tyre to bleed during operation..
The tyre pressure specified can cater to continuous high-speed

performance. Hence it is not advisable to increase the tyre pressure
before going on a high speed run.
The practice of keeping the tyre pressure lower in summer is actually

detrimental to the tyre. To understand that let us examine what happens
– if lower pressure is kept. Then the sidewall flexing is going to be more
hence the heat generation will also be higher which will result in a faster
increase in tyre pressure. So the wear rate is going to be higher.
Similarly the practice of bleeding the tyre pressure to reduce the
pressure after a long run can cause the sidewall to crack and in a worst
scenario sidewall bulging.
Before going on a long drive it is a good practice to remove the

stones/pebbles trapped in the treads. The probability of a puncture due
to stone trapped and digging through the crown once it gets heated up is
reduced.
It should also be kept in mind that a radial tyre with higher pressure is
more prone to burst under impact from stone at high speed or kerb
impact. Lower air pressure results in higher sidewall flexing and
drastically increases the chance of sidewall damage / cut in bad roads.

Page 5 of 17
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Wheel balancing should be done at least every 20,000 Kms. It is
compulsory to do a balancing of the wheel after any puncture.
The tyre rotation should be carried out every 10,000 Kms.
Wheel alignemen is recommended to be done every 40,000 Kms. However

if any indication of abnormal wear then please check the alignement.
In case of abnormal tyre wear refer to the Trouble shooting section and
take the corrective action suggested.
The grooves in the tyre are used to pump out the water between the road
and the tyre. In case the water is not pumped out the tyre will ride on
water. Since the coefficient of friction of water is very low that will
result a sliding action. Obviously the amount of water which the tyre can
pump out between the ground and the tyre will depend on the depth of
the groove which is acting as a channel. The tyre manufacturers
recommend that a minimum tread depth of 1.6 mm should be present.
Once the tread depth is less than 1.6 mm it is recommended to replace

the tyres. I t is not advisable to retread the tyre.
Any kind of lubricant on the tyre is detrimental as it promotes

degradation of rubber and also increases the chance of hardening.
Normally this happens when a mechanics rubs the spare oil or grease on
to the sidewall of the tyre.
Tyre Rotation –

Page 6 of 17
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
1. Check & ensure tyre pressure at 2.2 bar / 32 psi in all five wheels.
2. Rotate ( swap the positions ) the wheels as shown in the diagram

above
• Driver side rear goes to Driver side front position.

• Driver side front wheel goes to Co-Driver side rear position.
• Co-Driver side rear wheel goes to spare wheel position.
• Spare wheel goes to Co-Driver side front position.
• Co-Driver side front wheel goes to Driver side rear position.
In case the vehicle reports for wheel wobbling then the sequence of
balancing & rotation should be as follows:
Important: Before going ahead with the procedure; do a road test and
at that time:-
Please remember that the road shocks can come to the steering wheel
while going over rough or uneven patch.
The important point is that after the road shock is over then it should not
continue to vibrate.
Preliminary Stage:
Mark each tyre assembly position with respect to the hub/ axle shaft.
Balance all the tyre and place it back it each wheel in the same position.
(Tyre pressure for all wheel-32psi)
Now follow the sequence of Stage A, Stage B, Stage C. Road test after
each stage:

Page 7 of 17
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
A. If in preliminary
stage this tyre balance
was above balancing
limit, then do not
rotate.
If during road trial no
change in wobbling,
then rotate the wheel
assembly by 180
degree. (In clockwise
direction)
If in preliminary stage
it was within limit then
rotate by 180 degree.
B.- ‘After A if
no change’
Rotate both the
rotate the assembly rear tyres
by 180 degree in assembly by 180
clockwise direction degrees.
(In clockwise
direction)

Page 8 of 17
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Sequence of operations:
Road Test A Road test B Road test
C Road test
Caution: If the stages of A, B, & C are done together then improvement

may not be noticed. In worst case scenario the problem may get
aggravated.
Before dismounting the wheel Mark the position of the wheel & tyre assembly with
Procedure
respect to for
the wheel balancing
hub (uses any wheel mounting bolt as a reference and applies a paint
mark to hub with respect to disc + tyre.
Check the wheel balancing.

(Also refer Note 1)
If the imbalance C After B - If

after road test If the imbalance
amount is less than no change in is > 40 gm
40 gm. wobbling; then
Rotate the wheel assembly &

check the imbalance
Imbalance location should not

change more than 80 mm in
circumference.
The max imbalance can be 40
gms
While mounting the wheel assembly, rotate the wheel

assembly by 180 degrees.
Now
All copyrightsthe
reservedmatching
by marks will be opposite
Page 9 of 17
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Flow chart to attend Vibration Concern
Vibration observation at certain speed
Loosen & re-torque all Suspension

Joints, Body Mounts, Engine Mounts,
Seat Mountings & Transmission
mounts as specified in manual.
Not Resolved Resolved
Stop
Check Shock Absorber for dampening value

(by hand feel), Suspension Ball Joints &
Steering Intermediate Shaft for play
Replace the part (s), All parts are OK,

if required Not Resolved
Resolved Loosen & re-torque

Propeller Shaft
mountings
Stop
Not Resolved Resolved
Rotate the tyre Stop

one by one from
Front to Rear
Resolved Not Resolved
Stop Swap the tyre(s)

one by one with
good vehicle tyre(s)
Resolved, Change Not Resolved, Call

the Particular tyre Technical Support Cell

Page 10 of 17
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
In Car repairs –
The tyres should be removed and then only be attended for puncture or
damage.
For removal of the tyre from the vehicle the jacking points are:
For 2WD Front- to be supported on the chassis, behind the lower arm
just below the first outrigger.
For 4WD Front -Behind the lower arm just below the first outrigger.
While locating the jack or the locating for the 2-post lift please ensure
that it does not touch the torsion bar. (It can cause the torsion bar to
bend.)
For the rear wheels: below the axle.
Caution
Never go under the vehicle when it is jacked up. This jack is meant
for only raising the wheel. For any under body work/inspection
support the vehicle on vehicle stands.
If the vehicle is run with severely under inflated tyres – the vehicle
stability may be affected. A run flat wheel can also damage the
wheel disc- besides literally shredding the tyre.
Removal & Refitment of the tyre –
It is recommended that the tyre removal and re-fitment on the wheel

disc be done in a tyre specialist shop where the tyre fitting machines are
available. The advantage of the machine over the conventional method is
that the damage to the beading area is totally avoided.
In absence of the machine; ensure that:

Page 11 of 17
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
No sharp tools are inserted while removing the tyre.
No sharp tools/ screwdriver is used while fitting the tyre.
While refitting the tyre the use of powder between the tube & the tyre is
recommended
It is recommended that the tyre be inflated to a pressure of 40 PSI. This

will ensure that the bead is locked in properly and also in centralizing.
Then later reduce the pressure to the recommended pressure.
Since the TPMS unit is in wheel rim hence it is critical that the procedure
given below is strictly followed. Failure to do so will result in sensor
damage.
TPMS Sensor Replacement Procedure –
Dismantling –
Start breaking down tyres by

deflating them. Use a tyre valve
tool to remove the valve core from
the stem to completely deflate the
tyre. Remove all the air and then
remove the locknut. Press the
sensor gently towards inside. It will
get detached from the rim.
Then start removing the tyre bead
as follows:

Page 12 of 17
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Break down tyres preferably by

using a bead breaker with Nylon
Roller.
While using a bead breaker, the

valve must be positioned opposite
to the bead breaker to avoid bead
breaker to avoid possible sensor
damage.

Page 13 of 17
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Lift outer tyre bead over the rim
using a tyre tool.
the sensor.
Lift inner tyre bead over the rim

using a tyre tool.
the sensor.
Lift the inner tyre bead over the

rim & remove the valve stem.
Assembly –
Fit & tighten the sensor onto the

wheel rim.
Note – Tightening Torque – 5 Nm

Page 14 of 17
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Place inner tyre bead over the rim.
position.
Place outer tyre bead over the rim.

position.
Inflate all tyres to recommended

pressure, check valve area for
leakage & rebalance the wheels
prior to installing back on the
vehicle.
Note – Recommended Tyre

Pressure – 32 psi.
Removal & Refitment of the spare wheel from the vehicle –
Remove the covering on the rear

and using the wheel spanner lower
the spare wheel

Page 15 of 17
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Lower the wheel on to the ground

and take off the locating tang from
the disc.
The fitment of the old tyre to the

spare wheel carrier is the reverse of
the above procedure
While fitting the tyre on to the axle
ensure that :
- The boltholes in disc are not
oblong.
- The threads of the bolt are not
having dirt – neither is there
dirt/ mud in the nut. (Generally
while removing a wheel the nuts
are left in the ground collecting
dirt/mud. It is a better practice
to keep the removed nuts on
vehicle.
While tightening the wheel nut

tighten in diagonally opposite order
to each other.
Caution : Failure to do so can

cause vibration of the steering
wheel at high speed.
Description Torque in Nm (lbf-ft)

Wheel Nut 97.5± 5 Nm (72 ±4 lbf-ft)

Page 16 of 17
MAN-00031
922XXXR011107EN-RM
Automotive Sector
Body Mounts 45 ± 5 Nm (33 ± 4 lbf-ft)
Specification & Wear Data –
Description Value
Run out of the tyre- radial 1.5 mm
Run out of the tyre- lateral 1.5 mm
Unbalanced allowed- tyre Max. 1.8 Kgf
Minimum tread depth 1.6 mm

Page 17 of 17

MAN-00031-Scrorpio VLX Repair Manual Rev1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MAN-00031-Scrorpio VLX Repair Manual Rev1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MAN-00031-Scrorpio VLX Repair Manual Rev1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SCORPIO Vlx

M-Hawk 2.2 L Engine

Care of the System

Working principle of various sub systems of the Engine

Dismantling & overhauling of the Engine.

Working Principle, Dismantling & Overhauling of the Turbocharger

Specifications & Wear Data

Sealant Application Pattern & Recommended Sealant

List of the MST

All copyrights reserved by

Mahindra & Mahindra Ltd Scorpio VLX Engine M-Hawk

The 2.2-liter Turbocharged and intercooled common rail direct injected

A variable geometry turbocharger controls the boost to 2.2 bar. The

The piston features re-entrant type combustion chamber and having

The forged connecting rod is connected to induction-hardened crankshaft.

All copyrights reserved by

Mahindra & Mahindra Ltd Scorpio VLX Engine M-Hawk

Refer to the Service diagnosis chart. Additional tests & diagnostic

Information concerning the additional checks is provided within the

Cylinder compression pressure Test

The results of the cylinder compression test can be utilized to diagnose

 Remove all the injectors.

Engine cylinder Head Gasket Failure Diagnosis

An engine cylinder head gasket leak can be:

Cylinder head gasket failure between cylinders is indicated by

Mahindra & Mahindra Ltd Scorpio VLX Engine M-Hawk

Cylinder head gasket leaking between a cylinder and coolant passage

Cylinder to Cylinder Leakage Test

Check the cylinder compression pressure as already explained. Leakage

Cylinder to Water jacket Leakage Test

• Remove the radiator cap.

Symptom Causes Remedial action

4. Cylinder head 9 Replace the cylinder

Mahindra & Mahindra Ltd Scorpio VLX Engine M-Hawk

Noisy engine & black 1. Faulty injectors. 9 Replace injectors

3. Broken parts 9 Inspect and replace the

4. EGR valve stuck 9 Check the EGR valve &

2. Clogged fuel 9 Replace filter.

4. Air leaks in 9 Plug the leaks, replace

5. Fuel return pipe 9 Locate the kink/block in

6. Valve leak 9 Check the compression,

Mahindra & Mahindra Ltd Scorpio VLX Engine M-Hawk

9. leaking exhaust 9 Tighten the TC mounting

10. Exhaust gas 9 Correct the leak

11. Gas leak 9 Change the gasket or the

12. EGR pipe leak. 9 Replace the pipe.

13. Fuels supply 9 Remove the restriction.

14. Compression 9 Check compression.

15. Jammed piston 9 Replace piston rings.

16. Viscous fan 9 Check the VFD as

17. Vacuum leak 9 Check the vacuum leak

Mahindra & Mahindra Ltd Scorpio VLX Engine M-Hawk

Check CR system Refer the diagnostic manual

Black smoke. 1. Air intake 9 Check for hoses, replace

2. Defective 9 Check injectors.

3. Air leaks. 9 Check for leaks between

8. Improper vacuum 9 Check & correct

Mahindra & Mahindra Ltd Scorpio VLX Engine M-Hawk

2. Clogged air filter 9 Replace element.

3. Restriction in air 9 Locate & remove

Remove all the injectors.